Reading view

Why VF Stock Was Climbing Higher Today

Key Points

  • VF beat estimates on the top and bottom lines.

  • Vans sales were down sharply due to channel rationalization.

  • Other company brands, like Timberland and The North Face, performed well.

Shares of VF (NYSE: VFC) were moving higher today after the diversified footwear and apparel company posted better-than-expected results on the bottom line, showing that its turnaround efforts are starting to pay off.

As of 12:27 p.m. ET, the stock was up 12.6% on the news.

Where to invest $1,000 right now? Our analyst team just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks to buy right now. Continue »

Two people shopping for clothes in a store.

Image source: Getty Images.

VF shows signs of life

The parent company of brands like Vans and The North Face has struggled due to weakness in Vans and a broader slowdown in the consumer discretionary category.

The company's fiscal first-quarter results showed the business starting to stabilize after declining for several quarters. VF reported flat revenue at $1.77 billion, ahead of the consensus at $1.7 billion, and excluding Vans, revenue was up 6%, showing it's executing across the rest of its business.

Vans sales, meanwhile, were down 15%, due in part to channel rationalization, or cutting some points of distribution. Timberland was up 11%, and The North Face grew 6%.

Gross margins improved from 51.2% to 53.9%, showing the impact of the company's cost control efforts, but selling, general, and administrative expenses remained elevated, and the company reported an adjusted loss per share of $0.24. That was an improvement from $0.35 in the quarter a year ago, and beat the consensus at a per-share loss of $0.34.

CEO Bracken Darrell said, "As I pass the two-year mark in my role as CEO, we are on track with VF's transformation. We are lowering costs, improving margins, reducing debt, and transforming the organization."

What's next for VF?

VF's guidance makes it clear that the company is still facing challenges. It expects a 4% decline in revenue for the second quarter, but management forecast adjusted operating income and free cash flow to be up for the year, including the impact of tariffs.

Ultimately, the company needs to refocus and rightsize the Vans business before aiming for top-line growth, so it's not a surprise to see the stock being rewarded for bottom-line improvements, especially given the sharp sell-off in recent years.

There's a lot of upside potential if the business can return to its earlier levels of strength.

Should you invest $1,000 in VF right now?

Before you buy stock in VF, consider this:

The Motley Fool Stock Advisor analyst team just identified what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy now… and VF wasn’t one of them. The 10 stocks that made the cut could produce monster returns in the coming years.

Consider when Netflix made this list on December 17, 2004... if you invested $1,000 at the time of our recommendation, you’d have $630,291!* Or when Nvidia made this list on April 15, 2005... if you invested $1,000 at the time of our recommendation, you’d have $1,075,791!*

Now, it’s worth noting Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039% — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500. Don’t miss out on the latest top 10 list, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the 10 stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

Jeremy Bowman has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

SunCoke Energy (SXC) Q2 2025 Earnings Call Transcript

Image source: The Motley Fool.

DATE

  • Wednesday, July 30, 2025, at 11 a.m. EDT

CALL PARTICIPANTS

  • Chairman, President, and Chief Executive Officer — Katherine Gates
  • Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer — Mark Marinko
  • Chief Strategy Officer — Shantanu Agrawal

Need a quote from one of our analysts? Email [email protected]

RISKS

  • Net income attributable to SunCoke Energy (GAAP) fell to $0.02 per share in 2025, driven by the timing and mix of lower contract coke sales, reduced earnings from the Granite City contract extension, declining CMT volumes, and $5.2 million in acquisition-related transaction costs in Q2 2025.
  • Spot coke sales margins are "significantly lower than the contract sold coke sales margins due to the current challenging market conditions," according to Marinko.
  • CMT terminal handled lower volumes in the logistics segment owing to "tepid market conditions," contributing to a decline in adjusted EBITDA for Q2 2025.

TAKEAWAYS

  • Consolidated Adjusted EBITDA: $43.6 million, down from $63.5 million in the prior year period, primarily due to lower contract coke sales, less favorable Granite City economics, and reduced logistics volumes, partially offset by lower legacy black lung expenses.
  • Phoenix Global Acquisition: $325 million purchase expected to close August 1, 2025, on a cash-free, debt-free basis, funded by cash and revolver borrowings, representing roughly 5.4x LTM adjusted EBITDA; projected annual synergies of $5 million-$10 million.
  • Domestic Coke Segment EBITDA: $40.5 million, with adjusted EBITDA impacted by adverse contract/spot mix at Haverhill and weaker Granite City performance.
  • Logistics Segment EBITDA: $7.7 million on 4.8 million tons throughput. Barge unloading expansion at KRT completed and new take-or-pay coal handling agreement to drive second-half results.
  • Liquidity Position: $186.2 million in cash and $350 million undrawn revolver, yielding total liquidity of $536.2 million.
  • Dividend Declared: $0.12 per share dividend payable Sept. 2, 2025; $10.2 million paid in the quarter.
  • Revolving Credit Facility Extended: Now matures July 2030, down to $325 million from $350 million, with similar covenants.
  • Free Cash Flow Guidance: Free cash flow guidance is now expected to be between $103 million and $118 million in 2025, lowered to reflect the Phoenix transaction, debt costs, and a new tax bill in full-year 2025 free cash flow guidance; guidance for operating cash flow unchanged.
  • Full-Year Guidance Reaffirmed: Consolidated adjusted EBITDA (non-GAAP) expected to be between $210 million and $225 million for full-year 2025; Domestic coke adjusted EBITDA guidance range of $185 million to $192 million in 2025; Full-year logistics adjusted EBITDA guidance range of $45 million to $50 million.
  • CapEx Guidance: CapEx guidance has been lowered to approximately $1 million in 2025 after spending $12.6 million in the quarter.
  • Phoenix Integration: Will combine operations with the logistics segment to form a new industrial services segment, bringing new international reach and customer diversification, including electric arc furnace operators.
  • Coke Sales Volume Outlook: 2.0-2.1 million tons projected for the second half of 2025 for an annual total of approximately 4 million tons of coke sales in 2025, with per-ton adjusted EBITDA expected to normalize to $46–$48 in the second half of 2025, based on mix.
  • New KRT Throughput: The logistics volume increase in the second half of 2025 is anticipated to stem mainly from the KRT terminal's expansion project.
  • Phoenix Revenue Profile: Contracts are long-term, carry fixed and pass-through revenue, and limit commodity price risk by avoiding consumables ownership.

SUMMARY

SunCoke Energy (NYSE:SXC) announced it will close its $325 million acquisition of Phoenix Global on Aug. 1, supported by a newly extended $325 million revolving credit facility now maturing in July 2030. Adjusted EBITDA of $43.6 million in Q2 2025 reflected reduced contract coke volume and logistics softness, confirming management's position that this quarter represents the earnings low point for the year. The company reaffirmed full-year consolidated adjusted EBITDA guidance of $210 million to $225 million for 2025 and updated full-year 2025 free cash flow guidance to $103 million to $118 million, citing transaction costs and tax law changes. A quarterly dividend of $0.12 per share was declared, and total liquidity stood at $536.2 million. SunCoke leadership signaled that Phoenix will be integrated as a new industrial services segment, diversifying its customer base and operational footprint.

  • Chief Financial Officer Marinko stated, "We believe Q2 2025 to be the trough of the year, and with higher contract coke sales expected in the second half, we are reaffirming our domestic coke adjusted EBITDA guidance range" of $185 million to $192 million.
  • Chief Strategy Officer Agrawal explained that reduced revolver capacity will not restrict Phoenix funding, as "$200 to $210 million" is expected to be drawn; the GPI project would require separate financing.
  • Management is in "active discussions" regarding contract renewals with the largest customer, despite external commentary on potential reductions in third-party coke demand.
  • Lower CMT volumes in May and June shifted into July, supporting management's unchanged logistics segment guidance despite market volatility.
  • Phoenix's "last twelve months trailing adjusted EBITDA of about $61 million (non-GAAP, for the twelve months ended March 31, 2025)" remains a baseline as SunCoke completes integration and explores organic growth from new customer exposure.

INDUSTRY GLOSSARY

  • CMT: Convent Marine Terminal, a bulk export terminal operated by SunCoke handling coal and other materials.
  • KRT: Kanawha River Terminals, a logistics asset for coal and other dry bulk material handling within SunCoke's portfolio.
  • Blast Coke: Metallurgical coke used in blast furnace steelmaking, distinct from foundry coke or spot coke sales.
  • Foundry Coke: A high-quality coke sold to foundries for metal casting, generally with higher margins than blast coke.
  • Take-or-pay Agreement: A long-term logistics contract obligating a customer to pay for a minimum volume, securing revenue for the operator.
  • Electric Arc Furnace (EAF): A steel production process that uses electricity to melt scrap and reduce iron, with different coke requirements than blast furnace operations.
  • Spot Coke: Coke sold on the open market at prevailing prices rather than through fixed, long-term contracts; typically carries lower, more volatile margins.

Full Conference Call Transcript

Katherine Gates: Thanks, Shantanu. Good morning, and thank you for joining us on today's call. This morning, we announced SunCoke Energy, Inc.'s second-quarter results. I want to share a few highlights before turning it over to Mark to discuss the results in detail. We delivered Q2 2025 consolidated adjusted EBITDA of $43.6 million, driven by the timing and mix of contract and spot coke sales, as well as lower volumes at CMT. During the quarter, we announced the acquisition of Phoenix Global for $325 million. We are happy to share that we received the necessary regulatory approvals faster than anticipated and now expect to close on August 1.

Additionally, we amended and extended our revolving credit facility originally due June 2026 during the month of July. Covenants are similar to the previous agreement, and it is now maturing in July 2030. Earlier today, we also announced a $0.12 per share dividend payable to shareholders on September 2, 2025. From a balance sheet perspective, we ended the second quarter with a strong liquidity position of $536.2 million. I would like to take this opportunity to review the fundamentals of the Phoenix acquisition. Let's turn to Slide four. Phoenix Global is a leading provider of mission-critical services to major steel-producing companies.

SunCoke Energy, Inc. will purchase 100% of the common units of Phoenix for $325 million on a cash-free, debt-free basis, representing an acquisition multiple of approximately 5.4 times on a March 31, 2025, last twelve months adjusted EBITDA of $61 million. This transaction is expected to be immediately accretive for SunCoke Energy, Inc. We will fund the purchase through a combination of cash on hand and borrowing on our amended and extended revolver, which is fully undrawn with $325 million of borrowing capacity. We expect to recognize between approximately $5 million and $10 million in annual synergies from this transaction.

After closing, we will plan to host investor conferences where we will share updated guidance for SunCoke Energy, Inc., including Phoenix. Turning to Slide five to revisit the transaction benefits to SunCoke Energy, Inc. Phoenix is an excellent strategic fit with the core elements of our business, namely customers, capabilities, and contracts. With the addition of these operations, SunCoke Energy, Inc.'s reach will now extend to new industrial customers, including electric arc furnace operators that produce carbon steel and stainless steel. Phoenix's global footprint will add to our existing Brazil footprint, as well as select international markets. Phoenix's operations provide high-value, site-based services that are mission-critical to operational efficiency and reliability for steel mills.

SunCoke Energy, Inc. has a reputation as a critical partner in the steel value chain and as a reliable provider of high-quality industrial services through our logistics business. Similar to SunCoke Energy, Inc., Phoenix's contracts are long-term in nature, with contractually guaranteed fixed revenue and pass-through components. Additionally, under its current contracts, Phoenix does not take ownership of major consumables, reducing exposure to commodity price volatility. Phoenix offers a well-capitalized asset portfolio, having invested approximately $75 million since June 2023 on new equipment or the refurbishment of existing equipment. New customers and new markets provide multiple paths for future organic growth.

By leveraging SunCoke Energy, Inc.'s strong financial position and operational excellence, we will build upon Phoenix's success to better serve our existing and new customers. Following the closing of the transaction, we expect Phoenix's operations will be combined with our logistics segment to form a new industrial services segment. We are pleased to have a strong operator within SunCoke Energy, Inc. to lead the new operations. He will be joined by certain Phoenix employees whose knowledge and experience will be beneficial to the successful integration. We are excited to welcome Phoenix's team members to the SunCoke Energy, Inc. family as we build on the strong foundation set by the business in recent years.

With that, I will turn it over to Mark to review our second-quarter earnings in detail.

Mark Marinko: Thanks, Katherine. Turning to Slide six. Net income attributable to SunCoke Energy, Inc. was $0.02 per share in 2025, down $0.23 versus the prior year period. The decrease was primarily driven by the timing and mix of lower contract coke sales coupled with lower economics from the Granite City contract extension in the domestic coke segment. Additionally, CMT volumes in the logistics segment were lower due to market conditions. Finally, transaction costs of $5.2 million related to the acquisition of Phoenix Global also impacted earnings per share. Consolidated adjusted EBITDA for 2025 was $43.6 million compared to $63.5 million in the prior year period.

The decrease in adjusted EBITDA was primarily driven by the timing and mix of lower contract coke sales and unfavorable economics on the Granite City contract extension in the coke segment, and lower transloading volumes at CMT in the logistics segment, partially offset by lower legacy black lung expenses in corporate and other. Moving to Slide seven to discuss our domestic coke business performance in detail. Second quarter domestic coke adjusted EBITDA was $40.5 million, and coke sales volumes were 943,000 tons. The decrease in adjusted EBITDA as compared to the prior year period was primarily driven by the change in mix of contract and spot coke sales at Haverhill.

Additionally, spot coke sales margins are significantly lower than the contract sold coke sales margins due to the current challenging market conditions. Lower economics and volumes at Granite City from the contract extension also impacted domestic coke results. We believe the second quarter to be the trough of 2025, and with higher contract coke sales expected in the second half of the year, we are reaffirming our domestic coke adjusted EBITDA guidance range of $185 million to $192 million. Now moving on to Slide eight to discuss our logistics business. Our logistics business generated $7.7 million of EBITDA in 2025, and our terminals handled combined throughput volumes of 4.8 million tons.

The decrease in adjusted EBITDA was primarily driven by lower transloading volumes at CMT due to tepid market conditions. Our previously announced barge unloading capital expansion project at KRT has been completed and is operating. We expect to see benefits from the new take-or-pay coal handling agreement starting in the third quarter and reaffirm our full-year logistics adjusted EBITDA guidance range of $45 million to $50 million. Now turning to Slide nine to discuss our liquidity position for Q2. SunCoke Energy, Inc. ended the second quarter with a cash balance of $186.2 million and a fully undrawn revolver of $350 million.

Net cash provided by operating activities was $17.5 million and was impacted by income tax and interest payments as well as $5.2 million in transaction costs. We spent $12.6 million on CapEx and paid $10.2 million in dividends at the rate of $0.12 per share this quarter. In total, we ended the quarter with a strong liquidity position of $536.2 million. Our free cash flow guidance has changed as a result of the transaction costs related to the Phoenix acquisition, extension of the revolving credit facility, and the new tax bill that was recently passed.

We did not previously include transaction or debt issuance costs in our free cash flow guidance, but we now expect to incur between $12 million and $14 million related to these transactions during the year. We are now expecting our cash taxes to be between $5 million and $9 million and have also lowered our CapEx guidance to approximately $1 million during the year. We now expect our free cash flow guidance to be between $103 million and $118 million. Our operating cash flow guidance is unchanged. With that, I will turn it back over to Katherine.

Katherine Gates: Thanks, Mark. Wrapping up on Slide 10. The acquisition of Phoenix is a result of SunCoke Energy, Inc.'s disciplined pursuit of profitable growth to reward long-term shareholders. SunCoke Energy, Inc. is well known for our best-in-class safety, advanced technology, operational discipline, and strong financial position. We remain focused on safely executing against our operating and capital plan and maintaining the strength of our core businesses while working to integrate Phoenix's operations. Phoenix is a service provider of choice for steelmakers, and we look forward to continuously engaging with their customers to find new opportunities to expand the scope of services provided as well as enter into new contracts at other sites.

As always, we take a balanced yet opportunistic approach to capital allocation. We continuously evaluate the capital needs of the business, our capital structure, and the need to reward our shareholders, and we will make capital allocation decisions accordingly. Finally, we see improvement in both logistics and domestic coke in the second half of the year, and we are reaffirming our full-year consolidated adjusted EBITDA guidance range of $210 million to $225 million. With that, let's go ahead and open up the call for Q&A. We will now begin the Q&A session. If at any time your question has been addressed and you would like to withdraw, please let us know. The first question comes from Nick Giles with B.

Riley Securities. Please go ahead.

Nick Giles: Thank you, operator, and good morning, everyone. This is Henry Hurl on for Nick Giles. So to start off, you reaffirmed your annual guidance, and my math implies roughly a 22% increase in quarterly EBITDA for the remainder of the year to reach the low end of your guidance at $210 million. So my question is, can you walk us through the drivers of the improvement from here? And what are your assumptions around last coke sales volumes?

Mark Marinko: Sure, Henry. Thanks for the question. So as we talked about, if you look at our Q1 domestic coke adjusted EBITDA per ton, it was $55, and our Q2 is around $42 a ton. Right? And if you take the average of those two, we are right in the range of $46 to $48. That is kind of our annual guidance. So in Q3 and Q4 or the second half of the year, we expect to kind of get back to our average full-year EBITDA per ton range where the mix, you know, it was all about the mix. That's why we are talking about a mix between contract and spot sales. Right?

In Q1, we were very heavy on the contract side. In Q2, we were very heavy on the spot side. So in Q3 and Q4, this will kind of become normalized, and we will have roughly 2 to 2.1 million tons of coke sales in the second half, getting us closer to the 4 million tons guidance of the total coke sales. With the average domestic coke distributor margin of $46 to $48 a ton. So that's kind of on the coke side. On the logistics side, you know, we saw surprisingly lower volumes in May and June at CMT, and we are already seeing those volumes get picked up in July.

There were a couple of shipments in June that did not, you know, the timing of the ship kind of shifted to July. So we are going to pick that up in Q3. So we will go back to our normal run rate EBITDA for logistics as a whole in the second half. And that's how we are getting to our full-year adjusted EBITDA guidance range of $210 million to $225 million.

Henry Hurl: Understood. Thanks for that.

Nick Giles: And then could you also talk about the macro drivers of Phoenix Global? So I understand you have a large share of fixed and contracted revenues in place. Hoping to get more color on what moves the needle in the long term? Thanks.

Katherine Gates: Sure. So I think the short answer to your question is that we will have a lot more to say on Phoenix when we go out and do our investor days and roadshow following the close. As I said, you know, we are going to be closing on August 1, and then we will be working through, you know, opening balance sheet, taxes, some other valuation work. So we are going through, you know, that process now. I think what I can say in terms of drivers going forward is that we are very excited about having the EAF exposure, which really diversifies our customer base.

And, you know, as I said on our call when we signed, I think it is very, very critical to us that we use this as a platform for organic growth. So when we think about drivers, we see opportunities with our technical and our engineering teams to look to the customers and expand the suite of services that we are providing at sites where we are already operating, as well as looking to new sites to bring on new business. You know, what we said when we signed is that Phoenix had, you know, a last twelve months trailing adjusted EBITDA of about $61 million.

And what I can say today is that, you know, that business, despite some of the cyclicality and some of the challenges in the steel sector right now, that, you know, that is still not an unreasonable number to put out there as you think ahead to Phoenix. So we feel good about the business today in the foundation, and then our opportunity to expand it, bringing our operational excellence and our engineering and technical expertise.

Henry Hurl: Thanks. I appreciate the color there. And then one more for me. Could you also talk about the recent conversations with your largest customer and if there is any potential for renewal of the Haverhill contract? Or any other color on how to think about your contracts that are rolling off this year and the split between contracted versus blast coke?

Katherine Gates: Yeah. Absolutely. You know, frankly, we were extremely surprised by the comments on the Cliff's earnings call, given that we are in active discussions with Cliff on contract renewal. As we said back in January, we knew that Cliff did not need more coke in 2025. And that's why we announced in January that we were sold out even though, you know, the pricing in the spot market is not what we wanted it to be, but we sold out and we sold into the spot market knowing that Cliffs would not need more coke from us in 2025. So that is unchanged.

But at the same time, we were continuing contract discussions with Cliff, and we are continuing those discussions with them today. In terms of specific detail on volumes, etcetera, as you know, we do not talk about the specifics of our contract negotiations with our customers. So I cannot really say more than that, other than that we are in active discussions with them.

Henry Hurl: Okay. Thanks for that. To you and your team, continue best of luck.

Katherine Gates: Thank you. The next question comes from Nathan Martin with Benchmark Company. Please go ahead.

Nathan Martin: Thanks, operator. Good morning, everyone. And maybe just following up on that last line of questioning. Like you said, surprised maybe by some of the comments Cliff made. You know, they indicated they have got plenty of internal coke production post the Stelco acquisition. They do not need any third-party coke, you know, kind of going forward. You know, how if that's the case, like, how do you guys go about finding another long-term contract for that production in Haverhill? Is it a case where whoever Stelco was selling to previously could be a potential option?

Or, you know, could the shift to Cliffs using more internal coke lead to a balance disruption in the market that needs to be addressed with, you know, supply curtailments?

Katherine Gates: Sure. I mean, I think, you know, just the starting point is we continue to be in active discussions with Cliff, but we have also, and you have seen this over time, we have looked for ways to profitably sell our coke when we are not selling on a long-term contract basis. So whether that is selling foundry and selling more foundry going forward, that's certainly a very profitable avenue for us, and we have continued to grow our market share in the foundry market. We would also look to profitably sell our blast coke to other customers.

So while we obviously, you know, cannot get into any sort of discussions on that front, we have been able to profitably sell our blast coke even at these depressed prices. Selling into North America. We would continue to look to sell into the seaborne market if that was profitable. So that will continue to be our focus just as it has been in the past years.

Nathan Martin: I appreciate that, Katherine. Any thoughts, like, does this potentially upset the supply-demand balance here in North America or not necessarily if they continue or start using more internal coke?

Katherine Gates: Well, I think, you know, as we have said before, you know, there is a volume of coke that is needed for the volume of steel that is being produced. So, you know, if, for example, Cliffs is now using more of the Stelco coke, Stelco coke that was being used by another customer, as you pointed out before, would be a customer that we would pursue going forward. So from an overall kind of supply-demand balance, you know, we would understand that as being there today, and we would try to take advantage of that if things were moving.

Shantanu Agrawal: Nate, I would want to add a little bit. This is Shantanu. You know, like, if they are running at full capacity, I think the question is more on the Cliffs side. You know, if there is a capacity rationalization, permanently on their side, on one of the blast furnaces, that definitely disrupts the supply-demand balance of coke. Right? Then the structure looks very different. In the long run, if one of the blast furnaces, which had been running for a longer time, goes down, then, yes, it definitely disturbs the supply-demand balance of coke within Canada and the US, and that makes it a little bit challenging for us, you know, from that perspective. Right?

But if the assumption is that they continue running the blast furnaces, which they have been running and their demand stays the same, as Katherine mentioned, there is demand for that coke to go there.

Nathan Martin: Gotcha. Shantanu, I appreciate that. Maybe shifting to the logistics business. Again, you called out the weakness at CMT. Was that mainly coal, or was that any other product there first? And then how do you view kind of export coal demand over the next few quarters? Are you guys assuming any benefit at all from price adjustment given where the indices are today?

Katherine Gates: Well, in terms of products, you know, we move products other than coal through CMT, including iron ore, including pet coke. So there is a mix of products there, but the vast majority of the volumes there are, you know, are coal for export. We have seen higher domestic pricing and higher demand, you know, as we kind of look at the market today. And so that higher demand domestically can impact volumes being shipped internationally just based on that pricing.

But at the same time, as Shantanu mentioned earlier, we look at, you know, the volumes that we are shipping in July, and we look at what we have in our plan for the balance of the year, and, you know, we are reaffirming our logistics guidance based on what we see going forward. We are comfortable with that. In terms of any sort of, you know, price adjustment mechanism, we have not had a price adjustment thus far under the new contract, and we did not contemplate that in our guidance for 2025.

Nathan Martin: Got it. That's helpful, Katherine. And then just back to the guidance for a second. I know you reiterated your full-year adjusted EBITDA guidance for the segment. But I do not think I saw any update to the volume guidance. So should we assume you still feel good about handling, I think it was around 22.9 million tons for the full year? And if so, is that, you know, increase in tonnage here in the second half versus the first half mainly expected to come from the KRT expansion?

Shantanu Agrawal: That's right.

Nathan Martin: Okay. Perfect. Maybe just one final one. Again, congratulations on successfully amending and extending your revolver. Obviously, capacity did come down a little bit to $325 million from $350 million. You previously said, I think you expected to borrow about $230 million on the revolver for Phoenix. That lower capacity, does that impact your plans at all there for financing? And then does it still leave, you know, enough room to continue pursuing the GPI project?

Shantanu Agrawal: Yeah. So, Nate, I mean, actually, our borrowing amount for the acquisition is lower. It's closer to $200 to $210 million on the revolver, being more having more cash available on the balance sheet. So we are using that. And then, you know, that leaves us more than enough to do kind of, you know, work through the working capital changes. You know, we have been undrawn on the revolver for, like, at least a couple of years. So that leaves us enough capacity for our working capital day-to-day work.

On the GPI side, now that we have done the Phoenix acquisition, if we do the GPI project, that will lead us into a separate borrowing, and it will all be, you know, some sort of term loan or a note or something like that. So that will be a separate financing deal when we get into the GPI project.

Nathan Martin: Makes sense, Shantanu. And I guess I should just go ahead and ask, you know, are there any updates on that GPI project, any additional thoughts on the discussions you guys are having with Nippon at this point?

Katherine Gates: So we are in active discussions with US Steel. I guess, at this point, we would say US Steel because it is truly, you know, US Steel with Nippon, but we are in active discussions, but I do not have anything to share at this point.

Nathan Martin: Got it. I'll leave it there. I appreciate the time, Katherine and Shantanu, and best of luck in the second half.

Katherine Gates: Thank you.

Shantanu Agrawal: Thank you.

Operator: This concludes our question and answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to Katherine Gates for any closing remarks. Please go ahead.

Katherine Gates: Thank you all again for joining us this morning and for your continued interest in SunCoke Energy, Inc. We look forward to announcing the completion of the Phoenix Global acquisition. Let's continue to work safely today and every day. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

This article is a transcript of this conference call produced for The Motley Fool. While we strive for our Foolish Best, there may be errors, omissions, or inaccuracies in this transcript. Parts of this article were created using Large Language Models (LLMs) based on The Motley Fool's insights and investing approach. It has been reviewed by our AI quality control systems. Since LLMs cannot (currently) own stocks, it has no positions in any of the stocks mentioned. As with all our articles, The Motley Fool does not assume any responsibility for your use of this content, and we strongly encourage you to do your own research, including listening to the call yourself and reading the company's SEC filings. Please see our Terms and Conditions for additional details, including our Obligatory Capitalized Disclaimers of Liability.

The Motley Fool has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Blue Foundry (BLFY) Q2 2025 Earnings Transcript

Logo of jester cap with thought bubble.

Image source: The Motley Fool.

DATE

Wednesday, July 30, 2025 at 12:00 a.m. ET

CALL PARTICIPANTS

President & Chief Executive Officer — James Nesci

Chief Financial Officer — Kelly Pecoraro

Need a quote from one of our analysts? Email [email protected]

TAKEAWAYS

Net Loss—$2 million, or 10¢ per diluted share, representing a $735,000 improvement from the prior quarter.

Net Interest Income—Increased by $896,000, or 8.3%, driven by a 12 basis point expansion in net interest margin.

Loan Growth—Gross loans rose by $47.4 million, with approximately 3% growth, including a $22 million increase in commercial and industrial loans and a $12 million increase in construction loans year to date.

Core Deposit Growth—Core deposits expanded by nearly 4%, or $25.2 million, contributing to total deposit growth of $29.1 million; time deposits increased $3.9 million, offset by a $20 million increase in brokered deposits at lower rates.

Yield on Loans—Increased by eight basis points to 4.8%; yield on total interest-earning assets improved by seven basis points to 4.58%.

Cost of Deposits—Decreased by 13 basis points to 2.62%; cost of funds also fell 13 basis points to 2.72%.

Noninterest Expense—Declined by $90,000 from the prior quarter, primarily due to seasonal occupancy factors.

Provision for Credit Losses—$463,000 provision recorded, mainly for reserves on unfunded commitments scheduled to close.

Purchased Loan Activity—$45 million in credit-enhanced consumer loans and $19 million in residential loans were added to the balance sheet; consumer loans up by $76 million year to date through June 30, 2025.

Net Interest Margin Expansion—Net interest margin increased by 12 basis points, marking the third consecutive quarterly improvement.

Tangible Book Value Per Share—Rose by 6¢ to $14.87, up from the prior quarter.

Share Repurchases—406,000 shares repurchased at a weighted average price of $9.42, below tangible book value.

Capital Ratios—Tangible equity to tangible common assets at 15.1%, among the highest in the industry, according to management.

Asset Quality—Nonperforming assets and loans both increased by three basis points, reaching 30 basis points and 38 basis points of total assets and loans, respectively.

Allowance Coverage—Allowance for credit losses to total loans dropped one basis point; allowance to nonperforming loans fell to 211% from 230% sequentially.

Loan Pipeline—Letters of intent exceeded $40 million at quarter-end, mainly for commercial lending with anticipated yields above 7%.

Consumer Loan Strategy—CFO Pecoraro said, "We are comfortable going to about 7% to 8% of the loan portfolio over the next couple of quarters" for credit-enhanced consumer loans.

Expense Outlook—Noninterest expenses are expected to remain in the "mid to high $13 million range" over the next several quarters, with potential modest increases for variable compensation in the second half of the year.

Margin Guidance—CFO Pecoraro said, "We are only looking at a couple of basis point expansion probably in the third quarter," suggesting limited net interest margin expansion in the second half of 2025.

SUMMARY

Blue Foundry Bancorp(NASDAQ:BLFY) reported a sequential improvement in net loss and continued progress on strategic objectives, including portfolio diversification and disciplined capital management. Management emphasized the focus on higher-yielding asset classes, such as owner-occupied commercial real estate and credit-enhanced consumer loans, to drive returns and manage risk. Deposit growth was attributed to deepening commercial banking relationships and new product strategies in a competitive rate environment. Adjustments in deposit pricing, including the introduction of short-duration and eight-month CDs, were aimed at balancing funding cost and customer retention. Share repurchases were executed below tangible book value, and capital ratios remain among the highest in the industry. Asset quality metrics remain stable, with only modest increases in nonperforming assets and loans on a low base.

CFO Pecoraro detailed the future repricing schedule, noting approximately $75 million of loans set to reprice in 2026 at a current rate of 3.75% and $23 million scheduled to reprice in the remainder of 2025.

Purchased credit-enhanced consumer loans carry a 3% reserve, affecting allowance methodology.

CEO Nesci affirmed continued focus on operating efficiency, stating, "We are looking at everything. Constantly, especially expenses," and highlighted ongoing efforts to leverage technology and optimize staffing to control expenses.

Management highlighted strategic efforts to grow core deposits through comprehensive client relationship management, particularly within commercial banking.

INDUSTRY GLOSSARY

Core Deposits: Stable, non-brokered, typically lower-cost customer deposits considered more reliable during market disruptions.

Credit-Enhanced Consumer Loans: Consumer loans structured or purchased with additional protective features, such as third-party guarantees or reserves, to reduce loss risk.

Tangible Book Value: Book value of equity excluding intangible assets, frequently used to assess a financial institution's shareholder value and capital strength.

Full Conference Call Transcript

James Nesci: Thank you, Operator. And good morning, everyone. We appreciate you joining us for our second quarter earnings call. As always, I am joined by our Chief Financial Officer, Kelly Pecoraro, who will review our financial performance in detail following my update. Earlier today, we reported a net loss of $2 million or 10¢ per diluted share. We are pleased with the progress made toward our strategic objectives in the second quarter, and thus far in 2025. Despite the competitive environment, we are able to grow core deposits and the net interest margin for the third consecutive quarter.

This, coupled with our expense discipline of approximately $1 million versus last quarter, our strong capital liquidity position continues to support our transformation into a more commercially focused institution. This quarter's increase in core deposits reflects the deepening of our relationships with the businesses and communities we serve and marks continued progress. We achieved approximately 3% loan growth during the quarter while improving the yield on our loan portfolio by eight basis points. This was supported by $29 million in deposit growth, including an almost 4% increase in core deposits and a 13 basis point reduction in our cost of deposits. Together, these results contributed to a meaningful 12 basis point expansion in our net interest margin.

Loan production year to date totaled $180 million with $90 million produced during the second quarter at a weighted average yield of approximately 7%. Year to date, our diversification efforts have led to a $22 million increase in commercial and industrial loans, including owner-occupied commercial real estate. Additionally, construction loans increased $12 million while we thoughtfully decreased our multifamily portfolio by $37 million. We also saw a $76 million increase in consumer loans through June 30, primarily driven by purchases of credit-enhanced consumer loans at attractive yields. As we continue to execute our strategy of portfolio diversification, we remain focused on prioritizing asset classes that deliver higher yields and better risk-adjusted returns.

Growth in our owner-occupied commercial real estate and construction lending reflects our disciplined approach to supporting local businesses while managing credit exposure. Additionally, our investment in credit-enhanced consumer loans further enhances returns while maintaining a strong risk management framework. These portfolio shifts are aligned with our goal of driving earnings and long-term value creation. Our loan pipeline remains healthy, with executed letters of intent totaling more than $40 million at quarter-end, primarily in commercial lending with anticipated yields above 7%. We expect this momentum to continue in the coming quarters. Tangible book value per share increased to $14.87, up 6¢ from the prior quarter. We remain committed to enhancing shareholder value through disciplined capital management.

During the quarter, we repurchased 406,000 shares at a weighted average price of $9.42, a significant discount to our tangible book value and adjusted tangible book value. Both the bank and holding company remain well-capitalized, with tangible equity to tangible common assets among the highest in the industry at 15.1%. Our capital position and credit quality remain strong, and we are encouraged by the sustained momentum across both lending and deposit fronts. We believe these efforts will continue to support balance sheet and income growth in the coming quarters. With that, I will turn the call over to Kelly for a deeper look at our financials. After her remarks, we will be happy to answer your questions. Kelly?

Kelly Pecoraro: Thank you, James. And good morning, everyone. Net loss for the second quarter was $2 million. This is a $735,000 improvement to the prior quarter. We are encouraged by the positive momentum in net interest income, driven by unfunded loan commitments. Net interest income increased by $896,000 or 8.3%, driven by a 12 basis point expansion in our net interest margin. Interest income expanded $725,000, primarily due to loan growth. Interest expense declined by $101,000, reflecting lower deposit costs. The yield on loans increased by eight basis points to 4.8%, and the yield on total interest-earning assets improved by seven basis points to 4.58%. Our cost of funds declined by 13 basis points to 2.72%.

The cost of interest-bearing deposits decreased 13 basis points to 2.62%, and the cost of borrowings decreased nine basis points to 3.3%. Noninterest expense decreased by $90,000 compared to the prior quarter, driven primarily by seasonal occupancy expense. We are pleased that expenses have remained relatively stable over the past several quarters and continue to expect them to stay within the mid to high $13 million range. As we progress toward our growth targets and achieve corporate goals, we anticipate a modest increase in compensation expense in the second half of the year due to higher variable compensation costs.

For the quarter, we recorded a provision for credit losses of $463,000, primarily attributed to reserves required on unfunded commitments that are scheduled to close. As a reminder, in Q3, the majority of our allowance is derived from quantitative models, and our methodology continues to assign greater weight to the baseline and adverse economic scenario. From a balance sheet perspective, gross loans increased $47.4 million during the quarter. Organic growth was primarily in owner-occupied commercial real estate and construction. We also purchased $45 million in credit-enhanced consumer loans and $19 million in residential loans to support our residential portfolio. Our available-for-sale securities portfolio, with a duration of 4.1 years, declined by $2.4 million due to maturities, calls, and paydowns.

This was partially offset by purchases and a $1.7 million improvement in unrealized loss. Deposits increased $29.1 million or 2%. We experienced $25.2 million or approximately 4% growth in core deposit accounts. Importantly, growth in core deposits was fueled by full banking relationships with commercial customers, emphasizing our strategic focus on deepening client engagement in a competitive market. Time deposits increased $3.9 million as we strategically repriced promotional thinking and backfilled runoff with $20 million in broker deposits at lower rates. Borrowings increased slightly to help fund loan growth. Lastly, asset quality remains strong. Nonperforming assets increased due to a slight rise in nonaccrual loans.

Nonperforming assets to total assets picked up by three basis points, and nonperforming loans to total loans also ticked up by three basis points. Both remain low, at 30 basis points and 38 basis points, respectively. Allowance coverage decreased slightly, with the allowance for credit losses to total loans declining by one basis point, and the ratio of allowance for credit losses to nonperforming loans decreased from 230% to 211%. With that, James and I are happy to answer your questions.

Operator: Thank you very much. To ask a question, please ensure your device is unmuted locally. Our first question comes from Justin Crowley from Piper Sandler. Your line is open. Please go ahead.

Justin Crowley: Hey, good morning. Just wanted to start off on the margin and some of the drivers as you look ahead here. Can you quantify for us what loan repricing looks like through the back half of this year and then as you get into 2026? Just any detail on volume and then what the rate pickup looks like. I think you have mentioned previously that it is really next year when you see a lot of that multi-portfolio start to turn, but just wondering if you could put the numbers around that for us.

Kelly Pecoraro: Yeah. Sure. No problem, Justin. You are right. 2026 is really where we see a lot of the repricing taking place. In '26, we have about $75 million that is standing at a rate of about 3.75%. That is due to reprice not exactly equally during the year, but spread over the year in '26. For the remainder of '25, we have just about $23 million that is today at a rate of that is sitting at a rate of 75 that is going to reprice. Important to keep in mind throughout Q3 and Q4, we also have maturities that are coming in. Those maturities, the majority of them sit in the construction portfolio.

And there are current market rates while we have a nice pipeline of construction coming in, as you know, do not fund all upfront. So we will see a little lag in terms of the construction portfolio having maturities.

Justin Crowley: Okay. Got it. And then, I guess, on the CD side and maybe just assuming flat rates for a moment, through year-end. Who knows what we will get out of the Fed? But, you know, has the pricing opportunity there largely grown its course? And so would it really just take lower rates from here to see funding costs move appreciably lower? What is the thinking there?

Kelly Pecoraro: Well, from a CD perspective, we were keeping the book relatively short right around that three-month time frame. But we did introduce an eight-month CD that has extended that maturity. So we will not see that repricing of that book until January or February, as those CDs will mature.

James Nesci: Justin, I think there is also a market component to that question. It depends on what our competitors do in the marketplace. So we are obviously working through the market competition like everybody else, and we are keeping an eye on our deposit base and trying to make sure we produce products that our customers are interested in purchasing.

Justin Crowley: Okay. Helpful. And I guess just sort of putting it all together, obviously, a decent step up in the NIM through the first half of this year. Given kind of all the puts and takes, would you kind of expect expansion to be more limited through the back half of this year with 2026 really being when we start to see kind of more significant improvements in margin?

Kelly Pecoraro: Yeah. Justin, you have it absolutely right. We are only looking at a couple of basis point expansion probably in the third quarter. And then when we get to the fourth quarter, you know, that will depend upon pipeline and what is coming on and what happens in the market. But the expansion will be limited in the back half of the year.

Justin Crowley: Okay. I appreciate that. And then in terms of the consumer purchases, I know in the past, you said there is not necessarily a magic number in mind. But, you know, with the book at 5% of loans today, can you just give us a sense for thinking on adding to that portfolio from here, how that fits in?

Kelly Pecoraro: Yeah, Justin. So right. The it is right now, we are comfortable going to about 7% to 8% of the loan portfolio over the next couple of quarters.

Justin Crowley: Okay. And then can you just remind us that, you know, as far as the credit enhancements that come along with those, can you just boil down the exact structure of these credits and how much in the way of potential loss you are protected from?

Kelly Pecoraro: Right. So these come with a 3% reserve against these credits. So, you know, they do run through our normal allowance calculation. We look to see if there is any additional exposure there. But they are we have a 3% credit reserve against.

Justin Crowley: Okay. And then maybe just one last on a bigger picture question. You know, profitability is obviously still strained here, but at least moving closer to being in the black and, you know, it seems like, particularly next year, there are some margin tailwinds that will help over time. But, you know, is there anything else behind the scenes that you are looking into or weighing, whether that be from an expense standpoint? I know you gave guidance there. So either there or just wherever that could help accelerate that progress?

James Nesci: So what I would tell you is we are looking at everything. Constantly, especially expenses. And I noticed some of the early notes mentioned, you know, expense discipline. Kelly and I are very focused on looking for any dollars we can find. It is expensive to run a bank in today's age. It just takes people to run the bank. We have kept a close eye on our headcount. We have our people working as efficiently as we can. But with AI, we are always looking to gain new efficiencies. So those are the things that we are working through. What else can we do with fewer people and getting a greater output from our existing staff?

So those, I cannot give you a timing of when that happens, but I can tell you that is the type of stuff that we are constantly looking at.

Justin Crowley: Okay. Got it. Well, I appreciate everything. I will leave it there. Thanks so much.

James Nesci: Thanks, Justin.

Kelly Pecoraro: Thanks, Justin.

Operator: Our next question comes from David Conrad from KBW. Your line is open. Please go ahead.

David Conrad: Yes. Hey, good morning. Justin kind of went through the quarter pretty good there. So really just kind of have a very longer-term picture question. Kind of looking regarding, you know, the asset generation, but also kind of tied to the noninterest-bearing deposit levels. You know? I think it is kind of early days on C&I, but are you kind of thinking about, you know, how can we get that mix up and thinking about what type of assets you can generate maybe to grow the noninterest-bearing deposits?

James Nesci: Well, good morning, David. Thank you for joining our call today. Good morning. Yes. We are looking at it. The noninterest-bearing is obviously a key point for us to focus on. So we are not just looking at C&I. We are looking at our commercial real estate borrowers and we are trying to make sure that we get a full relationship from all borrowers, regardless of what asset class they may be borrowing in. And that has been working really well. We believe by providing good products to our customers, commercial or consumer, that we will get more of that core type deposit. And, again, it seems to be working. We are encouraged by that pathway.

And we will keep reaching out to our existing customers on the loan side to say, we really like your full banking relationship. So, yes, that is clearly part of the strategy, and we think it is working and will continue to work going forward.

David Conrad: Great. Perfect. Thank you.

Operator: We currently have no further questions. I would like to hand back to James Nesci for some closing remarks.

James Nesci: Thank you, Operator. I want to thank everybody who dialed in today to listen to the earnings call. Again, we are encouraged by the quarter and what we are starting to see, and it all stems from our dedicated employees out on the line working hard every single day. I want to acknowledge all of our customers and shareholders that have been with us. Some of you for a very long time have been shareholders that have stuck with us as we recreate our strategy and try to drive towards profitability. With that, I just want to say thanks again, and hope to speak with all of you again next quarter. Thank you.

Operator: This concludes today's call. We thank everyone for joining. You may now disconnect your lines.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

This article is a transcript of this conference call produced for The Motley Fool. While we strive for our Foolish Best, there may be errors, omissions, or inaccuracies in this transcript. Parts of this article were created using Large Language Models (LLMs) based on The Motley Fool's insights and investing approach. It has been reviewed by our AI quality control systems. Since LLMs cannot (currently) own stocks, it has no positions in any of the stocks mentioned. As with all our articles, The Motley Fool does not assume any responsibility for your use of this content, and we strongly encourage you to do your own research, including listening to the call yourself and reading the company's SEC filings. Please see our Terms and Conditions for additional details, including our Obligatory Capitalized Disclaimers of Liability.

The Motley Fool has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Why Marvell Stock Popped Today

Key Points

Shares of Marvell Technology (NASDAQ: MRVL), the system-on-a-chip semiconductor manufacturer, jumped 7.6% through 12:05 p.m. ET Wednesday after Morgan Stanley analyst Joseph Moore raised his price target to $80 a share.

And that's not the only reason.

Where to invest $1,000 right now? Our analyst team just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks to buy right now. Continue »

Green arrow going up.

Image source: Getty Images.

Why Morgan Stanley likes Marvell stock

Moore (not the same guy who wrote Moore's Law) forecasts Marvell to earn $2.28 per share in 2026, and values the stock at 35 times forward earnings. "Marvell is firmly in the AI winners camp," writes Moore in a note covered on StreetInsider.com today, but "sentiment has swung aggressively negative" -- and now Marvell stock is down about 33% from its peak back in late January.

Speaking of artificial intelligence, though, the other big Marvell news today is that Fubon Research is reporting interest in Microsoft (NASDAQ: MSFT) in upgrading from 3nm to a more advanced 2nm for its upcoming Maia300 AI chip -- which Marvell will produce. Fubon notes that the change is pushing back production (and revenue) for Marvell from Q1 2026 into Q4 2026 -- but the analyst thinks the chance to sell Microsoft a more advanced chip costing as much as $8,000 per unit "represents a substantial opportunity for Marvell."

Is Marvell stock a buy?

Fubon is guessing the new chip could add $2.4 billion to Marvell's revenue in 2026 and as much as $12 billion in 2027 -- a substantial sum when you consider that Marvell did only $5.8 billion in business in 2024!

Does this make Marvell stock a buy? It depends. The stock costs a steep 47 times this year's estimated free cash flow. But analysts expect Marvell's FCF to double over the next two years, alongside the doubling in revenue. If the growth materializes as planned, Marvell stock actually could be cheap enough to buy.

Should you invest $1,000 in Marvell Technology right now?

Before you buy stock in Marvell Technology, consider this:

The Motley Fool Stock Advisor analyst team just identified what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy now… and Marvell Technology wasn’t one of them. The 10 stocks that made the cut could produce monster returns in the coming years.

Consider when Netflix made this list on December 17, 2004... if you invested $1,000 at the time of our recommendation, you’d have $630,291!* Or when Nvidia made this list on April 15, 2005... if you invested $1,000 at the time of our recommendation, you’d have $1,075,791!*

Now, it’s worth noting Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039% — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500. Don’t miss out on the latest top 10 list, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the 10 stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

Rich Smith has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has positions in and recommends Microsoft. The Motley Fool recommends Marvell Technology and recommends the following options: long January 2026 $395 calls on Microsoft and short January 2026 $405 calls on Microsoft. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Watsco (WSO) Q2 2025 Earnings Call Transcript

Image source: The Motley Fool.

DATE

  • Wednesday, July 30, 2025, at 10 a.m. EDT

CALL PARTICIPANTS

  • Chairman and Chief Executive Officer — Albert Nahmad
  • President — A.J. Nahmad
  • Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer — Paul Johnston
  • Executive Vice President — Barry Logan
  • Executive Vice President and Chief Digital Officer — Rick Gomez

Need a quote from one of our analysts? Email [email protected]

RISKS

  • Sales declined: Management stated, "Sales declined 4% as double-digit pricing gains for new equipment were offset by lower volumes."
  • SG&A increased 6%: The company incurred extra costs from the A2L transition and the addition of new locations, with core SG&A growth higher than management's preference in a down quarter.
  • Inventory peaked above expectations: CEO Albert Nahmad stated, "it's more than we had hoped for," with Inventory peaked at $2 billion before being reduced to $1.8 billion in Q3 2025.
  • Residential new construction market down 15%-20%: Management cited, "RNC is probably down 15 to 20%."

TAKEAWAYS

  • A2L Refrigerant Transition: Approximately 55% of historical product sales were affected by the 2025 transition to A2L refrigerants, impacting inventory, supply chain, and branch staffing.
  • Sales Performance: Total sales declined 4% as double-digit equipment price gains were offset by lower volumes, with residential and international segments subdued.
  • Gross Margin: management does not expect the 29% gross margin to be sustained in the back half of 2025 ("I don't want us to extrapolate that 29% into the back half").
  • EBIT and EBIT Margin Growth: EBIT increased and EBIT margin expanded, driven by OEM pricing actions and digital pricing optimization, despite lower sales.
  • SG&A Expense: SG&A rose 6% due to transition-related inefficiencies and acquisitions; approximately 25% of that SG&A growth was from recent acquisitions, with core SG&A trending about 4.5% higher.
  • Inventory Levels: Inventory peaked at $2 billion and was reduced to $1.8 billion in Q3 2025, with less than 5% now comprised of legacy R410A and transition in progress to new A2L products.
  • Digital and Technology Initiatives: E-commerce is now a $2.5 billion business, or 34% of our sales; Mobile apps now have 70,000 users and grew 17% versus last year; OnCallAir’s annual product volume increased 19% to $1.6 billion.
  • Product Mix Shift: Parts and supplies, which carry higher margins, constituted about 30% of sales as of Q2 2025; management launched initiatives to expand this segment.
  • AI Implementation: Two AI platforms -- internal and external -- deployed to leverage company and customer data for improved efficiency and growth strategies, with about 21 internal users weekly.
  • National Customer Strategy: Watsco One sales platform targeting multi-location institutional customers is in development, planned for 2026 launch, designed to unify offerings and capture incremental opportunity outside core replacement business.
  • Balance Sheet: Maintains a solid cash position and no debt, providing capacity for ongoing M&A and strategic investments.
  • M&A Pipeline: Management is "having as many of those conversations as we can" regarding acquisitions, with one significant target under consideration.
  • Market Mix Consistency: 85% of products sold remain at minimum efficiency levels in the first half of 2025; shift to lower-branded products has not occurred.
  • Regional Weather & Demand: Weak volume performance in May was attributed mainly to adverse weather in the North; improvement was noted into July (Q3 2025).

SUMMARY

Watsco (NYSE:WSO) management directly addressed ongoing challenges related to the large-scale product and regulatory transition in 2025, highlighting operational complexity and near-term margin opportunities. Strategic technology investments are accelerating digital channel growth, data-driven pricing optimization, and sales to multiregional institutional customers. The company emphasized that recent peak inventory levels reflected temporary needs of the product transition, with systematic reductions underway. Watsco’s leadership detailed margin drivers and clarified that the extraordinary gross margin performance in Q2 2025 reflected both pricing and mix, not sustainable run rates. The management team remains focused on monetizing technology adoption and expansion of higher-margin parts, while actively positioning for consolidation opportunities in a fragmented HVAC distribution market.

  • President A.J. Nahmad said, "We have accelerated adoption of our pricing platform PriceFX. Our goal is to reach a 30% gross profit margin."
  • OEM pricing actions early in the quarter were cited as amplifying near-term margin, with Barry Logan stating, "there is obviously an algebraic benefit to margin when OEMs raise prices."
  • Watsco’s e-commerce now constitutes 34% of sales; Mobile apps serve 70,000 users; OnCallAir drives higher attach rates for high-efficiency products when utilized by contractors.
  • There was greater than 80% A2L sell-through by quarter end and less than 5% of inventory remaining as legacy
  • Management’s "dream plan two" targets $10 billion revenue, 30% gross margin, and five times inventory turns, with the latter up from pre-COVID levels of 4.5x on investments in inventory systems.
  • The chief digital officer stated, there has been about 200 basis points of gross margin expansion attributable to this price optimization and bringing more technology to how we price over the past two or three years.
  • Tariffs and metals inflation are beginning to impact input costs for non-equipment segments, notably a 10% increase cited on copper-heavy products.
  • Softness in residential new construction and international sales continues, but July showed sequential improvement over June, and management expects improved efficiency in SG&A as the transition winds down in the second half of 2025.

INDUSTRY GLOSSARY

A2L Refrigerants: New-generation, low-global-warming potential refrigerants with mild flammability used to comply with updated environmental regulations in HVAC equipment.

R410A: A widely used legacy HVAC refrigerant being phased out due to environmental regulation.

OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer; refers to companies that produce HVAC units Watsco distributes.

OnCallAir: Watsco’s digital sales tool enabling contractors to recommend and sell HVAC products more effectively, with a proven impact on high-efficiency sales mix.

PriceFX: Watsco’s proprietary pricing technology platform used for dynamic price optimization.

Watsco One: Forthcoming unified digital sales and service platform tailored to large institutional, multi-location HVAC customers, scheduled for launch in 2026.

RNC: Residential New Construction; market segment focused on sales of HVAC products for newly built homes.

Full Conference Call Transcript

Albert Nahmad: Good morning, everyone. Welcome to our second quarter earnings call. This is Albert Nahmad, Chairman and CEO. And with me is A.J. Nahmad, President, Paul Johnston, Barry Logan, and Rick Gomez. Before we start, our normal cautionary statement: This conference call has forward-looking statements as defined by SEC laws and regulations and are made pursuant to the safe harbor provisions of these various laws. Ultimate results may differ materially from the forward-looking statements. Watsco delivered healthy second quarter results in soft market conditions. I should say 2025 marks a year of significant product transition to next-generation equipment containing A2L refrigerants. The transition affects roughly 55% of our historical product sales.

This transition affects our inventories, our supply chain, staffing levels in our branches, and other aspects of our business. Regulatory changes have historically been good for our business and good for our customers. We expect that transition to be no different than has happened in the past. The changes are substantial and complete, and we'll look forward to operations and simpler business in 2026. Let me turn to second quarter highlights. Sales declined 4% like the double-digit pricing gains for the new equipment, offset by lower volumes. We had a late start to the summer season. Sales for residential, new construction, and international markets remain subdued. On the plus side, Watsco achieved record gross profit margins.

Our performance yielded an increase in EBIT and expanded EBIT margins despite lower sales. Our results benefited from OEM pricing actions. Our pricing technology platform called PriceFX also contributed. Gross margins remain a focus. There is much potential to improve over time. SG&A increased 6% as we incurred extra costs during the transition. We also added 10 new locations from recent acquisitions. Our balance sheet remains solid. We have a strong cash position and no debt. We continue to invest in innovation and technology to separate us from our competitors. Watsco's technology journey began fifteen years ago, and we have made terrific progress.

For example, e-commerce continues to grow and is now a $2.5 billion business, or 34% of our sales. Mobile apps have now 70,000 users and grew 17% versus last year. The annual volume of products sold through OnCallAir, which is our digital selling platform for customer contractors, increased 19% to $1.6 billion. It's a great assist to our customers. But we're not standing still in terms of ideas and making further investments. We are building on or adding new initiatives to drive growth and to delight our customers. Examples include a new technology-driven sales platform being developed to capture larger national customers. We're talking about national customers here.

This would be incremental to Watsco's core replacement vehicles and is expected to be launched in 2026. We have accelerated adoption of our pricing platform PriceFX. Our goal is to reach a 30% gross profit margin. We have launched an initiative to grow the parts and supplies segment of our business, which today is roughly 30% of sales and can be much larger over time. And we launched two AI platforms, one internal and one external, to harness our data. Artificial intelligence offers the potential to further transform our customer experience, improve operating efficiency, and create new data-driven growth strategies. This is an exciting time, and these are just a few of the many initiatives underway.

Now we will expand on these themes at an investor event in Miami, which will occur after temperatures have dropped a bit. Stay tuned for additional details. Finally, we believe our culture of innovation, along with our scale, entrepreneurial culture, and capacity to invest, are unmatched in our industry. With that, let's turn to Q&A.

Operator: We will now begin the question and answer session. To ask a question, you may press star then 1 on your touch-tone phone. If you are using a speakerphone, please pick up your handset before pressing the keys. And if at any time, your question has been addressed and you would like to withdraw it, please press star then 2. At this time, we will pause momentarily to assemble our roster. And our first question here will come from Ryan Merkel with William Blair. Please go ahead with your question.

Ryan Merkel: Good morning, Ryan. Hey. Good morning, everyone. Good morning. Alright. My first question is just, you know, on volumes in the quarter. Were a little bit worse than I was expecting. I know you mentioned weather, H2L, new. Would just love it to hear from you, you know, I'm gonna ask both Paul and Barry to respond to that. Not as strong as we anticipated going into Q2. You know, what we saw was a kind of a lumpy picture in the marketplace. Where April came in strong, May ended up being very weak, mainly because of the weather patterns in the North. And then in June, they came back again. And it was sure.

You know, RNC is probably the our new construction new construction is probably down 15 to 20%. Replacement is still holding fairly strong. We didn't really see a lot of repair at the beginning of the quarter, which we saw towards the end of the quarter and continues into July. But not enough to offset, you know, the unit sales that were certainly down I mean, on international sales. Yeah. I'll comment on that. Also, on one of the exposures we talked about in the first quarter that repeated itself in the second quarter, was our international, which is Mexico, Mexico is probably the most volatile market.

It's a small part of our business, but a big contributor from a margin point of view. Mexico was down well, let's put it this way. It cost us about 10¢ a share in the quarter. 20¢ a share year to date. In June, it grew. In July, it's grown since then. So I'll take kind of one market that's been irritating which seemed to be a lot better in the last couple of months. As far as July goes, Ryan, I would say it's better. August is bigger than July in our forward-looking commentary.

So if I say that July is better than what we saw in June, that's okay, but it needs to extend itself and extrapolate itself as the year goes on. The good news is that in general, you know, what we can control is margin, pricing, and the wherewithal of our business to support all these new products in the market with our customers. I'm glad we have our balance sheet to do that with. Because it's been a pretty extraordinary product change this year. You can see the building of inventories. That's a customer-focused effort to help our customers get going in this market.

The margin speaks to capturing new pricing on as we say, over half the products we sold we sell, we had to capture price inflation since that price and get off on the right track in margins and be able to say, that's been accomplished. So we like what we can control. We'll be patient about what we can't control. And I think also maybe this is more of a 2026 discussion. But, you know, the entire industry, every OEM we sell products for have been through an extreme product cycle probably for the last two or three years.

And at what point does that serenity, you know, play itself out in terms of growth and market share development and product expansion the blocking and tackling that I think, is particularly good for us and that we're good at. So maybe that's more of a next year event, but we're kinda looking forward to it quite honestly. Yeah. That's fair. Okay. Since you mentioned gross margin, that was the other, you know, metric that was really strong this quarter.

Albert Nahmad: My sense is it's both price cost and initiatives, but you know, my question is I don't I don't want us to extrapolate that 29% into the back half. So just how sustainable is that? Was 2Q kind of temporary due to price cost timing?

Barry Logan: Go ahead, Barry. Yeah. Yeah. I think there is obviously an algebraic benefit to margin when OEMs raise prices. In April and May, we talked last quarter that OEMs had faced some inflationary realities going on with tariffs and raw materials and so on. On top of the like-for-like price increase on the new product they introduced inflationary pricing, early in the quarter. That clearly, you know, helped build a bigger margin this quarter, and the benefit of that you know, kind of. But I'm the one that probably three years ago, talked about 27% as a floor, as a benchmark.

And I, you know, I stand by that, obviously, and if I say now 27% plus I would expect that for, you know, the last half of the year. But we won't have the benefit of those pricing actions that you see in the first half of this year. So somewhere in between would be my conjecture and the market will play out and determine what it is. But so I think I think we have a chance to beat our benchmark and but not have the benefit that we saw as extraordinarily this quarter. In terms of pricing.

Ryan Merkel: Well, that's great. We had very unexpected. Yeah. Thanks. Just wanna add. I mean, this is A.J. Nahmad. Just real quickly. I mean, there is the benefit on the OEM price increases, but also the efforts we're making on our price optimization and the leadership of those teams and the pricing teams. That's also working. So it's a combination of both, but we continue to put points on the board in terms of the pricing efforts that we're taking internally. Yeah. I'll add that. As we move our product mix, which I mentioned in the opening statements, towards parts and supplies, and that's what we're focused on with our technology.

That by its nature, carries a higher margin than equipment sales. So our product mix, hopefully, sometime later this year or into next year, we'll improve margins too because parts and supplies carry higher margins.

Ryan Merkel: Thank you very much. I'll pass it on.

Operator: And our next question will come from Brett Linzey with Mizuho. Please go ahead.

Brett Linzey: Good morning. Yeah. Maybe just a follow-up on that. Let the last point there. So if you could maybe just unpack the year-over-year gross margin contribution. Is there any way to delineate that between the pricing optimization tools versus the parts mix versus some of that raw pricing in just in the marketplace in the quarter? That's an interesting question. Who wants to deal with that?

Rick Gomez: Yeah, Brett. I'll take a stab at that. This is Rick Gomez. This is directional because there's, you know, a lot of art and a lot of science to this as well. And but it's not all science. So when we look at the quarter, there was and when we look at the year as well, pretty consistent. There's about 50 to 60 basis points of gross margin enhancement that we can attribute to the day-to-day job of a distributor in the market. And so gross margins would have been in the high 27s. Absent any of that inflation, and the inflation helps but it's not something that you can underwrite, you know, perpetually, obviously.

So that's what it's amounted to. The way, that's been pretty consistent. If I look back, maybe two or three years in the data, we've been at that you know, we can aggregate and say there's been about 200 basis points of gross margin expansion attributable to this price optimization and bringing more technology to how we price. Keep in mind that the complexity of price in the industry is something that generally benefits a distributor. What I mean by that is that virtually every SKU has a different price to every customer. And so to imagine that we are optimized, well, it's the opposite. We're far from optimized.

And that's why we think there's so much room still to go. And, oh, by the way, just to finish, the thought is that during that period of time, we've also gained market share over that three-year period, if I measure it. So that's mainly attributable to all the technology. And my point there is that has not borrowed from customer acquisition and market growth at the end.

Brett Linzey: No. That's very helpful. You know, appreciate that. And then just a follow-up on the cylinder shortage. Sounds like you guys think it abates by the second half. I know some of the peers think it does persist into the second half. So maybe what was the impact do you think in quarter from the shortage situation? And then are you assuming that some of that does carry into H2?

Paul Johnston: Yeah. I think, you know, what this is Paul Johnston. What we had was we had an allocation situation where we were being allocated refrigerant. What the OEMs did was they came through and did an overcharge in the unit so that they didn't require as much, you know, field installation type refrigerant. And so it's become less and less of a concern as time goes on, as our allocations continue to increase. We feel good that sometime in August, we should be off of allocation. And I think it was very irritating. It was very disturbing that we had to go through that.

But I don't think that really is the total cause of why the market was slower than what it was.

Brett Linzey: Thanks for the color. Yeah. Just editorial on that. I you know, the like-for-like SKUs that we're selling now, A2L versus the prior is a 10% difference in price. And a speed bump on the canisters or refrigerant is that. A speed bump? And the transition itself, if we look forward again to that word serenity I used earlier. We're looking forward to it.

Operator: And our next question will come from Tommy Moll with Stephens. Please go ahead with your question.

Tommy Moll: Morning, Tommy Moll. Morning, Albert Nahmad. Thanks for taking my questions.

Albert Nahmad: Of course.

Tommy Moll: Wanted to start on inventory. Maybe you could characterize for us the investment there versus what you would have expected to need for the transition. Just in dollar terms, is it about what you would have soft circled or maybe a little elevated anything you can do to frame that for us and then also how you think it might trend over the next couple quarters?

Albert Nahmad: Well, the honest answer is that it's more than we had hoped for. And some of that is because we expected not to have the unusual demand industry demand that we the lower industry demand. So we peaked at about $2 billion. But we are now very focused on what to do about it and we've lost in terms of inventory investment, $200 million so far in the third quarter, we're down to $1.8 billion. And plus this transition of product you have to have the old and you have to have the new on the equipment side. And we'll transition out of the old before the end of the year. And that will help reduce the inventory investment.

Paul Johnston: That's a very good question. I'm very dedicated to increasing our inventory turn. And it's been a rough time to do that, but I think that.

Albert Nahmad: Yeah. Pretty stoked.

Paul Johnston: Oh, go ahead.

Albert Nahmad: Yeah. On a raw number basis, you know, we had double inventory. We had about 5% of the total inventory was four ten, and then we had the more expensive A2L product in there. So we probably had a 15% rise just between what we had in four ten left over. And what we experienced when we had price increase. The balance of it is exactly what Albert Nahmad said. You know, the demand just wasn't there to be able to take the inventory back down. That you're going to see come down at the end of the third quarter.

Tommy Moll: Thank you both. As a follow-up, wanted to ask about the M&A environment and pipeline hasn't gotten a ton of airtime lately, but how can you characterize that for us?

Albert Nahmad: That's a very good question. We are eager to see what owners of distribution businesses and HVAC are going to do with this existing very soft market. They may do nothing. They may continue or they may say, well, now it's time to do something. In terms of an M&A. And, of course, we have a great reputation with distributors because the way we treat sellers, we're very careful about relationship build continuing post-acquisition with the pristine leadership of the business acquired. So I can't say it's gonna happen, but I'm sure hoping. We have a very, very strong balance sheet. We could take advantage of opportunities as they come.

That I cannot I can only tell you that well, I can't disclose it, but there is one that we think that without disclosing much more than that, that is of size. We'll see how that turns out. It's still under study.

A.J. Nahmad: Yeah. I would say rest assured we're having as many of those conversations as we can. We're super ambitious, and we have the balance sheet. To support anything we want if we can manage to muster up. So hopefully, it can be an exciting period in M&A.

Tommy Moll: Thank you both. I'll turn it back.

Operator: And our next question will come from David Manthey with Baird. Please go ahead.

David Manthey: Morning, David Manthey. Hey. Good morning. Was wondering if you had any thoughts on consumer preference during this product transition, like are you continuing to see a premium on the R410 systems? And then as people are buying the A2L, are they gravitating to one end or the other?

Albert Nahmad: I wonder who in our Oregon who in our team can respond to that.

Paul Johnston: Well, Paul Johnston, are you the one, Paul Johnston? You always are. Yeah. The industry really hasn't popped as far as high-efficiency product. You know, it's still at the entry level. I mean, we're at you know, basically using the old SEER rating. We're at we're at above 15 SEER for minimum efficiency. So it's high-efficiency product. So we really haven't seen a change in the direction of the industry. It's still very much sliding along the idea that it's going to be whatever the minimum efficiency is. And that represents probably 85% of the market. That has not changed. And then when you get into the brands that we're selling, the brands have been consistent throughout the year.

And they continue to hold steady. You know, we're seeing the Carrier brand and the Rheem brand you know, and the Goodman brands all doing their job and holding up their share of the business. We're not seeing a migration to a lower branded product. No.

David Manthey: David Manthey, I was just to just to just to add to that for the fun of it. If I look at brands, products, markets, customers, geographies, north and south, east and west, and we're selling, you know, close to 20 brands. The first half of the year is very consistent amongst you know, that collection of data points. So nothing stands out, Dave, and I don't think this has been disruptive to what kind of the baseline products being sold is going on.

A.J. Nahmad: Yeah. The exciting anomaly, though, and I think it's in our press release, is OnCallAir. When our customers are using the tool that we've created for them, which we call a sales engine, they are selling high-efficiency systems at a much higher rate, like the inverse amount. Meaning, I think it's, like, 70 or 75% of the time, a contractor is selling using OnCallAir. They're selling high-efficiency systems. When we can help influence that through that tool, that's powerful because the consumer gets a better product, the contractor makes a bigger ticket. As do we. It's a win-win-win.

David Manthey: It sounds good. Thanks for all the color there. My follow-up it's the first time we've seen other do better than the equipment in a long time. And as Paul Johnston said, the residential new construction is not helping. I assume all the ductwork and thermostats and things in the other category. So should we not read into this that there's a stronger fix versus replace trend this quarter? Or is it I don't know, commodities, or I'm just making this up. But any thoughts on that?

Paul Johnston: That's pretty small. You know? When you take a look at the entire marketplace, you know, you just take compressors. You know? The normal demand for compressors in The US was about a million two to a million three. And the balance of them go warranty. Because you have a five and a ten-year warranty on most of the equipment. You take a look at the equipment side, it's seven to 8 million units. So for the offset of a down market, on the unit side, through additional parts, yes, it's gonna help our gross margin. But, no, it's not gonna help the top line. It's not gonna help your revenue line.

The ratio is just too great between what parts represent versus equipment. Are we seeing an uptick? Yes. We started seeing an uptick in June. Which historically is the month in which you're going to see that up. It's continued into July, but we really haven't seen a radical increase in units. We've seen an increase in dollars more than we have units.

Albert Nahmad: Now let's not mislead either. Our sales in the new quarter are not they're pretty flattish. Small incremental. Low digit increase. They're not it's nothing that does not signify a major double-digit increase yet.

David Manthey: No.

Albert Nahmad: Thanks very much, about you yeah. When we talked about unit growth of compressors and coils, things like that, year to date is single digit. It's not, you know, it was not an avalanche of transition to that. It could be us just selling more compressors in the market. And I think you heard Carrier talk yesterday very directly about that, and they're talking to you know, 150 independent distributors when they're answering your question to that. So it's obviously an opportunity to sell more parts, but the wholesale trend is not something that I think is quite in the numbers yet.

David Manthey: Yeah. Thanks, Barry. Well, and somebody mentioned earlier, the M&A. We're very eager to do more M&A. Sometimes opportunities arise when you have these kind of markets. I'm sure hoping for it. Are we shut down again?

Operator: Oh, our next question will come from Jeff Hammond with KeyBanc Capital Markets. Please go ahead.

Jeff Hammond: Morning, Jeff Hammond. Good morning, everyone. Is this Real Al or AI Al?

Albert Nahmad: It's a combination.

Jeff Hammond: You have to figure it out. You see? I know it's the real Al. Yeah. That's a good one. Yeah. To clarify on the flattish sales comment, was that parts for July, or is that overall?

Albert Nahmad: Overall.

Jeff Hammond: Okay. Overall. And then just on invent back to inventories, can you just you know, maybe talk about you know, where you wanna ultimately get your turns to? I know you were kinda running four and a half. Turns a year, you know, pre-COVID and pre all these regulatory changes, and now you're kinda three to three and a half. And know, kinda where you see that happening over and over what time frame?

Albert Nahmad: Well, first of all, let me compliment you on the day. You're right about those turns. I'd like I'm not I'm not gonna put a time limit on this, but I'd like to get to five. At some point in time, giving all the technology we're investing in it, I'd like to get to five.

Paul Johnston: I mean, you could think about it. Pre yeah. Pre-COVID, we were at four and a half. We didn't have the technology investment in inventory systems and the management systems that we currently have. So as we come out of it, I think Albert Nahmad's goal of five is very attainable.

Albert Nahmad: We have what we call the dream plan. We may have mentioned it before. Actually, dream plan two because the dream plan one was achieved after three years of effort, and dream plan two is a new. I mean, may take three years to do that. Dream plan two is $10 billion in revenue, 30% in gross profit margin, and five times on the inventory turn. And that's the those are the targets that we're focused on.

Jeff Hammond: I remember when it was 10% growth and 10% margins for a $100. You guys blew through that one.

Albert Nahmad: Believe it or not, though. Believe it or not, that was twenty years ago.

Jeff Hammond: Yeah. Boy, that's this is a hell of a history lesson here today.

Albert Nahmad: Yeah. Yeah. That's pretty impressive. Yeah. I'm so impressed. For the and for those 20-year-old listening to us, Jeff Hammond is right. We're call Pan and Chemicals a 100. It was called ten and ten equals a 100. We got our management team together and rallied around that. Many of them thought Albert Nahmad was out of his mind. And, obviously, we've blown past that, you know, some time ago.

So we reinstituted that cultural you know, kinda concept about six months ago, actually, a year ago, and got everyone together and some of the initiatives that you're not asking about today that you will ask about as we develop them is built on that dream plan two concept and if we got had 75 other Watsco core managers on this call, you would you'd be able to ask them about it, not just ask us just know that culturally, those kind of things go on, and we have fun with it.

A.J. Nahmad: Yeah. And culturally, I mean, really, the takeaway is that we're super ambitious. And that's why we're investing in these big goals that we expect to hit. In time.

Albert Nahmad: And truth is that we also have an equity culture. That really inspires people to achieve and to meet the goals set by senior management. Which means what is the equity culture? Many, many, employees hold the Watsco shares. Either through a 401k or through the different stock plans. And we like that. We like the ownership culture to be spread out. Throughout the organization. It's very unique. And it's very extensive. And so that ownership culture drives their desire to meet goals, I think. And I've always used it, and it's been working. And I expect it to continue working.

Jeff Hammond: Great. Thanks for the time, guys.

Operator: And our next question will come from Patrick Baumann with JPMorgan. Please go ahead.

Patrick Baumann: Good morning. Morning. Thanks for taking my questions. Maybe I was just curious if you could provide some examples of the large enterprise institutional customers that you cite as offering emerging opportunities for growth? Like, and what and what exactly are you doing to go after them?

Paul Johnston: Sure. Sorry? Paul Johnston? Go ahead, A.J. Nahmad. I would I would have A.J. Nahmad into that. Yeah. A.J. Nahmad? Yeah. So I'll jump in first.

A.J. Nahmad: And know, we teased some of this in our press release and also teased that we want you guys to come down to Miami and spend time with us. And see it and hear it and feel it more succinctly. But it's a there are macro trends going on in our industry including private equity, trying to buy up and consolidate contractors. And between that and home warranty companies and other institutional type customers, they're emerging and have emerged would call it, multi-location contractors who may have some business in Florida, some in Texas, some in Tennessee, you name it. And with our size and scale, we should be able to we should be their preferred vendor.

We should be the most exciting place for them to buy product. But don't necessarily have a unified experience for them to take advantage of our whole offering and our whole scale. That's what we're building. We call it Watsco One. And it will be a it'll be exactly that. It'll be one interface for these large institutional type contractors to buy and secure the products that they need from any of our locations whenever they need it.

Patrick Baumann: Interesting. Is it doesn't. Right. It huge undertaking. It doesn't sound that way just using words. But we are a very, very decentralized system. And to aggregate to meet to aggregate ours. Our inventories, and our pricing systems, and all our support systems to meet the needs of a large national customer. That is it takes a lot of lot of initiative. And we're investing to compare all those tools to do that. But it should have a very significant impact once we've accomplished it. Because no one else has these capabilities.

Patrick Baumann: A follow-up to that. Would you see selling to, like, a larger national account contractor any different than I guess, you said it is, but, like, in terms of, like, they're buying capacity, is that something that you would see as a headwind for your gross margin over time?

Albert Nahmad: Of course. That's one of the Yes. One of the elements.

A.J. Nahmad: Would say yes. But we can also we also have the opportunity to sell them a lot more parts and supplies. But which has been discussed earlier. Have a higher gross margin profile. Right. That's why I think it's not so the answer is not so linear, Pat. It's because today, when we look at those big institutional type accounts we're largely selling them equipment, and we're selling them equipment in bulk. And so to broaden that offering means we're taking all else equal we're taking a customer, and broadening the mix of products we sell them, and that's generally accretive to margin at the end of the day.

Patrick Baumann: That makes sense. Okay. Yeah. I just Pat, I'm just gonna say this again for the more for the fun of it. I mean, a great home service is business you could invest in the last fifty years as Rollins. If you don't know the company, look it up. Mean, technology you know, deployed at Rollins you know, yielded 10% higher EBIT margins for their business over time. Right? So the question is, in our partnership with any customer of any size, do we have a business model, an that can help them grow, help them price products, help them you know, operate their business twenty-four seven. You know?

So part of the visibility of what we've done for most smaller contractors, the question is, is that a pliable technology for larger accounts and larger contractors? And it's not about just selling more stuff. It's about helping any kind of size customer operate their business more profitably through us. And our products just happen to be the one they'll scale with to do that with. So this is as much of a technology play as it is a product or any other, you know, any other kind of label you might put on it?

Patrick Baumann: Thanks. Thanks for the color. Sounds interesting and exciting. Maybe just switching gears on my next question on the operating cost side. I think you cite something in the release about targeting cost efficiencies for the rest of the year. Could you provide any color on, I guess, one, the 6% growth rate in the second quarter of SG&A expense? You mentioned cost of the A2L transition. I don't don't know how that kinda made it made it to SG&A, but if you give color on that. And then can you bend that growth rate in the second half with some of the cost efficiencies you're targeting?

A.J. Nahmad: Sure, Pat. I can I'll take a stab at the so first, let's take let's start with the 6%, and we said in the release that we made some acquisitions. We've opened some new locations. So about 25% of that 6%, is attributable to that. So you can think of you know, core SG&A growth, if we call it that, more in the four and a half percent range. Which is still, you know, higher than it should be in a down quarter. But that's kind of our starting point as we think about it.

Then when you think about just the day-to-day life in a branch, during a transition, if we have more inventory, it means that we've received more inventory. It means you need more people receiving that inventory. It means that you have more trucks coming to your locations. It means that you know, you're not optimizing, you know, what you have. It's not business as usual in the day-to-day of a in the day-to-day life of a branch. During such a large-scale transition and to underscore something we said earlier and mentioned in the release, this impacted every domestic location we have in The US, about 650 of them.

So that's where there was some inefficiency, as I would say, in the you know, the labor and the logistics side. And do we think we can bring that down and bring it more into balance in the end of the year? The answer is yes. Our leaders are working on that right now. One of the things that should naturally help that is that when we look at our inventory today, about five to 7% of that inventory is four ten a product. Which means we've largely received all the new product we're gonna get, and we've largely worked out of all the old stuff.

And that means that the branch can't get back to kind of its routine and should be a little bit more efficient in the back half of the year.

Paul Johnston: Yeah. Just to say it a little. My way. You know, as we sell through four ten a product, we need to make sure that we have system matchups that are selling in location. So there's a lot of transferring product within our network to make sure that we have the right systems in place that are sellable in a market where they are selling. If that makes sense. So there's some extra cost that's gone into that as well.

Patrick Baumann: That makes a lot of sense. Thanks a lot. I really appreciate the color.

Operator: And our next question will come from Damian Karas with UBS. Please go ahead.

Damian Karas: Hi. Good morning, gentlemen.

Albert Nahmad: Good morning.

Damian Karas: I'm curious how you're thinking about pricing through the rest of the year. On the equipment side, know, our price is pretty much set. For the rest of the year, and you're just gonna continue to get that benefit of the higher value mix flowing through. Top line. And do you foresee any changes on your parts and commodity supplies that respect to price? And just thinking about you know, further metals inflation and tariffs?

Paul Johnston: Yeah. I don't think on the equipment side, we're gonna see a lot of price increases going forward. On the non-equipment side, you know, Friday is copper day. 50% tariff start on copper. We've already seen about a 10% increase on some of those products that are heavily endowed with copper. So, you know, it's just it's just a matter of wait and see on some of the non-equipment type product. I think the equipment is pretty much in place, though.

A.J. Nahmad: Understood. Yeah. I would just say, let's just make sure, you know, when we I think what we're talking about is cost. Costing you know, the cost of our products and our equipment products I don't think we're expecting much change from our OEM partners. But on price, meaning our price to our customers, that's a con that's what the tooling and the technology enables. It's because every different customer has a different price on every product we sell and every region and every market. That complexity is opportunity. Trends and patterns and anomalies and outliers and segments that should be priced appropriately.

And so we run different I call them plays where we can measure and track when we make a change and that customer's price or a customer segmentation price or a cohort of customers pricing on different products. We can take that to market. We can measure and track, and we can see the impacts. And either double down or go on to the next play. So pricing will always be opportunity just to clarify that costing versus pricing.

Damian Karas: Got it. Got it. That's helpful. And I know this is never an easy task, but if you had to guesstimate, if you will, how much of a headwind to volumes in the second quarter do you think are attributed to are attributable to weather and the canister shortage you know, versus weaker housing and underlying, market demand? You know, I'm just trying to get a sense for what underlying demand might look like as you move past these more transient issues.

Paul Johnston: Yeah. I don't I know if we can I don't think the canister is a business. Yeah? Have anything to do with, with sales the second half of the year. You know, as far as the refrigerant we receive. I think it's gonna be what the consumer feels like, what the weather patterns are gonna be like, how we're able to react and meet inventory demands that the consumer need or that the contractor needs to handle the consumer. I think it's just gonna be blocking and tackling in the second half.

A.J. Nahmad: Yeah. I mean, I think real it's all been said, but has gotta be the noisiest year in HVAC ever be between the tariffs and the weather and consumer confidence and the canister shortages and the home building changes and interest rates and trading homes isn't happening as frequently. I mean, there's just so many things going on at macro levels, most of which are out of our control.

So it's a lot of noise in the industry, and our job is to win in any environment and emerge bigger and stronger and more profitable and take more share from our competitors, and that's I like where we sit in that equation because of our scale, because of our balance sheet, because of our willingness and ability to invest in technology. You know, I'm very, very pleased to be Watsco given all this noise.

Damian Karas: Really appreciate your thoughts. Good luck out there. Thank you.

Operator: And our next question will come from Nigel Coe with Wolfe Research. Please go ahead.

Nigel Coe: Good morning, guys. Appreciate all the color. Hi, Albert Nahmad. So just I think you mentioned four ten a well, 60% or thereabouts. For the quarter. I'm just curious how that trended or maybe where that's trending you know, right time you know, right now real time. And any concerns that you're holding too much for any inventory just given the demand weakness? And, you know or do are you are you confident you'll be done with that transition, you know, this quarter?

Albert Nahmad: I'm chuckling because that's very much on my mind. And, yes, we're doing something about it. So that we don't have that risk. And, Paul Johnston, you can answer in some detail if you'd like.

Paul Johnston: Yeah. It's less than 5% of our inventory at the pleasant time. You know, where we're really, you know, working our butts off is be able to get the right combinations that A.J. Nahmad mentioned before. Gotta have an indoor unit to go with the outdoor unit. And as you sell the inventory down, the pond gets lower, you end up with an indoor unit sitting in one city, and you end up with the outdoor unit in another. So we're putting those pieces together, which is gonna be a drag on SG&A know, with freight. Know, for a period of time here. But I think each one of our companies hear about it continuously that we need to reduce.

We need to keep the focus on four ten, get rid of it, and focus then on being able to sell the A2L product that we've got.

Nigel Coe: Does that mean that you give.

Paul Johnston: Yep. Yep. Yep. Sorry. Does that mean you're incentivizing, you know, that sell through of that? Sorry. Sorry.

Albert Nahmad: For cutting off that, but any does that mean you're incentivizing that process to make that happen?

Albert Nahmad: That's not how we work. We deal with the markets on a decentralized basis. Those are local decisions made by the local entities that we have.

Nigel Coe: Okay. And, Nigel Coe, I would just add to that. Just to add very quickly in terms of the progression of A2L. It's progressing very, very well. I mean, we ended the we exited the quarter in June with more than 80% sell through of the A2L product. And so that's a function of, obviously, diminishing inventory of four ten a, It's also a function of contractors transitioning and adapting well to the product. So, at this point, it's greater than 80% of our sell through as you'd expect.

Nigel Coe: Okay. That's great color. And then my follow-up is you know, what we've seen from you and from your suppliers is tremendously strong price prices holding, which is good news, but, obviously, volumes are incredibly weak. What are you hearing from your contractors? So are they are they asking for you know, some incentives here to try and stimulate some movements? Or are they content to just wait for rates to turn and perhaps demand picks up? Are you starting to get more inbounds on price reductions or discounts or incentives?

Paul Johnston: I don't think we're really getting a lot of feedback on getting lower prices in the market. There's not elasticity to market. If we drop the price two or 3%, it's gonna it's gonna stimulate a 10 or 12% increase in volume. Ain't gonna happen. So, you know, I think the contractor always wants the lowest price, the best price in the marketplace. So that they can compete fairly. But I don't think we're getting a lot of a lot of pushback right now from most of the contractors on the price.

Nigel Coe: Okay. Makes sense. Thanks, guys. Appreciate it.

Operator: And our next question will come from Sam Schneider with Northcoast Research. Please go ahead.

Sam Schneider: Hey. Hi. Looking forward to morning. How are you? Good. Looking Thank you. Looking forward for an excuse to come down to Miami pay for by my employer. So thank Well, you heard it. You did hear loud and clear. Right? Yeah.

Albert Nahmad: Oh, yeah. Let's wait till it goes out. That was great.

Sam Schneider: We'll welcome you when you're coming.

Albert Nahmad: Oh, yeah. No. Thank you.

Sam Schneider: So, look, just focusing on the mix shift which seemed to benefit margin. On parts. I was wondering if the shift was you know, in part at all due to the canister shortage where have people do more repairs. For the time being?

Paul Johnston: You know, most of the most of the canister shortage occurred in the first and the first in the second quarter. And it was something that we worked our way through. We made it through it. Now, as I said, we're seeing a lot more inventory coming in. It's going out as quickly as it comes in. I see it stopping sometime in early August. Early August is, what, two weeks away. So I don't think it's really playing on demand right now as heavily as it was before. I don't see any bubble capening on repair versus replace because of canisters.

Sam Schneider: Got it. Okay. And then just a real quick follow-up. Sort of on the same topic. But any sort of sizable shift to R32 based systems and if so, is that a temporary thing or more permanent in your view?

Paul Johnston: Well, it's only one manufacturer. Daikin, which we represent very proudly, with our Goodman and Amano lines, is R32. Rest of the industry is four fifty-four. So what we've seen is we've seen you know, excellent response from Daikin. To be able to help us with the 32. There hasn't been a shortage of 32. You know, when you get into the four fifty-four, it's been Carrier, Rheem, American Standard, All of them sell four fifty-four units. Roughly 70% R32. It's a blend. Of 32 plus twelve thirty-four y f.

Sam Schneider: A big one. Are you seeing?

Albert Nahmad: That's happened three times, Harry. Yeah.

Operator: It paused the Operator, are you there? Yeah.

Albert Nahmad: I'm here.

Operator: Yes. I'm here.

Albert Nahmad: Is it Why are we tuning out?

Operator: We can go to the next to the next question? Okay.

Operator: Our next question will come from Chris Dankert with Loop Capital Markets. Please go ahead.

Chris Dankert: Good morning, guys. Thanks for taking the question. I guess circling back to WatscoOne, you guys sound excited and sound this is a pretty big opportunity. Is there any way to get a bigger than a breadbox sense here? I mean, we are we talking about serving 500 customer locations, 5,000, or is it too early to kinda get into that type of scaling?

Albert Nahmad: Well, maybe a better way to approach is what is our existing sales of parts and supplies? And what do we think we could provide? I don't wanna speculate too much. What kind of margin improvement do we think we can get from that? It's a very big chunk of our business, 30%. 30% of $7.5 billion. How much of that could we improve our margins on? I'm not gonna speculate, but there will be an improvement.

A.J. Nahmad: Right. You take any percent of that number and it's meaningful.

Chris Dankert: Makes sense. Makes sense. Well, thanks for that. And I guess maybe just to touch on the AI a little bit here. Can you give us maybe some examples for what the use cases are for App Watsco internally? I mean, how is this kinda helping your associates? Is this inventory positioning? Is it warranty data? What's the real use case here?

A.J. Nahmad: My gosh. There's so many. I'm at How much time do we have? Yeah. It is it's helping marketing folks design content and publish content. It's helping our software engineers write code and publish and push more technology faster. It's helping our their teams sort through data and understand trends and patterns and anomalies. It's helping our customer service folks get to more get through more cases more quickly with more accurate answers. And therefore helping our customers at a greater scale or greater rate. Increasing customer satisfaction I can go on and on and on.

And, like, it could be said in the press release, there's about 21 people a week internally who are using these tools or the tool and the ways that they're using it are more and more creative and fast.

Chris Dankert: So, I mean, it really is holistic then. It. Well, thank you so much for that, A.J. Nahmad, and thank you all for the time.

Operator: Absolutely. Chris Snyder with Morgan Stanley. Please go ahead.

Chris Snyder: K. Thank you. I wanted to on the four ten a inventory. I think you guys have less than 5% of your inventory. Do you have any sense, you know, for what that number could look like across your distributor competitors?

Albert Nahmad: No.

Chris Snyder: I don't think we really have any good intelligence on that. And we try not to figure that. That's irrelevant. But we Yeah. It's being phased out. We don't really care.

A.J. Nahmad: Fair enough. Don't care.

Chris Snyder: Chris Snyder, there's a couple data points. I mean, I think, you know, one peer of ours that also distributes their product gave a data point on that, in terms of what their sell through is, and it was pretty high. The other data point these are all anecdotal. This is not science. It's aggregating anecdotes. Is, you know, when we are talking to M&A targets, what do they tell us about their philosophy and their positioning and as a reminder, most of this stuff was built prior to December 31 and shipped in the first quarter.

So someone would have to make a pretty big bet on inventory and would have to really leverage their balance sheet to do that. And so our sense, just by having these conversations in the channel with the M&A targets, is that they're largely phasing out of four ten a at about the same pace we are.

Chris Snyder: Thank you. I appreciate that. And if I could, you know, maybe follow-up on a different sort of inventory question. I guess it's kind of surprising that volumes remain down materially, it seems like, July. You know, with the weather picking up. Does that change the way you guys think about how much inventory is downstream at your customers? You know, could they have been holding extra stock? And perhaps that's why, you know, the sell through has been softer. Thank you.

Paul Johnston: I would say some of the bigger contractors may have some inventory. Inventory at the contractor level is not really material to our industry. It's being held at the distribution point. Not at the contractor point. So I don't think it's a big deal, you know, with the contractor. I would always also remember that you know, in Florida, it's either hot or hotter. It's not it's not just hot, you know, all the time. It's hot. So we've not had a cold summer down here. We've not had a cold summer in Texas.

Where the weather really impacts us is up north where we've got know, where it's you've got a chance out of every third year that you're gonna have a hotter normal summer. Or a normal summer or a lower than normal summer. And so we are definitely seeing a lot of regional differences in the volume. Based on weather. But in the South, we're not really seeing much movement because it's hot in Florida or hot in Texas. It's always hot.

Chris Snyder: Thanks. I appreciate that, Chris Snyder.

Operator: And this concludes the question and answer session. I'd like to turn the call back over to Albert Nahmad for any closing remarks.

Albert Nahmad: Well, thank you for your interest. I love the questions, and that shows a lot of interest. And I hope we've answered your questions fully. And if not, please contact us on your own. And we'll respond to whatever questions you may still have. And other than that, look forward to having you visit us in the cold months that are coming. We'll give you more detail. Thank you. Bye-bye.

Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect your lines.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

This article is a transcript of this conference call produced for The Motley Fool. While we strive for our Foolish Best, there may be errors, omissions, or inaccuracies in this transcript. Parts of this article were created using Large Language Models (LLMs) based on The Motley Fool's insights and investing approach. It has been reviewed by our AI quality control systems. Since LLMs cannot (currently) own stocks, it has no positions in any of the stocks mentioned. As with all our articles, The Motley Fool does not assume any responsibility for your use of this content, and we strongly encourage you to do your own research, including listening to the call yourself and reading the company's SEC filings. Please see our Terms and Conditions for additional details, including our Obligatory Capitalized Disclaimers of Liability.

The Motley Fool has positions in and recommends Watsco. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Hess Midstream HESM Q2 2025 Earnings Transcript

Logo of jester cap with thought bubble.

Image source: The Motley Fool.

DATE

Tuesday, July 29, 2025 at 8 p.m. ET

CALL PARTICIPANTS

Chief Executive Officer — Jonathan Stein

President and Chief Operating Officer — John Gatling

Chief Financial Officer — Mike Chadwick

Need a quote from one of our analysts? Email [email protected]

RISKS

Mike Chadwick cited an incremental $15 million in expected interest expense for full year 2025, mainly due to a higher debt balance following the repurchase transactions, as a negative driver in net income guidance.

Guidance for full year 2025 includes an incremental $15 million in expected income tax expense resulting from ownership changes, as reported by Mike Chadwick.

TAKEAWAYS

Throughput Volumes: Gas processing averaged 449 million cubic feet per day, crude terminaling reached 137,000 barrels per day, and water gathering averaged 138,000 barrels per day.

Growth vs. Prior Quarter: Gas processing and oil terminaling volumes increased by approximately 6% and 10%, respectively, from the previous quarter, reflecting strong upstream production and system availability.

Adjusted EBITDA: $316 million in adjusted EBITDA for the second quarter, up from $292 million in the first quarter, driven by a $30 million increase in total revenues, excluding pass-through revenues, primarily from volume growth in the second quarter.

Segment Revenue Drivers: Gathering revenue increased by $16 million, processing by $9 million, terminaling by $4 million, and third-party services by $1 million compared to the previous quarter.

Costs and Expenses: Excluding depreciation, pass-through costs, and LM4 earnings net, costs rose by $6 million from the first to the second quarter, mainly due to seasonal maintenance and higher third-party processing fees in the second quarter.

Adjusted EBITDA Margin: Maintained at approximately 80% in the second quarter, which is above the company's 75% target.

Capital Expenditures: $70 million in capital expenditures for the second quarter; Full-year 2025 capital expenditures guidance remains unchanged at $300 million.

Net Income: $180 million in net income for the second quarter, up from $161 million in the first quarter; Full-year 2025 expected net income range raised to $685–$735 million following updated interest and tax costs.

Adjusted Free Cash Flow: $194 million in adjusted free cash flow for the second quarter; Updated full-year 2025 adjusted free cash flow guidance is between $725–$775 million.

Distributions: Annual distribution per Class A share is targeted to grow at least 5% per year through 2027. The latest quarterly distribution in the second quarter included growth beyond the annual target after repurchase transactions.

Share Repurchases: The $200 million repurchase in May 2025 included public shareholders for the first time. The company is maintaining an approximate cadence of $100 million in share repurchases per quarter, but actual amounts may vary.

Leverage and Credit Rating: Senior unsecured debt upgraded by S&P to BBB- investment grade.

Liquidity: $273 million drawn balance on the revolving credit facility at the end of the second quarter, with management citing sufficient trading liquidity for ongoing buybacks.

Financial Flexibility: More than $1.25 billion available through 2027 for further unit and share repurchases and incremental shareholder returns.

Governance Changes: New board structure now requires approval from at least one independent director on major decisions, following GIP's full exit and Chevron’s governance participation.

SUMMARY

Hess Midstream LP (NYSE:HESM) reported record operating metrics for the second quarter of 2025, including sequential increases in both throughput and adjusted EBITDA (non-GAAP), supported by strong upstream performance and system availability. Management reaffirmed full-year 2025 guidance for volumes, capital expenditures, and adjusted EBITDA, while incorporating higher interest and income tax expenses into updated net income and cash flow projections. The company maintained its shareholder return strategy, including a targeted 5% annual distribution growth per Class A share through 2027 and a consistent share repurchase cadence, all underpinned by an upgraded investment-grade credit rating and revised board governance requirements to ensure balanced oversight after GIP's exit.

Jonathan Stein stated, Senior unsecured debt was upgraded by S&P to an investment grade rating of BBB- following the close of the Chevron Hess merger, highlighting enhanced credit quality.

Mike Chadwick confirmed, We are maintaining our adjusted EBITDA guidance range of $1,235 to $1,285 million for 2025, directly addressing second-half expectations.

Shareholder return flexibility extends to over $1.25 billion in potential excess capital available for distributions and buybacks through 2027, as stated by management.

Jonathan Stein emphasized, "key decisions require the approval of one independent director" with this mechanism designed to preserve a balanced governance model post-GIP exit.

INDUSTRY GLOSSARY

MVC: Minimum Volume Commitment—a contractual obligation between a producer and the midstream provider, ensuring baseline throughput for a set period, directly impacting revenue predictability.

GOR: Gas-to-Oil Ratio—the volume of produced gas relative to produced oil, an important factor in assessing basin maturity and infrastructure planning in oil and gas development.

ASR: Accelerated Share Repurchase—a mechanism allowing a company to buy back its own shares quickly, often from the open market and/or large shareholders, typically as part of capital return programs.

Full Conference Call Transcript

Jonathan Stein: Thanks, Jennifer. Welcome, everyone, to our second quarter 2025 earnings call. I have a few opening comments, and I will hand the call over to John Gatling to review our operations and Mike Chadwick to review our financials. I wanted to first say that we are all excited and eager to work together with our new Chevron colleagues to continue to drive value for our shareholders. Our new board members, including our new chair, Andy Walls, Chevron's President of Downstream, Midstream, and Chemicals, have significant experience across the upstream, midstream, and downstream businesses and complement the operational and financial expertise of our current board members.

I am also excited to welcome Mike Chadwick to his new role as Chief Financial Officer of Hess Midstream. I've worked alongside Mike for the past twenty years as he's progressed through various financial roles at Hess Corporation. And we are fortunate to have his experience and leadership capabilities working with the midstream. I am also excited to step into my new role as CEO of Hess Midstream. Since our IPO, we have created value for shareholders through operational excellence and execution that drives a visible trajectory of growth and supported by a financial strategy that includes a differentiated combination of balance sheet strength and a priority on shareholder return.

With the continuity of the midstream team in place, we are excited to take this strategy forward as we continue to build Hess Midstream with a unique combination of sector-leading growth and shareholder returns. Today, I want to focus briefly on three themes. First, we continue to deliver outstanding operational performance, which you can see reflected in the quarter that we reported today and also in our fourth annual sustainability report, which we issued a few weeks ago and which highlights our commitment and track record of safe and reliable execution.

In the second quarter, throughput increased across all segments, and we are in line with our annual guidance for volumes to grow by approximately 10% across all oil and gas systems in 2025, compared with 2024. Second, we continue to deliver outstanding financial performance. We are estimating an approximate 11% increase in adjusted EBITDA growth in 2025, with approximately 7% growth at the midpoint in the second half of the year. With total expected capital expenditures of approximately $300 million, we expect to generate adjusted free cash flow of approximately $725 to $775 million, which more than covers our targeted 5% annual distribution growth and generates excess free cash flow.

And third, we are committed to our ongoing financial strategy, which prioritizes return of capital to our shareholders and has made Hess Midstream total shareholder return yield one of the highest of our midstream peers, while also maintaining one of the lowest leverage ratios. Highlighting our balance sheet strength, last week Hess Midstream senior unsecured debt was upgraded by S&P to an investment grade rating of BBB- following the close of the Chevron Hess merger. Since 2021, we have returned greater than $2 billion to shareholders through accretive repurchases and have increased our distribution per Class A share by more than 60%. To 5% targeted annual distribution growth and distribution level increases following each share repurchase transaction.

We expect to generate greater than $1.25 billion of financial flexibility through 2027 for incremental shareholder returns, including the potential for further unit and share repurchases over this period. With a consistent strategy at Hess Midstream, we are excited for the future. We have a visible trajectory of growth that underpins our unique and ongoing return of capital, then Mike will review our financial results and guidance. In the second quarter, Hess Midstream delivered record operating performance. Throughput volumes averaged 449 million cubic feet per day for gas processing, 137,000 barrels of oil per day for crude terminaling, and 138,000 barrels of water per day for water gathering.

Throughputs increased across all segments of our business, with gas processing and oil terminaling volumes increasing by approximately 610%, respectively, from the first quarter, primarily driven by outstanding upstream production performance and high midstream system availability. Turning to Hess Midstream guidance, we're again reaffirming our previously announced full-year 2025 oil and gas throughput guidance. In the third quarter, we expect volume growth from the second quarter across our oil and gas systems, partially offset by higher seasonal maintenance activity. Turning to Hess Midstream's capital program.

John Gatling: Our multiyear projects continue as planned. In 2025, we remain focused on the completion of two new compressor stations and associated gathering systems as well as continuing to progress the Kappa gas plant. Full-year 2025 capital expenditures remain unchanged and are expected to total approximately $300 million. In summary, we remain focused on executing our strategy of disciplined, low-risk investments to meet basin demand while maintaining reliable operations and strong financial performance. We expect our growth strategy to generate sustainable cash flow and create opportunities to return capital to our shareholders. I'll now turn the call over to Mike to review our financial results and guidance.

Mike Chadwick: Thanks, John, and good afternoon, everyone. I wanted to say first that I'm really excited to join the Hess Midstream team and look forward to meeting you in the future. Today, I'm going to review our results for the second quarter and our financial guidance, and then we will open the call for questions. For 2025, net income was $180 million compared to $161 million for the first quarter. Adjusted EBITDA for 2025 was $316 million compared to $292 million for the first quarter.

The increase in adjusted EBITDA relative to the first quarter was primarily attributable to the following: total revenues, excluding pass-through revenues, increased by approximately $30 million, primarily driven by higher throughput volumes resulting in segment revenue changes as follows. Gathering revenues increased by approximately $16 million, processing revenues increased by approximately $9 million, terminaling revenues increased by approximately $4 million, and third-party services and other income increased by approximately $1 million. Total costs and expenses, excluding depreciation and amortization, pass-through costs, and net of our proportional share of LM4 earnings, increased by approximately $6 million, primarily from higher seasonal maintenance activity and third-party processing fees. Resulted in adjusted EBITDA for 2025 of $316 million.

Our gross adjusted EBITDA margin for the second quarter was maintained at approximately 80%, above our 75% target, highlighting our continued strong operating leverage. Second-quarter capital expenditures were approximately $70 million and net interest excluding amortization of deferred finance costs, approximately $52 million, resulting in adjusted free cash flow of approximately $194 million. We had a drawn balance of $273 million on our revolving credit facility at quarter-end. In January, we announced that we are targeting annual distribution per Class A share growth of at least 5% through 2027, which is supported by our existing MVCs.

This week, we announced our second-quarter distribution that included our targeted 5% annual growth per Class A share and an additional increase utilizing the excess adjusted free cash flow available for distributions following the repurchase. Turning to guidance. For 2025, we expect net income to be approximately $175 million to $185 million and adjusted EBITDA to be approximately $315 to $325 million, reflecting higher volumes and revenues partially offset by seasonally higher maintenance costs. We also expect CapEx to increase in the third quarter consistent with seasonally higher activity levels.

For the full year 2025, we are updating net income and adjusted free cash flow guidance to include the impact of an incremental $15 million in expected interest expense mainly on higher debt balance following the repurchase transactions completed so far this year. The updated net income guidance also includes the impact of an incremental $15 million in expected income tax expense resulting from ownership changes following the previously completed secondary equity offerings and repurchase transactions. As a result, we now expect net income of $685 to $735 million. We are maintaining our adjusted EBITDA guidance range of $1,235 to $1,285 million, implying growth of approximately 707% in adjusted EBITDA at the midpoint in the second half of the year.

With total expected capital expenditures of approximately $300 million, we now expect to generate adjusted free cash flow of approximately $725 to $775 million. With distributions per Class A share targeted to grow at least 5% annually from the new higher distribution level, we expect excess adjusted free cash flow of approximately $125 million after fully funding our targeted growing distributions. We continue to have more than $1.25 billion financial flexibility through 2027 that can be used for continued execution of our return of capital framework, including potential ongoing unit and share repurchases. This concludes my remarks. We will be happy to answer any questions. And I will now turn the call over to the operator.

Operator: Thank you. Please press 11 on your telephone. And wait for your name to be announced. To withdraw your question, please press 11 again. Our first question comes from the line of Jeremy Tonet from JPMorgan Securities LLC.

Praneeth Satish: Hey. Good morning. This is, Roth and Reddy on for Jeremy. I wanted to start off with the Hess deal now closed. If you guys have any insight into Chevron's view in the '26 and '27?

John Gatling: Yeah. Maybe I'll touch on it, and then Jonathan and Mike can hit it as well. But just from our perspective, we're currently running four rigs. We've seen very strong upstream performance, well delivery with our increased laterals. The midstream availability has just been phenomenal. You know, we'll continue to execute strongly and stay focused on that. And as we do every year, we'll update our development plan as we get an update with Chevron coming in as our sponsor. So that'll happen towards the end of the year, and then we'll be issuing guidance in January.

Praneeth Satish: Got it. Thank you. And then turning to capital allocation, wondering if you could talk a little bit specifically about your appetite for buybacks at current prices and with GIP sell down now complete, if we should think about any change in the magnitude of repurchases going forward?

Mike Chadwick: Yeah. So with buybacks, as we announced in January, we have about $1.25 billion financial flexibility through 2027, and we expect to do multiple repurchases a year as we've done in the past. So there's no change to that guidance. As we previously mentioned, our January repurchase that was in lieu of not having completed a repurchase in Q4 of last year. Our May repurchase of $200 million which included the public for the first time, that got us back into our cadence of about a hundred million every quarter. However, the size of that is not set in stone. But, generally, a $100 million a quarter is what we will be completing.

We have done over the last couple of years.

Jonathan Stein: And this is Jonathan. You know, as we said at the beginning, as I said in my comments, you know, overall, there's no change to our strategy in terms of our business strategy and to our financial strategy. And you saw that just this week, we issued, as Mike said, our quarterly dividend announcement on Monday night that included our distribution level increase as well as the $200 million increase following the $200 million share buyback that we did earlier. So, you know, really no change in return on capital program going forward. You mentioned GIP. Obviously, GIP out in terms of secondaries. You know, that's not something that we expect.

But in terms of return on capital, which is really always focused on that framework that continues as is.

Praneeth Satish: Makes sense. Thank you, guys.

Jonathan Stein: Thank you.

Operator: One moment for our next question. Our next question comes from the line of Samuya Jain from UBS.

Samuya Jain: Hi, good afternoon. Congrats on the quarter. I was wondering how are you guys seeing GORs trending in the near term? And along with that, what's your outlook on the Bakken heading into 3Q?

John Gatling: Yeah. So the GORs really haven't changed you know, as the basin matures over the longer term. GORs are expected to increase, which they're acting as exactly as we would expect them to. Looking at the North Dakota pipeline authority, Justin Crinstead and the team there, kinda looking at longer term basin growth in the in the gas space And it is anticipated that Bakken Gas Is Gonna Grow Over The Long Term, And We Would Expect The Pest And Chevron Bakken volumes to basically do the same trend the same way. So we're expecting oil to remain in the in the pipeline authorities forecast. They're expecting oil to remain flattish. With gas growing over the longer term.

Samuya Jain: Got it. Thank you. And then could you detail where gas processing volumes are at now over the past month? Any changes to note? We're just trying to understand the cadence, and same with oil terminaling.

John Gatling: Yeah. I think, generally speaking, we've seen an it expect to continue to see the growth through the end of the year, as our guidance has supported that. So, again, we had a very, very strong second quarter. We do continue to expect to see growth into the third and fourth quarters and finish the year at guidance. So I would say you would continue to see that growth through 2627 as the as the MVCs have kind of outlined. And, again, if there's any if there's any changes to the development plan, that'll happen, as part of our normal annual development plan process and that'll be updated in, in January.

Samuya Jain: Got it. Thank you.

John Gatling: Yeah. Thank you.

Operator: Thank you. One moment for our next question. Our next question comes from the line of Doug Irwin from Citi.

Doug Irwin: Thanks for the question. Congrats Jonathan and Mike, on the new roles as well. I just want to start with the guidance range here. If I just take the first half of guidance, first half 25 guidance just in the aggregate, I think you're turning about $15 million above the guided midpoint here year to date. And now third quarter is pointing to a bit more growth from here. I guess is it fair to say you're turning above the annual midpoint at this point, or there may be some variances versus your initial outlook that is kind of shifted around the timing throughout the year here versus your initial second half exit patients.

John Gatling: No. Maybe I'll touch on the operational side, and I can hand it over to Mike and Jonathan. But, overall, we again, we had an extremely strong second quarter. You know, very little weather impact. Essentially, maintenance activity. You know, coming out of the first quarter, which was a bit more challenging, you know, we were really just trying to stabilize operations, and I think we were very pleased with how both the upstream performed, but also how the midstream performed.

We're gonna continue to see that growth going into the third and fourth quarters, but you know, as we transition in, we are expecting to see a little bit more maintenance in the in the second half of the year. And that'll probably be kind of in the in the later part of the year. We're still kind planning all of the all of the activity, but there's there's still there's still some room there. And we're again, I think we're we're still very comfortable with the guidance that we've got currently. Yes. Thanks, John. And I'll just tag on the back of that as we

Mike Chadwick: have seen, we're keeping our adjusted EBITDA guidance for the year, which already includes quite a lot of growth baked into the second half. You know, as Jonathan said and I said in my notes, taking the midpoint of our full year guidance, we expect about 7% higher EBITDA in the second half of the year compared to the first half. And so while revenues are expected to grow on higher volumes, as John described, you know, phasing of maintenance costs means expenses are expected to be higher in Q3, and we also retained some winter weather contingency in Q4. And while winter weather can also lower maintenance costs, Q4 also typically see some variability in our allocation costs.

So we're keeping guidance there. For the second quarter.

Doug Irwin: Okay. That's helpful. Thank you. And then maybe another on buybacks, just asking a slightly different way. It's it's obviously early on in the relationship with Chevron here. I'm just curious if he you expect them to participate in buybacks kind of similar to how Hess did Or will buybacks moving forward pretty much be entirely dependent on buying back shares from public owners? And to the extent that you are buying back more public shares, does just general liquidity of those public shares impact kind of your ability to maintain the run rate? Kind of in as smooth of a cadence as you have in the past?

Jonathan Stein: Sure. This is Jonathan. Yeah. Look. I there's no change as we had said in the past, you know, when we had secondaries and buybacks happening, simultaneously, they're really two separate objectives, while the secondaries were changing ownership levels, the buyback program is really just to return a capital program, and so you would expect over time that we'll have the same you know, participation more closer to the relative proportional levels of the public and Chevron going forward. So really no change to our approach there.

We did include, as you know, now we have the we have kind of road tested, I'll call it, or use, the ASR process last time to include the public in our buyback program. And you know, have that mechanism available for us to be able to do that going forward as well. So really no change there. And in terms of our liquidity, I think you've seen that our liquidity has, you know, continued to increase as we did all the secondary transactions and the public ownership went up.

Our, you know, our liquidity at this point and average trading volume is, you know, more than sufficient to handle our buyback program at the level we've done in the past and expect to do going forward. Great. That's all for me. Thanks, Sean.

Mike Chadwick: Thank you.

Operator: One moment for our next question. Our next question comes from the line of Praneeth Satish from Wells Fargo.

Praneeth Satish: Thanks. Good afternoon. Also, congrats Jonathan and Michael, on the new roles. Maybe can you just provide any more context around GIP's decision to exit its investment in Hess Midstream back in May? I mean, I know they were selling down their stakes, so it wasn't really a surprise. But I guess why do it in May versus maybe after the merger with Chevron?

Jonathan Stein: Sure. So, you know, as you know, we've over the past you know, three years plus, we've been executing secondaries in a very disciplined fashion, each one increasing in size generally over time, and increasingly tighter discounts. So very disciplined approach. GIP saw an opportunity, as we'd always said, The second is based on demand from investors, and then GIP would have assess that relative to their value proposition expectations, and that existed in May. And so they continued taking that opportunity. They, of course, have their own investors and timeline and really, you know, really executing relative Timing. So, really, just continuing the disciplined execution that we had in the past and the opportunity presented itself.

Praneeth Satish: some investors have viewed GIP as providing an independent, voice that kind of helped balance, the sponsor interests with those of the public. So I guess with GIP now out, how do how do you think about the new governance structure versus having that third party institutional investor at the table?

Jonathan Stein: Sure. Yeah. No. We agree that, you know, one of our differentiating strengths relative to other sponsored midstream companies has been our balanced governance. And certainly with GIP, historically, part of the board that provided some, you know, level of that. So consistent with that approach, as you saw, we updated our governance in June following the GIP's exit. And that included that certain key decisions require the approval of one independent director That includes things like leverage above a certain level, issuing equity, or major capital decision among other key strategic decisions. That mechanism is now in place.

As you know, we're adding also a fourth independent board member, but this mechanism is in place independent of the number of board members at the time or the timing of the fourth independent member joining the board. So I think it really highlights our continued belief in the value of a balanced government model that we've had historically. And then with this new mechanism in place that we will continue to have going forward.

Praneeth Satish: Got it. Thank you.

Operator: Thank you. One moment for our next question. Our next question comes from the line of John McKay from Goldman Sachs.

John McKay: Hey, everyone. Thanks for the time. I wanted to pick up a little bit more on the Chevron side. I totally understand it's early and you're you'll have your annual review of activity levels later in the year. But Hess has been talking about this kind of 200 kboe a day target for a long time. Think we've kinda thought about that as the reasonable run rate for the footprint.

Could you maybe just acknowledging that can, I guess, change, but can you maybe just remind us of how that 200 a day level was set kind of what the thought process behind it was, and then, you know, maybe from that, any read on why that might be the right level going forward?

John Gatling: Again, I think, as we think about the 200,000 barrels a day, it was really kind of hitting the over a 100,000 barrels a day of gross oil. Or of net oil and then the gas growth over time. And as we've been doing just from a overall field development pamper plan perspective is we've really been trying to optimize the upstream drilling activity with the midstream infrastructure plan. And so it's it's really about having the infrastructure in place and then keeping that infrastructure as utilized as it possibly can be.

And so where when we looked at the build over time and looked at the infrastructure development and kinda where we felt like the development the field development from a drilling perspective was happening. We felt like that 200,000 barrels a day is about the right level. So, you know, outside of the two compressor stations that we're building this year, we're you know, in the process of progressing the Capa gas plant. You know, as far as material long term infrastructure, activity, we're we're kind of at that at that level where the infrastructure is stable.

And so from our perspective, you know, we're kind of looking at this as how does the drilling activity the infrastructure system really complement each other so that you get very, very high utilization of that equipment and really optimize the system itself. So that's that's really kinda where we are and how we've we've continued to look at it. And as we continue to look longer term, we'll we'll you know, look at our development plan again, which, again, it's a it's a very integrated,

John McKay: activity between the upstream and the midstream.

John Gatling: Know, that'll happen in the fall, and then we'll be updating our longer term guidance in, January.

Jonathan Stein: This is Jonathan. You know, one thing just to highlight, John really picked it up on the end, and I think it's important to highlight this stage, which is one of the historic strengths of Hess Midstream has been the partnership that we've had between the upstream and the midstream between Hess Midstream and the upstream and Hess to be able to develop the block in the most optimal way And you know, now as we go forward with Chevron, there's no change to that partnership. There's no change to the focus on both of us. Working together to optimize the Bakken and develop it, as John described.

And as he said, you know, that the normal process will continue where we get a updated development plan, We'll figure out what's the right infrastructure required to meet that development plan going forward. And then we'll update our guidance based on that going forward. So really continuing in that strong partnership that has really been a hallmark of our relationship historically.

John McKay: That's helpful, and that's all clear. Maybe just one related one. You've seen kind of increased efficiencies on the upstream side there, just what's been the latest commentary around related inventory life?

John Gatling: Yeah. I mean, I think, you know, we're still everybody gets still hung up on rig count and well counts and all of that. And, you know, really, as we move into an extended lateral program, it really is the lateral footage drilled. And so from our perspective, the overall lateral footage that's been drilled as far as what's available to develop really remains unchanged.

And in fact, we're actually seeing a little bit of growth in that space just from the standpoint of as those extended laterals become a bigger part of the portfolio, that creates opportunities for improved economics on those wells where they may be in more challenged areas But if you're drilling a three, four mile lateral, your the economics get much better, and that unlocks some of the of the rock that may have been challenged before. So I think we're we continue to be extremely optimistic in that space, and that's something that continues to be a tailwind for us as we as we look forward, for the basin development.

John McKay: Alright. That's clear. Appreciate the time. Thank you.

Mike Chadwick: Thank you.

Operator: This concludes today's conference call. Thank you for participating. You may now disconnect.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

This article is a transcript of this conference call produced for The Motley Fool. While we strive for our Foolish Best, there may be errors, omissions, or inaccuracies in this transcript. Parts of this article were created using Large Language Models (LLMs) based on The Motley Fool's insights and investing approach. It has been reviewed by our AI quality control systems. Since LLMs cannot (currently) own stocks, it has no positions in any of the stocks mentioned. As with all our articles, The Motley Fool does not assume any responsibility for your use of this content, and we strongly encourage you to do your own research, including listening to the call yourself and reading the company's SEC filings. Please see our Terms and Conditions for additional details, including our Obligatory Capitalized Disclaimers of Liability.

The Motley Fool has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Sysco Posts 6.5% EPS Beat in Q4

Key Points

  • Adjusted earnings per share reached $1.48, surpassing analyst estimates by 6.5%.

  • Revenue was $21.1 billion, up 2.8% from the prior year.

  • Local U.S. Foodservice case volume remained negative, but management guided for moderate sales and earnings growth in fiscal 2026.

Sysco (NYSE:SYY), a global leader in foodservice distribution, released its fourth-quarter results for fiscal 2025 on July 29, 2025. The headline results showed adjusted earnings per share (EPS) of $1.48, beating the Wall Street estimate of $1.39 (non-GAAP). Revenue totaled $21.1 billion, which was also above forecasts and up from the same quarter last year. Company leadership said overall results "exceeded expectations" thanks to improved trends in local foodservice and execution of internal initiatives. While the quarter was better than expected, certain key metrics, such as Local U.S. case volume continued to trend lower in recent quarters, signaling mixed industry conditions.

MetricQ4 FY25(13 weeks ended Jun. 28, 2025)Q4 EstimateQ4 FY24(13 weeks ended Jun. 29, 2024)Y/Y Change
EPS (Non-GAAP)$1.48$1.39$1.396.5%
Revenue (GAAP)$21.1 billion$21.0 billion$20.6 billion2.4%
Adjusted Operating Income (Non-GAAP)$1.1 billionN/A$1.1 billion1.1%
Adjusted EBITDA (Non-GAAP)$1.3 billionN/A$1.3 billion1.8%
Net Earnings (GAAP)$531 millionN/A$612 million(13.2%)

Source: Analyst estimates provided by FactSet. Management expectations based on management's guidance, as provided in Q3 2025 earnings report.

Business Model Overview and Key Success Factors

Sysco is the largest foodservice distributor in North America, supplying restaurants, healthcare, educational facilities, and hospitality businesses. Its core business is the delivery and sale of fresh, frozen, and packaged food, along with equipment and supplies, to commercial customers.

Key areas for success include maintaining and growing share in a fragmented $360 billion U.S. foodservice market (calendar year 2023). With about 17% share for calendar year 2023, Sysco faces low barriers to entry and a mix of regional and national competitors. Supply chain efficiency, pricing competitiveness, regulatory compliance, and workforce management are critical. Investments in employee retention and technology, strong customer service, and international expansion strategies also play key roles in maintaining Sysco’s position in the industry.

Quarter Highlights: Revenue, Profitability, Segments, and Trends

The quarter brought solid revenue growth above GAAP estimates, with Total sales were up 2.8% compared to the prior year. U.S. Foodservice operations contributed $14.8 billion (GAAP) in sales, up 2.4%, but total case volume in this segment slipped 0.3%. The more telling local case volume fell 1.5%, a trend that continued from earlier periods as Foot traffic at restaurants remained weak in the prior quarter.

The International Foodservice segment posted stronger results, with Sales in the International Foodservice segment were up 3.6% to $3.9 billion. When adjusted for constant currency and excluding the Mexico joint venture, growth was even higher at 8.3%. Gross profit in the International Foodservice segment increased 7.6% to $847 million. International adjusted operating income increased 20.1% from the prior year quarter, reflecting both margin gains and local volume growth. SYGMA, Sysco's logistics-focused unit, saw GAAP sales rise 5.9% year over year, contributing to the overall top line but representing a smaller part of profits.

Gross profit company-wide (GAAP) improved by 3.9%, with the gross margin expanding to 18.9%. This was mainly due to better management of product cost inflation, which stood at 3.5% for the quarter, with meat and dairy most affected. Operating expenses, however, grew at a faster rate -- up 8.2% (GAAP) -- impacted by increased headcount and a $92 million goodwill impairment (GAAP) in the Guest Worldwide business segment. The company’s net earnings (GAAP) fell to $531 million, impacted by these higher costs and impairment charges, though Adjusted net income rose 3.3% to $716 million.

Sysco’s supply chain and pricing agility were central topics in the prior quarter. The company launched a price-matching and approval pilot to better respond to competitor pricing while protecting margins. In U.S. operations, Gross profit and gross margin (GAAP) ticked higher, but the expense base expanded as Sysco invested in both people and delivery capacity. Management continued on “self-help” initiatives, such as improving salesforce retention. Company leadership expects the benefits of these investments to show more strongly in the next fiscal year, stating, “Salesforce will be a tailwind, not a headwind.”

Customer churn remains elevated across the industry, largely due to price transparency and value-seeking by end customers. Sysco’s view is that high-value customer retention and improved service will be a critical focus for fiscal 2026. "Sysco To Go" is a cash-and-carry concept that targets price-sensitive customers by allowing them to pick up goods directly from centralized locations, thereby lowering delivery costs and offering greater convenience.

On the balance sheet, the company had $3.8 billion in liquidity at period end and net debt at 2.85 times adjusted EBITDA. Cash flow from operations (GAAP) was $2.5 billion, and free cash flow was $1.8 billion, both lower than the prior year. Significant funds went to expanding distribution centers both domestically and abroad. Sysco returned $2.3 billion to shareholders in buybacks and dividends, highlighting its ongoing capital allocation approach. The quarterly dividend increased 6% year over year, continuing more than five decades of consecutive annual raises.

Looking Ahead: Guidance, Risks, and Investor Considerations

Management issued guidance for FY2026 calling for GAAP sales between $84 and $85 billion, up approximately 3% to 5% from FY2025 and adjusted EPS in the range of $4.50 to $4.60 (up 1% to 3%) (non-GAAP). This guidance factors in a headwind from higher incentive compensation. Excluding that impact, the adjusted EPS growth would be about 5% to 7%. Planned share buybacks will remain steady at around $1 billion, and dividend growth is planned to match adjusted EPS growth expectations. The company expects ongoing pressure on U.S. local volume and continued investments in talent and infrastructure.

For investors and observers, upcoming quarters will hinge on Sysco’s ability to convert its investments in the salesforce into higher case volumes and recapture customer churn. Market share in the U.S. stands at about 17% for 2023, but the flat or declining local volume shows that competitive risks remain. With product cost inflation, regulatory compliance, and labor market challenges still present, results will depend on execution rather than industry growth alone. Continued margin management and cost discipline remain essential.

The quarterly dividend was raised 6% to $0.54 per share.

Revenue and net income presented using U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) unless otherwise noted.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

JesterAI is a Foolish AI, based on a variety of Large Language Models (LLMs) and proprietary Motley Fool systems. All articles published by JesterAI are reviewed by our editorial team, and The Motley Fool takes ultimate responsibility for the content of this article. JesterAI cannot own stocks and so it has no positions in any stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has positions in and recommends Sysco. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Why fuboTV Stock Skyrocketed on Wednesday

Key Points

  • fuboTV released preliminary second-quarter results that far outpaced expectations.

  • Wedbush analyst Dan Ives significantly boosted his price target.

  • fuboTV has mounted a remarkable turnaround, and there could be better days ahead.

Shares of fuboTV (NYSE: FUBO) charged sharply higher on Wednesday, surging as much as 22.3%. As of 11:53 a.m. ET, the stock was still up 22%.

The catalyst that sent the streaming video specialist higher was a bullish call by a Wall Street analyst after the company released positive preliminary financial results.

Where to invest $1,000 right now? Our analyst team just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks to buy right now. Continue »

Two people sitting on a couch watching television.

Image source: Getty Images.

Significant upside ahead?

Wedbush analyst Dan Ives issued a positive note to fuboTV investors, maintaining his outperform (buy) rating on the stock and raising his price target to $6, up from $5. For those keeping score at home, that represents potential gains for investors of 69%, compared to Tuesday's closing price. The analyst cited the company's preliminary results as encouraging and noted that management's guidance was conservative.

fuboTV released its preliminary results on Tuesday, and while the declines continued, the company showed progress. Revenue is expected to come in at about $373.5 million, which would represent a decline of 4.5% year over year, but the results were much better than management's previous guidance, which called for revenue of $352 million.

Subscriber numbers were also better than expected. Total subscribers are expected to clock in at 1.69 million, up from fuboTV's previous forecast of 1.57 million.

The company also reported that its expected net loss of $8 million improved dramatically, compared to a loss of $18 million in the prior-year quarter.

Reason for hope?

fuboTV has mounted a remarkable comeback so far this year. After plunging 60% in 2024, the stock has skyrocketed 240% in 2025 (as of this writing), and the company continues to make progress toward its goal of returning to year-over-year growth. It's expected to begin offering "skinny bundles" later this year, which is expected to reignite subscriber growth.

At 21 times trailing-12-month earnings, fuboTV stock is still reasonably priced, particularly for investors who are willing to take on a little risk for the potential of additional upside.

Should you invest $1,000 in fuboTV right now?

Before you buy stock in fuboTV, consider this:

The Motley Fool Stock Advisor analyst team just identified what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy now… and fuboTV wasn’t one of them. The 10 stocks that made the cut could produce monster returns in the coming years.

Consider when Netflix made this list on December 17, 2004... if you invested $1,000 at the time of our recommendation, you’d have $630,291!* Or when Nvidia made this list on April 15, 2005... if you invested $1,000 at the time of our recommendation, you’d have $1,075,791!*

Now, it’s worth noting Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039% — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500. Don’t miss out on the latest top 10 list, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the 10 stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

Danny Vena has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has positions in and recommends fuboTV. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Leonardo DRS (DRS) Q2 2025 Earnings Transcript

Image source: The Motley Fool.

DATE

  • Wednesday, July 30, 2025, at 10 a.m. EDT

CALL PARTICIPANTS

  • Chairman and Chief Executive Officer — Bill Lynn
  • Chief Financial Officer — Mike Dippold

Need a quote from one of our analysts? Email [email protected]

RISKS

  • Management cited, "germanium availability and pricing remain a thorny issue," with export restrictions constraining supply and increasing costs, and noted that reliance on safety stock is required to sustain product deliveries for most of the year.
  • Adjusted EBITDA margin expansion guidance for FY2025 was reduced due to R&D investment running well above plan, as well as "increased raw material input costs related to germanium."
  • "Quarterly cash usage was higher than this time last year," attributed to increased working capital investment, although expected by management.
  • The company is "actively mitigating the germanium availability challenge" but expects "more meaningful relief in 2026," signaling continued near-term operational risk.

TAKEAWAYS

  • Bookings: $853 million of bookings, reflecting a book-to-bill ratio of 1.0 with notable strength in electric power and propulsion, naval network computing, advanced infrared sensing, and ground systems.
  • Total Backlog: $8.6 billion total backlog, up 9% year over year, with funded backlog experienced double-digit growth.
  • Revenue: $829 million in revenue, representing 10% year-over-year growth and balanced contributions from both business segments.
  • Adjusted EBITDA: Adjusted EBITDA was $96 million, a 17% increase in adjusted EBITDA, yielding a margin of 11.6%—70 basis points higher versus the prior year.
  • ASC Segment Performance: ASC adjusted EBITDA increased by 5%, though ASC adjusted EBITDA margin declined by 50 basis points due to higher internal R&D and unfavorable program mix arising from germanium cost pressures.
  • IMS Segment Performance: IMS adjusted EBITDA was up 41% and margin expanded by 290 basis points, predominantly driven by the Columbia Class program and broader electric power and propulsion activities.
  • Net Earnings: Net earnings (GAAP) were $54 million, with diluted EPS (GAAP) of $0.20, up 42% and 43%, respectively, compared to Q2 FY2024.
  • Adjusted Net Earnings: Adjusted net earnings were $62 million, with adjusted diluted EPS of $0.23, increasing 32% and 28%, respectively (non-GAAP).
  • FY2025 Guidance (Revised): Revenue raised to $3.525-$3.6 billion for FY2025 (9%-11% growth), adjusted EBITDA narrowed to $437-$453 million, and adjusted diluted EPS set between $1.06-$1.11, assuming a 19% tax rate, and 269 million fully diluted shares (guidance for FY2025).
  • Free Cash Flow: The company expects approximately 80% conversion from adjusted net earnings for the full year 2025.
  • Q3 Outlook: Revenue is forecasted to be near $925 million for Q3 FY2025, with adjusted EBITDA margin (non-GAAP) targeted in the mid-12% range, with and free cash flow generation comparable to 2024.
  • Macro Tailwinds: Management directly referenced $150 billion in new U.S. defense funding via the One Big Beautiful Bill Act, enacted earlier in 2025, with $113 billion front-loaded into FY2026, allocated to FY2026 defense funding, and a FY2026 U.S. defense budget request totaling $962 billion, up 12% year over year for FY2026 compared to FY2025, including reconciliation funding.
  • International Demand: NATO members are now targeting 5% of GDP for national security with 3.5% dedicated to defense, higher than the previous 2% benchmark, supporting further international growth for Leonardo DRS, Inc.
  • Golden Dome: Management said initial order activity is expected in 2026 due to the early-stage program architecture and procurement planning.
  • Internal R&D Investment: Increased IRAD reached the mid-threes percent of revenue at the half-year mark in 2025, up from 2.8% in 2024, focusing on counter-UAS, space, and missile seeker capabilities.

SUMMARY

Leonardo DRS (NASDAQ:DRS) management reported revenue and profitability growth across both business segments in Q2 2025, driven by ongoing program execution and strong U.S. and international demand. Operating performance prompted an upward revision to full-year 2025 revenue and adjusted earnings guidance, despite near-term cost headwinds from materials and elevated R&D investment. Macro environment developments, including major increases in U.S. defense spending and rapidly rising NATO commitments, underpin long-term demand visibility across core program areas without material changes to contract structure or company positioning.

  • The company expects to be largely insulated from direct impacts of expiring tariff reprieves, although management acknowledged potential second-order risks, including new critical minerals trade restrictions.
  • Bill Lynn noted upward pricing pressure in the M&A market due to heightened sector interest, and stated, We are seeing properties that would be interesting there. The prices are relatively high.
  • Management clarified that the Columbia Class program’s contract structure provides stability against budget changes and reported delays, as contracts for ship sets are secured into the mid-2030s.
  • Mike Dippold stated that R&D investment, directed at expanding ReadyNow solutions, has been intentionally increased to accelerate competitive positioning in counter-drone and space-focused markets, with internal R&D spend rising from about 2.8% in 2024 to the mid-3% range at the half-year point.

INDUSTRY GLOSSARY

  • Book-to-bill ratio: A measure comparing new bookings (orders received) to revenue billed during the period; a ratio above 1.0 indicates backlog growth.
  • ASC: Advanced Sensing and Computing segment, focused on infrared sensors, electronic warfare, and computing systems.
  • IMS: Integrated Mission Systems segment, comprising electric power, propulsion, force protection, and mission system solutions.
  • IRAD: Internal Research and Development; company-funded R&D for product and technology development outside customer contracts.
  • Golden Dome initiative: U.S. strategic layered air and missile defense funding priority named in recent federal defense legislation.
  • Columbia Class program: U.S. Navy nuclear ballistic missile submarine program central to company’s naval power content and growth outlook.
  • ReadyNow: Proprietary term management uses to reference rapidly deployable, mature, production-ready technologies.
  • Counter UAS: Solutions and technologies targeting the detection, tracking, and neutralization of unmanned aerial systems (drones).

Full Conference Call Transcript

Bill Lynn, our Chairman and CEO, and Mike Dippold, our CFO. They will discuss our strategy, operational highlights, financial results, and forward outlook. Today's call is being webcast on the Investor Relations portion of the website, where you'll also find the earnings release and supplemental presentation. Management may also make forward-looking statements during the call regarding future events, anticipated future trends, and the anticipated future performance of the company. We caution you that such statements are not guarantees of future performance and involve risks that are difficult to predict. Actual results may differ materially from those projected in the forward-looking statements due to a variety of factors.

For a full discussion of these risk factors, please refer to our latest Form 10-Ks and our other SEC filings. We undertake no obligation to update any of the forward-looking statements made on this call. During this call, management will also discuss non-GAAP financial measures, which we believe provide useful information for investors. These non-GAAP measures should not be evaluated in isolation or as a substitute for GAAP performance measures. You can find a reconciliation of the non-GAAP measures discussed on this call in our earnings release. At this time, I'll turn the call over to Bill. Bill?

Bill Lynn: Thanks, Steve. Good morning, and welcome, everyone, to the Leonardo DRS, Inc. Q2 earnings call. Our second quarter results reflect sustained momentum and capturing customer demand, driving revenue growth, expanding both profitability and margin. In the quarter, we secured $853 million of bookings, which is a 1.0 book-to-bill ratio for the quarter. We saw particular strength for electric power and propulsion, naval network computing, advanced infrared sensing, and ground systems technologies, all of which contributed meaningfully to Q2 bookings. Our total backlog stood at $8.6 billion, rising 9% year over year. Also noteworthy was that our funded backlog maintained a healthy double-digit growth rate in the quarter.

We continue to expect a book-to-bill ratio greater than 1.0 for the full year, thanks to strong performance in the first half and consistent customer demand across the portfolio. Diving deeper into our quarterly financial performance, we delivered double-digit organic revenue growth squarely in line with the framework shared on the last call. Furthermore, the foundation built in the year to date is leading us to increase our full-year revenue growth expectations to 9% to 11%. Our profit metrics also showed strong performance. Adjusted EBITDA was up 17%, corresponding margin increased by 70 basis points, and adjusted diluted EPS was up 28%. In aggregate, our strong Q2 results position us well to meet our full-year outlook.

That said, the team and I remain focused on disciplined program execution, investing for future growth, and navigating a complex operational environment. We continue to operate in a dynamic macro backdrop, one that remains largely favorable to Leonardo DRS, Inc., though not without its complexities. Let me begin with the positives. Earlier this month, the One Big Beautiful Bill Act was enacted, a sweeping tax reconciliation package that includes $150 billion in defense funding, with $113 billion front-loaded into FY '26. This legislation represents significant opportunities and tailwinds for Leonardo DRS, Inc.

The funding emphasizes the following: shipbuilding and enhancing industrial base resiliency, layered strategic air and missile defense, including initial funding for the Golden Dome initiative, counter UAS and unmanned systems, electronic warfare, missiles and munitions, and more broadly, investment in innovation to enhance asymmetric capabilities. Our portfolio is well aligned with these national priorities, and we expect to benefit across the company as this funding is obligated over the coming years. Additionally, the administration's FY '26 defense budget request calls for $962 billion in total defense spending, including the reconciliation funding, which in total represents a 12% increase year over year. Beyond the US, global defense spending continues to rise amid ongoing geopolitical tension.

Notably, NATO members are now targeting 5% of GDP for national security, with 3.5% dedicated to defense, a sharp increase from the long-standing 2% benchmark. This trend is expected to support incremental international demand, particularly for our ReadyNow differentiated capabilities. The intensifying global threat landscape is especially acute for our operations and employees in Israel. We are grateful to report that all employees in the region are currently safe. We are closely monitoring the situation and are taking proactive steps to enhance employee safety and operational continuity. Shifting to supply chain, while our overall supply chain remains relatively healthy, germanium availability and pricing remain a thorny issue. Export restrictions have constrained the available global supply of this raw material.

Unfortunately, new mining and refining capacity has also been slower to ramp. We are currently relying on our safety stock, which provides sufficient runway for most of the year. However, in order to sustain timely product deliveries, material flow must improve in the second half. We are actively mitigating the germanium availability challenge through a multipronged approach. We expect these mitigation efforts to offer more meaningful relief in 2026. Onto tariffs. The temporary reprieve granted by the administration is set to expire later this week. As previously discussed, we expect to be largely insulated from direct impacts, particularly for inputs where cost increases can be clearly tied to tariffs.

However, second-order risks persist, including the potential for retaliatory trade restrictions on items such as critical minerals. Despite the complexities of the macro environment, Leonardo DRS, Inc. continues to innovate and deliver cutting-edge technologies to meet the evolving needs of our customers. This quarter, we delivered advanced infrared sensing content for the next-generation short-range interceptor or stinger replacement, as well as other future missile systems. These sensors provide a distinct operational advantage, offering higher resolution, improved countermeasure resilience, lower cost, and enhanced overall performance. We are also seeing growing opportunities to integrate our mobile power generation solutions into new missile systems.

Overall, I am pleased with our ability to broaden the applicability of our infrared sensing expertise into this logical adjacency. Amid rising strategic and tactical threats, Golden Dome is a critical part of this effort. Our portfolio, including our over-the-horizon radar, tactical radar technologies, as well as counter UAS capabilities, is highly relevant and well-positioned to support this demand. Additionally, some of our increased internal research and development investment is being directed toward further demonstrating and maturing our space sensing capabilities. We believe we have a highly differentiated offering that can provide customers added capability in space-based missile tracking and intercept. We are committed to securing competitive successes in this domain.

The persistent threat environment is driving escalation of customer interest and an expansion of existing contracts across each of the capability areas I noted earlier. Our tactical radar offering has maintained strong international demand, as allied nations look to reinforce their short-range air defense posture. At the same time, we are seeing rapid expansion in counter UAS opportunities across the company, but also a comprehensive technology suite including infrared sensors, laser and RF systems, along with platform integration expertise to deliver best-of-breed solutions. Customer focus on counter UAS is here to stay, and its importance is only growing, as evidenced by the recent launch of a joint interagency task force to tackle this ongoing threat.

Beyond sensing and force protection, our network computing business plays a critical role in enabling next-generation shipboard computing, supporting both US and allied naval modernization initiatives. Our proprietary ice piercer cooling technology is starting to gain traction, especially as customers seek to increase computing density and system performance in constrained platforms. Lastly, to round up my operational updates, I want to briefly touch on our electric power and propulsion business. This part of Leonardo DRS, Inc. continues to perform exceptionally well, serving as a consistent financial tailwind propelling both top-line growth and margin expansion.

We are well-positioned to capitalize on medium and long-term opportunities tied to next-generation platforms and to expand platform content in support of the priority to improve shipbuilding throughput. Our Q2 financial results reflect the strength of our portfolio and growing demand for differentiated capabilities in a rapidly evolving threat environment. We have solid momentum in bookings and a remarkable backlog that provides ample runway visibility into enhanced revenue growth. That said, we remain rigorously focused on continuing to deliver for our customers. Our success to date is a testament to the hard work of our team, and we are committed to building on this foundation in the second half of the year.

Let me now turn the call over to Mike, who will review the second quarter and our revised 2025 guidance in greater detail.

Mike Dippold: Thanks, Bill. I am pleased with our year-to-date performance. We had a solid quarter, but we are keeping focus on consistent execution to deliver against our full-year financial objectives. Let me begin by reviewing Q2 performance. Revenue for the quarter was $829 million, 10% higher year over year. The strong continued organic growth is fueling our ability to raise our guidance for the full year, which I will discuss shortly. Both segments had relatively balanced contributions to our increased quarterly revenue. The IMS segment and the company in total benefited from greater revenues from electric power and propulsion programs. Advanced infrared sensing and ground network computing programs bolstered growth at ASC as well as at Leonardo DRS, Inc. at large.

Moving now to adjusted EBITDA. Adjusted EBITDA in the quarter was $96 million, up 17% from last year. Adjusted EBITDA margin in Q2 was 11.6%, representing a 70 basis points of margin expansion compared to last year, and improved profitability at our electric power and propulsion business, most notably on our Columbia Class program. Shifting to the segment view, ASC adjusted EBITDA increased by 5%, but margin contracted by 50 basis points due to greater internal research and development investment along with less favorable program mix and less efficient program execution caused by rising raw material costs, namely germanium.

IMS adjusted EBITDA was up 41%, and margin expanded by 290 basis points, thanks to improved profitability on our Columbia Class program and across the rest of the electric power and propulsion business. Onto the bottom line metrics, second-quarter net earnings were $54 million, and diluted EPS was $0.20 a share, up 42% and 43%, respectively. Our adjusted net earnings of $62 million and adjusted diluted EPS of $0.23 a share were up 32% and 28%, respectively. Solid core operating performance coupled with reduced interest expense led to favorable year-over-year comparisons. Moving to free cash flow.

Although our quarterly cash usage was higher than this time last year, it was in line with our expectations as we anticipated increased working capital levels to fuel growth. Despite higher capital expenditure investments in 2025, halfway through the year, we are revising our full-year 2025 guidance across our key metrics. We are increasing the range of revenue to $3.525 to $3.6 billion, implying a 9% to 11% year-over-year growth. We have solid backlog visibility for the balance of the year, with a modest portion of our revenue coming from book-to-bill programs. Approximately 90% of our full-year revenue has been realized or is in backlog.

Given the healthy visibility, the timing of material receipts will be the most important factor in determining the level of our revenue output. We are also narrowing the range of adjusted EBITDA. The revised range is expected to be between $437 and $453 million. At this time, we expect IMS to offer more growth and margin improvement opportunity relative to ASC. The guidance adjustments to revenue and adjusted EBITDA result in a reduced implied margin expansion for the year. This is due to two factors. One, our increasing R&D investment well above plan, and two, we are seeing increased raw material input costs related to germanium.

Our revised adjusted diluted EPS range incorporates the tailwinds from increased core profitability, lower net interest expense, and a reduced diluted share count. We now expect adjusted diluted EPS between $1.06 and $1.11 a share. Assumed in these figures is a tax rate of 19%, which is unchanged from our prior guide, and a $269 million fully diluted share count, lower than our prior guide as we factor in the impact of stock repurchases. With respect to free cash flow conversion, we still anticipate approximately 80% conversion of our adjusted net earnings for the full year.

The recently enacted tax legislation is expected to have limited benefit to our 2025 free cash flow, but it will be a modest tailwind in 2026 and beyond. That said, we are still working to quantify the specific impact. Now let me offer up our framework for the third quarter. We expect revenue in the neighborhood of approximately $925 million, adjusted EBITDA margin in the mid-12% range, and free cash flow generation comparable to 2024. Please note the timing of material receipts will weigh heavily on how the second half is allocated on a quarterly basis. Let me offer some closing thoughts before we take questions. I want to extend my gratitude to the broader Leonardo DRS, Inc. team.

Our financial success is a direct result of their incredible efforts and unwavering commitment. As we navigate an increasingly complex global environment, we remain consistently focused on delivering exceptional technology to our customers, executing with excellence, and driving sustainable long-term growth. With that, we are ready to take your questions.

Operator: Thank you. Due to time restraints, we ask that you please limit yourself to one question and one follow-up question. Our first question will come from the line of Peter Arment with Baird. Your line is open.

Peter Arment: Yes. Hey, good morning, Bill, Mike, Steve. Nice results. Thanks for the color on kind of Golden Dome and how you're positioned. Maybe if I could just ask, when do you expect, you know, I know the architecture hasn't been fully laid out with General Goodline just getting the assignment. But how do you expect it to kind of roll out in terms of impact, you know, your backlog? When should we start to see kind of some of the programs that you might be well-positioned on?

Bill Lynn: Thanks, Peter. I mean, as you said, they're just organizing themselves on the architecture. There are industry meetings starting, and the department has an internal effort to lay out an architecture. So I think that means you won't see much in the way of bookings or orders this year in calendar '25. But I think given that they're trying to really focus on doing things in this presidential term, you'll start to see orders roll out in the '26 time frame.

Peter Arment: Okay. Appreciate that. And just as my follow-up, just could you talk maybe a little bit about the M&A environment? I know you've had interest there in the past, and just, you know, are you seeing more deals just given, you know, where funding is and any update there? Thanks.

Bill Lynn: Yeah. I mean, we're, as you know, we're in the market. We're looking. We're doing diligence. We're seeing a continual flow of things in those four core markets where we're focused. We have been active. I'd say the only change we're seeing is given the interest in the sector, I think prices are pushing up. So I think that's been a factor here. We're having to assess our financial criteria, which are relatively strict, although we're open to things the closer they are strategically to our main areas of focus, the more we're willing to extend on financial criteria. And that's what's going on right now is that strategic focus. We are seeing properties that would be interesting there.

The prices are relatively high.

Peter Arment: Got it. I'll jump back in the queue. Thanks, Bill.

Operator: And one moment for our next question. And that will come from the line of Robert Stallard with Vertical. Your line is open.

Robert Stallard: Thanks so much. Good morning.

Bill Lynn: Morning. Good morning.

Robert Stallard: Couple for you. First of all, I was wondering if we could dig into this whole germanium thing. And what's going on there. You know, how much of a headwind has it been so this year? What are you expecting in the second half? And what is this metal used for in terms of your products? And then secondly, maybe following up on Peter's question, was wondering if you could elaborate on this flexibility on looking at M&A. Does this mean you might be open to using equity, for example? Are you looking at a different return metric in terms of when the deal might pay off? That would be helpful. Thank you.

Bill Lynn: Yeah, Peter, let me—I'm sorry, Rob, let me start on germanium and then let Mike expand on it. On germanium, you know, what's happened is given the tension with China, the source of most of the germanium in the world is the supply has reduced to a trickle. We anticipated this in the sense that we built up a safety stock. And we're now having to utilize that safety stock. That has been effective for us, but it has caused prices to increase. And it's also caused us to seek other sources of germanium outside China. So we're looking at other countries and sources of germanium. We're looking at other customers.

There is an ability to recycle out of existing products. And then there are opportunities on some products we could use something other than germanium, although that requires at least a couple of months' work in terms of redesign, qualifying. It's not overly taxing, but there is a time lag. We're pursuing all of those with a target of 2026 to bring some or all of those online. Let me let Mike address your question on the fiscal impacts.

Mike Dippold: Yes. So Rob, first, you had a question in terms of what product are they used for? This is going through our infrared product line. So in our advanced sensing, computing business, but more focused on our infrared sensing capabilities, that's where you see this metal being used. For the impact, we spoke a little bit about last quarter in terms of the price shock that we saw because of the supply-demand elements that were in play. And we made the comment that absent the germanium impact, the margins of ASC would have been in line in Q1 with expectations. Looked into Q2 here, and the prices remained fairly stable.

What we're seeing is as that availability becomes a concern later in the year, we've had some absorption issues and some overhead rates that have impacted a little bit more than we had anticipated in Q1. So that's what we're looking at from an impact perspective. All of that's now incorporated into the revised guide that we put forward.

Bill Lynn: Rob, I'd come back on your M&A question, the financial. We have three financial metrics: EPS, ROIC, and then our overall margin and growth. On EPS, we expect it to be accretive in the first year. There's a little flex there, but probably not. With that, we will look at ROIC, we're looking at a multiyear return. I think there we would have flex. I think things that would take maybe a little bit longer to bring a positive contribution to ROIC, we're willing to kind of go along beyond our notional three-year window looking four years, five years. I think that would be well within something we'd find acceptable. And the other is more general.

We have, I think, a very strong, you know, right now, double-digit growth story. We have a margin enhancement story. I don't think we are now changing our approach there. We don't want to undercut that story with a significant acquisition. And that really hasn't changed. So the change is I think we'll be more flexible on ROIC.

Robert Stallard: Okay. That's great. Thank you very much.

Operator: And one moment for our next question. And that will come from the line of Michael Ciarmoli with Truist Securities. Your line is open.

Michael Ciarmoli: Hey, good morning, guys. Thanks for taking the question. Bill, maybe just a little bit more clarification on what Keith was asking about Golden Dome. I mean, you know, thinking about timing of order flow, does that kind of stand for already deployed existing systems, or is this kind of—are you talking architecture for some of the newer kind of systems and capabilities that might be deployed?

Bill Lynn: Right. It's a little hard to be specific because they don't even have a program yet. But I think, you know, directionally, I think the first orders would have to be on existing systems, just given the timing. And you're going to have to develop—it will take longer time to develop first the requirements and then the RFP and then the competition for kind of future-oriented. So I think what's behind your question is right. The early orders are likely to come from something that has some maturity, something that's already something that can be produced.

Michael Ciarmoli: Got it. Okay. And then just if I may, just because you used to be in the building, you know, this is obviously a unique and dynamic budget environment. We're getting a big bump up in front-end load here with reconciliation, but we don't have a FYDP yet. How are you guys thinking about, you know, just budget and trajectory longer term and maybe, you know, kind of, like I said, just drawing on your experience from being in the building?

Bill Lynn: Yeah. It's actually not unusual at this point not to have a FYDP. Usually, a new administration just puts out a first-year budget and is in the middle, as they are, of their kind of their strategic plan. Obviously, what they have done so far, they really inherited from Biden. It takes some months to develop that strategic plan, which they're doing. So I wouldn't expect to see a FYDP until the next budget, which is February. But that's not unusual. In terms of what to expect, I mean, there's lots of puts and takes in the reconciliation bill.

I think, you know, if you look at just general historical trends and tendencies, when you move from a Democratic to a Republican administration, normally, what you see is a modest at least bump up in the overall defense spending. Generally, politically, a Republican administration sees itself as stronger on defense, wants to show that in the budget. And then second, they have more initiative. You know, multiple questioners have mentioned Golden Dome. But there's force protection, there's shipbuilding, there are programmatic reasons to increase the budget. So I think at the end of the day, when the smoke clears, you'll see a Trump budget that, over time, is moderately higher than its Biden predecessor.

Michael Ciarmoli: Got it. Okay. Good color, Bill. I'll jump back in the queue here.

Operator: And one moment for our next question. And that will come from the line of Seth Seifman with JPMorgan. Your line is open.

Seth Seifman: Thanks very much, and good morning. Wanted to ask, you know, you talked about performance, good performance in electric power and propulsion, and about the opportunities there that may be to capitalize on what's coming into the resources coming into the industrial base. I wonder if you could be more specific around kind of where you see opportunities, you know, do those opportunities come out of the new facility in Charleston primarily? And you know, what the timeline for capitalizing on some of those opportunities might be?

Bill Lynn: Sure, Seth. And I'll start and then let Mike add some more color. I mean, first of all, the core program, of course, in our naval powers is Columbia, which is secured through the middle of the next decade and is on a steady increase. And we are using that South Carolina facility to execute that program with greater and greater efficiency, which should be a tailwind on margins. Beyond that, which is really what I think you're asking, is we see that facility and our overall capabilities generally as well-positioned to help the Navy surge content into the industrial base with the goal of particularly increasing the throughput of submarines where we have important content beyond just Columbia.

In particular, I would say the first of those opportunities is in the area of steam turbine generators. The Navy has now given us $50 million of that industrial base money to build a test capacity in South Carolina for that. What should follow on is another contract to design a new steam turbine generator with production to follow. The problem that's addressing is that there's only one producer of steam turbine generators, which makes it something of a choke point in submarine production. And the Navy is interested in the second source to address that choke point. So I think we're a principal part of the avenue to address that challenge.

And beyond that, I think there's a more general view, and we're talking to the Navy in the future about can we use our capacity to take on more work and allow the yards to dedicate their resources to producing submarines faster. That's still a sort of an early-stage discussion, but I think there's real potential for additional content to move to suppliers such as Leonardo DRS, Inc. with, again, the goal of increasing that submarine throughput.

Mike Dippold: Yeah. The only thing I'll add, Seth, is from a timing perspective, we do expect the Columbia portion of the building to begin to come on in 2026, in late 2026, and actually begin to pull the work in. That Columbia piece of the investment not only covers Columbia but also if we have some successes in new platforms that'll help from a capacity perspective and ability to execute. What Bill was mentioning in terms of the steam turbine efforts, that funding is now flowing, and we're starting those exercises.

That will come on from a timing perspective a little later, you know, outside of 2026 as we create that test capability and start to move forward on the steam initiative. From there, you can start to see that extra tool that we're putting in a toolbox from a steam turbine generator perspective start to be an impact of revenue outside of that 2027 time frame as we begin to execute development work with the anticipation of hopefully having production thereafter.

Seth Seifman: Great. Thank you. And maybe just as a quick follow-up, do you expect—how do you look at the bookings environment for the second half? Do you expect to exit the year with the backlog higher than it was at June 30?

Bill Lynn: Yes. We do. But let me let Mike address it.

Mike Dippold: Yeah. I would—I think the bookings for the quarter of the kind of one-to-one ratio, I wouldn't put too much stock into that. We're continuing to see strong demand across all elements of the business. For the six-month period, we're still sitting above the one-to-one ratio, and we expect that to continue throughout the second half of the year. So still a lot of confidence. The macro tailwinds in the threat environment are still there. The budget alignment is there. And we feel good about our ability to continue to see strong bookings throughout the remainder of the year.

Seth Seifman: Great. Thank you very much.

Operator: One moment for our next question. And that will come from the line of Andre Madrid with BTIG. Your line is open.

Andre Madrid: Good morning, everyone. Thanks for taking my question. Thanks, Andre. You previously disclosed international sales would outpace the broader sales growth for this year. With the new NATO commitments, again, that's not instantaneous. It's over a decade. But could we see upside to, you know, what you initially thought international would be through the out years?

Bill Lynn: Yeah. I think a couple of things are happening in the international space right now. First off, you know, what will drive a little bit of the international is what happens with Ukraine. So I think first and foremost, that's going to be an indicator of where our international sales go. So far, that demand has continued. From a NATO perspective, we are seeing consistent demand signals across some of the, you know, East European members of NATO and are focused on being able to execute there. The question in the long term will be, what does that mean from a European industrial base investment buying American?

We continue to see the elements moving towards the ReadyNow capabilities are still important. So we see that as a tailwind to, you know, kind of the US domestic opportunities to sell abroad. I expect to see that trend continue. Again, we still view the international market as a growth engine because of NATO, but also just because of the other macro trends and the hot global conflicts that are emerging.

Andre Madrid: Got it. Got it. Maybe a follow-up to that. I mean, so long as they, you know, fit into the criteria that you've outlined already, would you be especially interested in acquiring anything over in Europe? I guess, following on to that, given that, you know, valuations have been a little high right now, a little rich, what's your attitude towards forging partnerships with defense tech names? I mean, this just seems to be becoming more prevalent in the current threat and demand environment, so curious to hear your thoughts there.

Bill Lynn: On the—we have a global focus on our M&A. Obviously, we demonstrated that when we acquired RADA and the triangular merger that brought us public, RADA being an Israeli company. And we have looked in Europe and Asia as well. So we have an international focus. We're not limited just to the US. In terms of partnerships, that too is on the table. We have had discussions with different companies about arrangements we might make that will increase our mutual competitiveness. And so that would be on the table as well.

Andre Madrid: Got it. Got it. I'll jump back in the queue.

Operator: One moment for our next question. And that will come from the line of Christine Lewag with Morgan Stanley. Your line is open.

Christine Lewag: Hey, good morning, everyone. Bill, you've kind of talked a lot about the germanium risks here. I was wondering, are there other rare earth metals that you're watching? And it sounds like 2026, you'll see some improvement. But if you have, you know, I guess, what we're seeing in the industry is everybody else is also trying to figure out their supply. If things don't necessarily pan out as you expect for 2026, how could this shortage of germanium or higher cost affect operating performance?

Bill Lynn: Thanks, Christine. We do look at other—the biggest other material we think about is permanent magnets because that's a part of the electric drive system in Columbia and any other programs. We are pretty well protected right now in that we have the supply for all of our existing programs. So as we look at it, it's more protecting against future programs, and we're looking at what steps we would need to do to do that. But in terms of germanium on 2026, as I said, we have multiple paths in terms of recycling, other sources, other materials.

We think that through the course of 2025, those are going to come online and allow us to start to begin back up the ramp again in terms of germanium and protect the 2026 program.

Christine Lewag: I see. Thank you. That's really helpful. And following up on the opportunity in European NATO, even though NATO in Europe wants to spend more money on defense, there's also a concerted effort to focus more on indigenous capabilities. So, I mean, you guys are, you know, largely an American company. But your ownership is also with a European parent. So do you have any indication in terms of how these governments view you? Do they view you as an American company, or do they view you as hybrid because of your European parent ownership? How does that work? And does that change the opportunity for Europe for you regarding their higher spend?

Bill Lynn: I think we're in a proxy. We're most definitely a US company. I think that's how we're viewed both in the US and in Europe. I think though the angle towards which you're headed is right, is where we have opportunity, which is maybe unique given our ownership structure. We have the opportunity to team with and collaborate with Leonardo because of our closeness, and that allows us then to go into Europe as a home team and to use the good offices and the teaming arrangements with Leonardo. And we're seeing opportunities in the UK and elsewhere where we can execute on that partnership.

It's that partnership rather than just being seen as a—it's not how we're seen as our country of origin. It's how we partner with our 70% shareholder.

Christine Lewag: Great. Thank you.

Operator: One moment for our next question. And that will come from the line of Moeller with Canaccord Genuity. Your line is open.

Moeller: Hi. Good morning. Just my first question here. If we look at the House Appropriation Committee's draft of the defense bill, there's a 57% plus-up to about $5.27 billion for the Columbia Class program. I was wondering if you could just comment on that and the reported 12 to 16-month delay in boat construction for Columbia Class and how that affects the one versus two production rate for Columbia and Virginia Class and how we should think about that.

Bill Lynn: Yeah. On Columbia, the Navy, working with the yards, has intentionally put us in a relatively segregated position so that we have, as I said, the contracts on Columbia for the ship sets all the way through shipset 12, which takes you into the mid-2030s. The purpose of that was to insulate this critical component from the ups and downs of the program itself. The reason to do that is you don't want to lose—this is a complex program. You don't want to lose the learning. You don't want to lose the workforce by having gaps and, you know, having down cycles and then being forced to retrain.

That will cause schedule and budget issues in the Navy, and nor are we looking for that. So, you know, we're not really affected by that budget increase that you talked about. We have, you know, our budget set by contract all the way through the 2030s. And the intent of setting that contract out was not to change the motor schedule, the drive schedule, based on relatively modest changes in the ship delivery schedule, the submarine delivery schedule.

Moeller: Okay. And if we think about the force protection counter UAS side of the equation, if we do see the Ukraine war continue, I think you talked about this a little bit already, but presumably, that's incrementally positive for sales into US NATO allies, etc.

Bill Lynn: I think more generally, the threat that Putin posed through by attacking Ukraine is what's, you know, driving Europe to higher defense budgets, and they're seeing that concrete threat that Putin is prepared to cross borders in a way that we haven't seen in 80 or 90 years. That is then driving, you know, programmatic implications, prominent among them is force protection. The advent of drones, the importance of having not just kind of perimeter protection around your formations, but really organic protection inside those formations. So programs like RM Lids, that counter UAS system, become critical.

And what we're seeing is a growing international demand for that kind of system, partly driven by Ukraine, but more generally driven by the trends in warfare that we're seeing in Ukraine, you're seeing in Israel, and how do you bring on systems that counter that. And with some urgency given what Putin's doing in Ukraine and the future implications of that.

Moeller: Great. Thanks for all the details there.

Operator: One moment for our next question. And that will come from the line of Jon Tanwanteng with CJS Securities. Your line is open.

Jon Tanwanteng: Hi. Good morning, and thank you for taking my questions. Was wondering if you could break down the new guidance range and just the components of it. Especially the revenue line. What's driving that? Is it stronger demand or contract modifications? Maybe just more confidence in the ability to work down the backlog, you know, with improved supplier execution? Is there something else that's going on? Just a little help there would be helpful. Thank you.

Mike Dippold: Yeah. I'll—I'll from the guidance on the revenue side, here, the uplift is certainly driven just by the continued demand that we're seeing. We got out of the gate really hot from a bookings perspective in Q1. And that confidence coupled with the consistency of the supply base and the material receipts 13% year over year. So, you know, the bookings demand, where we are with the backlog year over year, what we've executed to date through the six months, and the stability of the supply base gave us the confidence to increase the revenue guide, Jon.

Jon Tanwanteng: Okay. Great. And how should we think about the R&D intensity going forward over the next three to five years and how that affects operating leverage, especially if you chase these new programs in the new DOD budgets and increase NATO spending.

Mike Dippold: I'm sorry, Jon. I didn't catch the end of that. I lost you. Can you repeat that question again?

Jon Tanwanteng: Yeah. How should we think about R&D intensity and the operating leverage that you have, especially with, you know, the new DOD budgets and with the higher NATO commitments?

Mike Dippold: Yes. So from an R&D budget perspective, I'm assuming you're talking about the internal R&D spend. Correct. Yeah. But ultimately, what we wanted to do and what we've made a priority of is there's certainly an emphasis within the administration to get products to the warfighter quicker. And therefore, they're trying to accelerate procurements, and we wanted to ensure that we have ReadyNow solutions and ReadyNow capabilities and are investing increased IRAD in order to make that a reality. So we've taken up our IRAD, you know, from about 2.8% in 2024 to an area where we're sitting at the mid-threes here at the half-year point. So that's a sizable headwind from a margin perspective.

But we do believe we're investing in areas that are getting a lot of enthusiasm surrounding. And when you talk about the counter-drone capabilities, when you talk about space, missile seekers, as Bill mentioned in the prepared remarks, these are the areas we're investing in. The markets are growing. And we thought it would be prudent to continue to invest heavily in there to facilitate our continued growth.

Jon Tanwanteng: Okay, great. If I could sneak one more in there, just when do you think you can get margins on products containing germanium or alternatives back to the normalized range, whether that's through pricing or through supply, or going to some of these alternative technologies to do so.

Mike Dippold: Yeah. I think the first challenge we have is to execute against the backlog. Right now, we're in a position where we're a predominantly fixed-price shop. So the pricing fluctuations are being realized in our results, and that's what's realized in our guide. Prospectively, we are looking at contract modifications that allow some flexibility. In terms of the recovery when you have the volatility in germanium like we've seen, which is largely due to some of the trade wars and other elements that are going on that are, you know, kind of outside of our control. We've seen mixed results from a customer receptive perspective on that.

And we're continuing to push hard on that to make sure that we're derisked from the price volatility.

Jon Tanwanteng: Okay. Any sense of timing of when that normalizes overall?

Mike Dippold: It's going to be a program-by-program negotiation, to be fair. So it'll be on a contract-by-contract basis.

Jon Tanwanteng: Okay. Great. Thank you.

Operator: Thank you. And as a reminder, if you would like to ask a question, please press 11. Our next question will come from the line of Ronald Epstein with Bank of America. Your line is open.

Ronald Epstein: Hey, good morning. So germanium has been a bit of an issue for you guys. It really doesn't seem like it's been for anybody else. I'm curious why that may be the case. And then two, are there any other rare earths that we should start worrying about for you or others given what's going on broadly with trade, particularly with China?

Bill Lynn: Ron, I think obviously, we're a sensor house since an important piece of our product base. So germanium, I think, stands out for us. I don't know what's going on with others. But I'm sure they're not getting germanium. The other one, and I mentioned it on an earlier question, I'd say the principal other one we focus on is in the electric power area is permanent magnets. And there, I think currently, we're in a strong position with holding what we need to execute our current programs. But we are trying to anticipate future disruptions and trying to think about how do we—how do we—of course, we're winning future electric drive programs.

So we need to think about how we protect future sources of supply. It's a high-class problem, but we're anticipating winning other programs, and we're taking steps now to protect against that future potential.

Ronald Epstein: And then if you could peel back, Daniel, a little bit on, you know, with the big investments that are being made into the naval industrial base, shipbuilding industrial base. What other opportunities are out there for you all? I mean, I would imagine there's got to be a whole bunch of them if you could maybe mention a few.

Bill Lynn: Are you talking shipbuilding, or are you looking beyond shipbuilding?

Ronald Epstein: Shipbuilding.

Bill Lynn: Shipbuilding, I think as we said, we have the current Columbia program. The biggest near-term opportunity is the steam turbine generator that I talked about. Coming after that, I think, is just the general enhancement industrial base programs and the realignment of the workload between yards and suppliers. And then the one I didn't mention, but I—well, two I didn't mention, future ship classes as the propulsion system because of the operational advantages in terms of cost, in terms of quietness, and in terms of the mechanical systems just cannot meet the needs. And even as you increase sensor demand, which is inevitable, mechanical systems won't meet the need. So we think the next-generation destroyer DDGX is a good candidate.

The next-generation submarine, the SSNX, probably an even better candidate. And then, of course, internationally, international navies are looking at electric drive as well. So we think, you know, over the next five to ten years, there's going to be a shift into electric drive, and we think we stand to benefit from that.

Ronald Epstein: Got it. Got it. And then if I can ask you just one more. Sort of more macro question. You know, again, given your experience, you know, kind of on the hill and in the building, how would you expect fiscal '27 to play out? Right? I mean, in terms of the budget process this year was sort of bizarre. Right? Do we get another reconciliation? I mean, how is it all going to go? I mean, it seems kind of likely that there's going to be another continuing resolution. I mean, I don't know. I mean, if you were to look in your crystal ball, take a swipe at it, how would you guess fiscal '27 plays out?

Bill Lynn: I think, as I said, at the end of the day, it's hard. As you said, this has been a very unusual year, particularly with the very large increase in the reconciliation bill. And there's still—they allocated a lot of that to '26, but not all of it. So there's still some reconciliation money out there that needs to be allocated. They have to make a decision on what is the '27 base bill. As I said in the answer to an earlier question, so I mean, I think what you want to see is, you know, maybe a sustained and predictable increase in the defense budget that will let us meet the growing threats from China and Russia.

That's, I think, the policy goal. I do think it's going to be the policy goal of this administration. So I think, you know, they're going to have to find a way through reconciliation, maybe a second reconciliation bill. I don't know. And the core base budget bills to execute on that sustained predictable growth. That should be their goal, and I think it is their goal.

Ronald Epstein: Got it. Alright. Thank you very much.

Operator: Thank you. I'm showing no further questions in the queue at this time. I would now like to turn the call back over to Steve Vather for any closing remarks.

Steve Vather: Thanks for your time this morning and for your interest in Leonardo DRS, Inc. As usual, if you have any follow-up questions, please call or email. We look forward to speaking with all of you again soon. Enjoy the rest of your day.

Operator: This concludes today's program. Thank you for participating. You may now disconnect.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

This article is a transcript of this conference call produced for The Motley Fool. While we strive for our Foolish Best, there may be errors, omissions, or inaccuracies in this transcript. Parts of this article were created using Large Language Models (LLMs) based on The Motley Fool's insights and investing approach. It has been reviewed by our AI quality control systems. Since LLMs cannot (currently) own stocks, it has no positions in any of the stocks mentioned. As with all our articles, The Motley Fool does not assume any responsibility for your use of this content, and we strongly encourage you to do your own research, including listening to the call yourself and reading the company's SEC filings. Please see our Terms and Conditions for additional details, including our Obligatory Capitalized Disclaimers of Liability.

The Motley Fool has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

RPC Posts 16% Revenue Gain in Q2

Key Points

  • Revenue (GAAP) slightly topped expectations at $420.8 million for Q2 2025, but adjusted EPS missed the estimate at $0.08.

  • The Pintail Completions acquisition boosted reported revenue in Q2 2025, yet margins and profits declined year over year (GAAP, Q2 2025 vs Q2 2024).

  • The quarterly dividend remained at $0.04 per share, while free cash flow (non-GAAP) fell from $56.7 million to $17.6 million for the first six months of 2025.

RPC (NYSE:RES), a provider of oilfield services to energy producers in North America, reported results for Q2 2025 on July 24, 2025. The company’s headline news was the major acquisition of Pintail Completions, a wireline service provider, which contributed to a 15.6% year-over-year revenue rise. Reported revenue (GAAP) reached $420.8 million, just edging past consensus GAAP estimates of $420.5 million. However, diluted adjusted earnings per share (EPS) were $0.08, missing the $0.09 expectation and dropped from $0.15 in Q2 2024. As industry pressure and integration costs weighed on earnings. The quarter highlighted ongoing headwinds in core service lines such as pressure pumping, as well as operational shifts due to the new acquisition. Overall, the quarter reflected mixed performance, with some growth via acquisition but continued softness in underlying business segments.

MetricQ2 2025Q2 2025 EstimateQ2 2024Y/Y Change
EPS – Diluted (Non-GAAP)$0.08$0.09$0.15(46.7%)
Revenue$420.8 million$420.5 million$364.2 million15.6%
Adjusted Net Income$17.5 million$32.4 million(46.0%)
Adjusted EBITDA$65.6 million$68.5 million(4.2%)
Adjusted EBITDA Margin15.6%18.8%(3.2 pp)

Source: Analyst estimates for the quarter provided by FactSet.

Business Overview and Strategic Focus

RPC provides oilfield services such as pressure pumping, wireline, coiled tubing, downhole tools, cementing, and rental tool support. Its clients include exploration and production companies mainly in the United States. The company is known for its diversified service lineup, and after the Pintail acquisition, it increased its presence in the wireline segment, especially in the Permian Basin.

Key factors for success include the ability to respond to oil and gas price cycles, careful cost control, and investment in service technology and efficiency. In recent years, RPC has targeted growth in higher-margin and less cyclical service lines, reinforcing its client base among large, established energy producers. Strategic moves, such as the Pintail purchase, support this shift and aim to reduce overall volatility in results.

Quarterly Highlights: Performance, Segments, and Financials

Reported GAAP revenue of $420.8 million was up 15.6% from Q2 2024 and slightly above projections, mostly due to the addition of Pintail's $98.9 million contribution. Excluding this, adjusted revenues fell 3 % from the previous quarter, revealing an underlying decline in the legacy business. Adjusted diluted EPS, at $0.08, fell short of analyst expectations by approximately 8.8%.

Margins compressed as the cost of revenues outpaced sales growth, a trend tied to the integration of Pintail and ongoing weakness in the company's mainstay pressure pumping services. Adjusted EBITDA margin dropped to 15.6%, down from 18.8% in Q2 2024. Net income, excluding certain acquisition-related costs, was $17.5 million, marking a 46% year-over-year decrease compared to Q2 2024.

Segment results show a mixed picture. Technical Services revenue climbed 27% quarter over quarter, primarily from the Pintail wireline acquisition, and operating income for this segment increased 51% sequentially. However, pressure pumping revenue, RPC’s largest product line (which provides high-pressure pumping for hydraulic fracturing), was down 18% sequentially. Support Services, which includes rental tool and similar offerings, posted a 14% revenue rise, with operating income up 74%, driven by cost leverage and increased demand for rental equipment.

Industry forces were evident. The U.S. rig count, a common indicator of drilling and completion activity, dropped to 571 from 603 in Q2 2024. Oil prices averaged $64.74 per barrel, down 20.8% year over year. Management called the market “challenged” with lower commodity prices and strong competition. “Results were negatively impacted by our pressure pumping service line as we experienced weaker activity and pricing pressure ... The diversified service lines, customer base, and geographies across our company provided resiliency during the quarter. ... Competition continues to be intense, but we will remain disciplined focusing on full cycle returns."

The Pintail acquisition significantly increased RPC's blue-chip customer base and wireline revenue share. The deal was done without using the company’s credit facility, yet free cash flow (non-GAAP) year-to-date fell sharply to $17.6 million from $56.7 million in the prior year period. Goodwill and intangibles swelled on the balance sheet, reflecting Pintail’s integration. Year to date, the company allocated $17.5 million to dividends and only $2.9 million to share repurchases, primarily to settle share vesting taxes, year-to-date.

RPC's dividend policy continued, with a declared $0.04 per share for the period. An unusually high effective tax rate, a result of acquisition costs not deductible for tax purposes, affected net income calculation. The balance sheet remained strong with $162 million in cash and no outstanding borrowings under its revolving credit facility.

Looking Ahead: Guidance and Investor Considerations

RPC did not provide a specific financial outlook or quantitative guidance for the upcoming quarter or full-year period. Management comments remain cautious, reflecting continued industry softness and uncertainty in commodity prices. The company signaled a focus on efficiency, selective capital spending, and exploring new opportunities, but refrained from presenting a forecast.

Investors should monitor RPC's execution of the Pintail integration, trends in pressure pumping margins, and the company’s ability to manage through potential sustained periods of lower commodity prices. Significant one-time integration costs from the acquisition remain in future quarters. Oilfield services competition and customer activity shifts, particularly in the Permian region, will determine near-term results. The quarterly dividend was unchanged at $0.04 per share.

Revenue and net income presented using U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) unless otherwise noted.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

JesterAI is a Foolish AI, based on a variety of Large Language Models (LLMs) and proprietary Motley Fool systems. All articles published by JesterAI are reviewed by our editorial team, and The Motley Fool takes ultimate responsibility for the content of this article. JesterAI cannot own stocks and so it has no positions in any stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Ultra Clean Posts Q2 Revenue Beat

Key Points

  • Revenue reached $518.8 million, topping expectations by $17.97 million and matching analyst EPS estimates.

  • Non-GAAP gross and operating margins declined year over year in Q2 FY2025.

  • A $151.1 million goodwill impairment led to a significant GAAP net loss in Q2 FY2025.

Ultra Clean (NASDAQ:UCTT), a supplier of engineering and manufacturing solutions for the semiconductor industry, released its second quarter 2025 earnings on July 28, 2025. The company’s GAAP revenue surpassed analyst expectations in Q2 FY2025, coming in at $518.8 million (GAAP) versus the $500.8 million estimate, while non-GAAP earnings per share (EPS) landed squarely in line with forecasts at $0.27. The overall quarter was marked by weak profitability, as the company recorded a large non-cash goodwill impairment that swung its GAAP net results deeply negative. Despite matching non-GAAP EPS expectations and slightly beating GAAP revenue forecasts, the results reflected ongoing challenges in demand and operational efficiency.

MetricQ2 2025Q2 2025 EstimateQ2 2024Y/Y Change
EPS (Non-GAAP)$0.27$0.27$0.32(15.6%)
Revenue (GAAP)$518.8 million$500.8 million$516.1 million0.5%
Gross Margin (Non-GAAP)16.3%N/A17.7%(1.4) pp
Operating Margin (Non-GAAP)5.5%N/A6.9%(1.4) pp
Net Income (Non-GAAP)$12.1 millionN/A$14.4 million(16.0%)

Source: Analyst estimates provided by FactSet. Management expectations based on management's guidance, as provided in Q1 2025 earnings report.

Business Overview and Strategic Focus

Ultra Clean is a manufacturing and engineering partner for original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) in the semiconductor industry. The company is best known for building and servicing essential components and sub-systems used in semiconductor manufacturing, providing both products and services to many of the industry's biggest names.

The company’s main focuses currently include managing its customer concentration, deepening its strategic position in the semiconductor supply chain, and maintaining flexibility by operating manufacturing and service sites in multiple regions worldwide. Ultra Clean also continues to invest in innovation and technology development, aiming to stay aligned with evolving customer requirements while pursuing cost efficiency through vertical integration and strategic acquisitions. Key success factors for the company include maintaining strong relationships with several major customers, executing on supply chain localization initiatives, and controlling costs as the demand environment fluctuates.

Quarter Review: Revenue, Margins, and One-Time Items

During the quarter, Ultra Clean generated GAAP revenue of $518.8 million, nearly flat sequentially. Products, which include gas and liquid delivery subsystems essential for semiconductor manufacturing, contributed $454.9 million (GAAP), while the services business, focused on specialized cleaning and analytics for chipmaking tools, brought in $63.9 million (GAAP). Services revenue (GAAP) showed a modest sequential uptick but was also largely unchanged year over year.

Non-GAAP gross margin fell to 16.3%. The products segment recorded a gross margin of 14.4% (non-GAAP), while the services segment’s gross margin was 29.9% (non-GAAP), underscoring the higher-value nature of cleaning and analytics compared to core product manufacturing. The operating margin on a non-GAAP basis dropped to 5.5%.

The quarter was heavily affected by a $151.1 million goodwill impairment (GAAP), a non-cash charge (GAAP) reflecting a downward revision in the anticipated future value of prior acquisitions. This pushed the company’s GAAP operating margin to negative 27.3%, leading to a GAAP net loss of $162.0 million, or $3.58 per share. Without adjusting for this impairment, the company’s bottom line (GAAP net loss) would have shown much smaller losses.

Segment performance showed little change in either direction. While gross margins in the segment slipped, services provided stability, aided in part by expanded engineering support in areas such as lithography and sub-fab systems. Overall, the lack of revenue growth alongside shrinking margins highlighted the ongoing challenges the company faces in lifting its earnings profile absent a broader recovery in industry demand.

Balance sheet management was a priority. Cash and cash equivalents (GAAP) increased to $327.4 million, and spent $7.8 million on research and development (R&D) (GAAP), but did not announce any major new capital initiatives.

Key Business Drivers and Ongoing Risks

Ultra Clean’s most notable business risk, customer concentration, continues to loom large. No segment revenue was broken out by customer this quarter, but prior disclosures show that two customers, Applied Materials (NASDAQ:AMAT) and Lam Research (NASDAQ:LRCX), historically contribute more than half of total sales. Revenue with its largest customer was described as flat quarter-on-quarter, with its second largest customer’s revenue was slightly down. The company remains focused on solidifying these relationships while seeking incremental diversification where possible. Customer concentration risk means that any slowdown, loss, or renegotiation with a key account can have an outsize impact on the company’s results.

Strategic initiatives to localize supply chains and adapt to changing global trade policies continued this quarter. Ultra Clean’s multi-region manufacturing approach remains a hedge against policy shifts and tariffs, though no new factories or major reductions in footprint were announced this quarter.

On the technology front, the company increased its R&D spend to $7.8 million (GAAP). Investment continues in new products for critical subsystems and cleaning technologies. The company emphasized ongoing engineering collaborations, notably in lithography portfolio expansion and services aimed at supporting advanced chipmaking, but did not attribute revenue growth to these activities so far.

Cost-cutting and efficiency improvements remain a high priority, with actions under way to realign operating expenses with current demand levels. Headcount reductions, ongoing review of manufacturing footprint, and broader expense discipline were reiterated. The benefit of these steps is expected to be realized later in the year rather than providing an immediate improvement to margins or profits in the quarter. UCTT does not currently pay a dividend.

Outlook and What to Watch

Looking ahead, management guided to revenue in the range of $480 million to $530 million for Q3 2025 and a non-GAAP EPS between $0.14 and $0.34 per share. The midpoint of this outlook suggests continued revenue stagnation with profitability under pressure. The company expects to start seeing the benefits of its cost reduction program later in the year, but did not project a near-term uptick in demand or clear margin recovery.

Management commentary remained cautious, noting that the industry remains “highly dynamic.” The ongoing dependence on a handful of major customers, sector-wide slowdowns in semiconductor capital spending, and policy-related uncertainties such as tariffs all continue to shape the landscape. Should the broader semiconductor sector rebound, management believes Ultra Clean is positioned to capture renewed growth, but for now, underlying trends remain steady and unremarkable.

Revenue and net income presented using U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) unless otherwise noted.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

JesterAI is a Foolish AI, based on a variety of Large Language Models (LLMs) and proprietary Motley Fool systems. All articles published by JesterAI are reviewed by our editorial team, and The Motley Fool takes ultimate responsibility for the content of this article. JesterAI cannot own stocks and so it has no positions in any stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has positions in and recommends Applied Materials and Lam Research. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Why Federal Signal Stock Is Skyrocketing Today

Key Points

  • Federal Signal grew sales, orders, and earnings per share by 15%, 14%, and 23%, respectively.

  • On top of this growth, its EBITDA margins hit new all-time highs.

  • As the leader in its specialized niches, Federal Signal is a promising stock now trading at a loftier valuation.

Shares of leading environmental and safety solutions provider Federal Signal (NYSE: FSS) rose 22% as of 12 p.m. ET on Wednesday, according to data provided by S&P Global Market Intelligence. The company reported second-quarter earnings where sales, orders, and adjusted earnings per share (EPS) rose by 15%, 14%, and 23%, respectively.

This growth, paired with management's raised 2025 guidance for 12% revenue growth and 20% adjusted earnings-per-share (EPS) growth, sent the company's shares to new all-time highs.

Where to invest $1,000 right now? Our analyst team just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks to buy right now. Continue »

Signaling future outperformance?

Federal Signal is a manufacturer that operates through two business segments -- its Environmental Solutions Group (ESG) and Safety and Security Group (SSG).

The ESG makes specialty equipment, such as street sweepers, road-marking vehicles, safe-digging trucks, and metal extraction support equipment, along with the aftermarket services that go with each. The SSG creates public-safety equipment, signaling products, and warning systems used in cop cars, emergency vehicles, and industrial-grade security systems.

Holding a No.1 or No. 2 market-share position across these niches, Federal Signal has been a 20-bagger since 2010. Over this time, it has become a successful serial acquirer, adding 13 complementary business lines since 2016.

A magnifying glass is held up to a circle-shaped wooden block that has a rocketship blasting off on it.

Image source: Getty Images.

In March, I wrote about Federal Signal as a candidate to outperform, thanks to these qualities -- and its Q2 results back this notion. Perhaps the most intriguing part of the earnings report was the company's earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization (EBITDA) margins reaching an all-time high of 19.5%.

Despite the company reaching this new high, management raised its annual, through-the-cycle EBITDA target from 17% to 19%. This means that in their eyes, Q2's outsized profitability wasn't an outlier but closer to what Federal Signal can average over the long haul.

Trading at 37 times earnings, Federal Signal now holds a lofty valuation but is firing on all cylinders.

Should you invest $1,000 in Federal Signal right now?

Before you buy stock in Federal Signal, consider this:

The Motley Fool Stock Advisor analyst team just identified what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy now… and Federal Signal wasn’t one of them. The 10 stocks that made the cut could produce monster returns in the coming years.

Consider when Netflix made this list on December 17, 2004... if you invested $1,000 at the time of our recommendation, you’d have $630,291!* Or when Nvidia made this list on April 15, 2005... if you invested $1,000 at the time of our recommendation, you’d have $1,075,791!*

Now, it’s worth noting Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039% — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500. Don’t miss out on the latest top 10 list, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the 10 stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

Josh Kohn-Lindquist has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Generac (GNRC) Q2 2025 Earnings Call Transcript

Image source: The Motley Fool.

DATE

  • Wednesday, July 30, 2025, at 10 a.m. ET

CALL PARTICIPANTS

  • Chairman, President, and Chief Executive Officer — Aaron P. Jagdfeld
  • Chief Financial Officer — York A. Ragen
  • Vice President of Investor Relations and Financial Planning — Kris Rosemann

Need a quote from one of our analysts? Email [email protected]

RISKS

  • Management stated, "the residential solar market in particular will contract in the years ahead," and noted a need to "recalibrate our level of investment in these technologies" due to expected reduced or eliminated incentive structures and policy changes, including the One Big Beautiful Bill Act.
  • Guidance reflects no assumption for major power outage events in the remainder of 2025, potentially limiting upside for segments that historically benefit from outage-driven demand.
  • Shipments to national and independent rental equipment customers "remained soft during the quarter," with expected continued weakness through the second half of the year.
  • Chief Financial Officer Ragen said, "Operating expenses increased by $33 million, or 12%, in Q2 2025 compared to Q2 2024, primarily due to higher variable costs and ongoing expenses from recent acquisitions."

TAKEAWAYS

  • Net Sales: $1.06 billion, up 6%, driven by 7% growth in residential product sales and a 5% increase in commercial and industrial (C&I) product sales.
  • Gross Profit Margin: Gross profit margin was 39.3%, up from 37.6% in the prior year second quarter, attributable to favorable pricing and lower input costs, partially offset by unfavorable mix.
  • Adjusted EBITDA: Adjusted EBITDA was $188 million, or 17.7% of net sales, up from $165 million, or 16.5%, in Q2 2024.
  • GAAP Net Income: GAAP net income was $74 million for the second quarter of 2025, compared to $59 million in the prior year, with diluted EPS of $1.25 versus $0.97.
  • Adjusted Net Income: Adjusted net income was $97 million ($1.65 per diluted share) for the second quarter of 2025, versus $82 million ($1.35 per share) in the prior year.
  • Free Cash Flow: Free cash flow was $14 million for the second quarter of 2025, down from $15 million in the same quarter last year, primarily due to higher working capital and capital expenditures.
  • Residential Product Sales: $574 million, up 7%, driven by energy storage systems and Ecobee, while home standby sales were flat.
  • Commercial & Industrial Product Sales: $362 million, up 5%, reflecting growth in domestic industrial distributor and telecom channels, partly offset by weaker rental and international markets.
  • International Segment: Sales rose 7% to $197 million in Q2 2025, with adjusted EBITDA of $30 million (15% margin), up from $25 million (13.6%) in the prior year.
  • Dealer Network: The number of industrial dealers increased by approximately 400 to roughly 9,300 as of Q2 2025, strengthening the company's competitive position.
  • Data Center Backlog: Backlog is above $150 million, with initial revenue recognition beginning in the second half of 2025 and the majority realized in 2026.
  • Tariff Impact: Guidance for FY2025 assumes continued 30% tariffs on China and 10% on other countries, with pricing strategies intended to offset tariff-related costs.
  • Full-Year Outlook – Net Sales: Full-year 2025 net sales growth guidance has been narrowed to 2%-5%, including an approximate 1% benefit from foreign currency and acquisitions.
  • Full-Year Outlook – Adjusted EBITDA Margin: Increased to 18%-19%, higher than the prior range of 17%-19%.
  • Full-Year Outlook – Free Cash Flow Conversion: The forecast for FY2025 has been raised to 90%-100% of adjusted net income, implying more than $400 million in free cash flow.
  • EBITDA Guidance Factors: Higher C&I sales and lower expected tariffs are supporting margin expansion for FY2025, while residential product sales projections have been reduced based on updated tariff assumptions.
  • Capital Allocation: $50 million in share repurchases were executed in Q2 2025, with $200 million remaining under the current authorization.
  • Term Loan Update: Term Loan A principal updated to $700 million, revolving facility set to $1 billion, with maturity extended through July 2030.

SUMMARY

Generac Holdings (NYSE:GNRC) reported an accelerating global backlog for large megawatt generators in Q2 2025, with management identifying data center power infrastructure as an unprecedented market opportunity. Executives highlighted strong operational execution as key to outperformance in adjusted EBITDA and margin improvement, driven by pricing and volume leverage. Strategic priorities include accelerating data center market participation through capacity expansion, managing margin resilience by offsetting tariff headwinds, and optimizing capital deployment for next-generation residential and energy management products.

  • Chief Executive Officer Jagdfeld said, "the size of the pipeline that we are cultivating in [the data center] market ... can move the needle like this. I think if we do things the right way ... C&I products are larger than the rest of the company."
  • Share count is expected to decrease for the full year due to ongoing share repurchases, providing incremental EPS support.
  • Executives emphasized recalibrating investment in the clean energy segment to restore profitability, as Ecobee delivered positive EBITDA, and overall drag from other "clean energy products" is targeted for reduction into 2026-2027.
  • Incremental tariffs on steel and copper were factored into guidance for the second half of 2025; gross margin improvement benefited from a lower-than-expected tariff impact.
  • Management expects home standby generator demand to remain stable at elevated levels, contingent on normal outage activity, acknowledging "a free option" for incremental upside if major storms occur.
  • Recent investment in the Beaver Dam, Wisconsin plant enhances C&I production capacity, supporting both ongoing and future data center opportunities.
  • Rising operating expenses are attributed to shipment volume, higher employee costs, and spending on recently acquired businesses.

INDUSTRY GLOSSARY

  • Ecobee: Generac's smart thermostat and energy management platform, contributing premium recurring revenue from connected home devices.
  • PowerCell 2: Generac's next-generation residential energy storage system, with shipments initiated in July 2025.
  • PowerMicro: Newly developed microinverter product, anticipated to launch in the second half of 2025.
  • Beaver Dam Plant: Generac's newest U.S. manufacturing facility dedicated to mid-range generator sets, enabling capacity expansion for large megawatt C&I products.
  • One Big Beautiful Bill Act: Recent U.S. policy legislation impacting federal incentives in the residential solar and storage market; mentioned as a significant driver of market contraction for the company's clean energy segment.
  • Gross Debt Leverage Ratio: Ratio of total outstanding debt to trailing adjusted EBITDA, reported at 1.7x for the quarter.
  • USMCA: United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement, referenced for its continued impact on tariff qualification per management's guidance assumptions.

Full Conference Call Transcript

Aaron Jagdfeld: Thanks, Kris. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us today. Our second quarter results exceeded our expectations, driven primarily by C&I product sales to our industrial distributors as well as increased shipments of residential energy storage systems. Additionally, adjusted EBITDA margins came in well ahead of our prior forecast for the quarter, as a result of continued strong gross margin performance and better than expected operating leverage on the higher shipment volumes. On a year-over-year basis, overall net sales increased 6% to $1.06 billion for the quarter. Residential product sales increased 7% from the prior year, driven by significant growth in shipments of residential energy technology solutions as well as higher portable generator sales.

C&I product sales increased 5% year-over-year with increases in shipments to our domestic industrial distributor and telecom channels. Favorable price realization helped gross margins expand by 170 basis points in the quarter, resulting in adjusted EBITDA margins increasing to nearly 18%. We also continue to execute on numerous new product development initiatives during the quarter, most notably the formal introduction of our large megawatt generators. We have experienced very strong receptivity to our initial entry into the data center market, with our global backlog for products serving this important end market growing quickly, now standing at more than $150 million today.

Given increased visibility into our full year 2025 financial results, including our second quarter outperformance and lower than previously anticipated tariff-related price increases in the second half, we are narrowing our full year net sales growth assumption and increasing the low end of our adjusted EBITDA margin guidance range, resulting in an increase to our full year adjusted EBITDA outlook at the midpoint of these ranges. This guidance assumes that currently implemented tariff levels are maintained for the remainder of the year. We will continue to optimize our pricing strategy within the evolving tariff landscape while aiming to fully offset the cost of tariffs in dollar terms.

Additionally, we are executing on a number of supply chain and cost reduction initiatives that will help to further offset the impact of tariffs and other cost increases over the next several quarters.

Discussing our second quarter results in more detail, home standby sales were flat from the prior year as the category held a new and higher baseline level of demand despite power outage hours being down significantly as compared to a strong prior year period. As expected, with lower outages, home consultations decreased on a year-over-year basis given the strong comparable period included the benefit of severe storms in the South Central Region last year. However, home consultations outside of this region were up nicely from the prior year, highlighted by continued strength in the Southeast resulting from last year's high-profile outage events.

Close rates improved sequentially in the second quarter, and we continue to expect further improvement as we move through the remainder of the year, with strong signs of recovery here in the month of July. Importantly, activations or installations of home standby generators increased modestly from the prior year, also driven by the strength in the Southeast region. We ended the second quarter with roughly 9,300 industrial dealers in our network, an increase of approximately 400 over the prior year. Our growing dealer network is an important competitive advantage and continues to support a new and higher baseline of consumer awareness for the home standby category. We remain committed to investing heavily in growing and developing our dealer base.

Additionally, we have had continued success in expanding our aligned contractor program, which targets electrical contractors that purchase our products through wholesale distribution and drives incremental engagement and training within this important distribution channel. Collectively, these efforts represent a critical element of unlocking the growth potential for the home standby category by expanding our sales, installation, and service bandwidth. Additionally, we continue to work towards the upcoming launch of our next-generation home standby generator line, representing the most comprehensive platform update for the product category in more than a decade.

In addition to the introduction of the market's first 28-kilowatt air-cooled generator, the new home standby generator line lowers installation and maintenance costs, as well as quieter operation and improved fuel efficiency. The new platform also offers a number of benefits for our channel partners, including lower commissioning times and improved remote diagnostics, enabling operational efficiencies for their businesses and greater uptime and cost savings for their customers.

Portable generator sales increased at a robust rate from the prior year despite the year-over-year decline in outage activity. This growth was primarily due to market share gains. While we expect these recent wins to support greater baseline demand for these products going forward, as our guidance does not assume any major outage events in 2025. Moving to residential energy technology solutions, our team continued to execute extremely well on our Department of Energy project in Puerto Rico for our energy storage solutions, and combined with a record quarter for Ecobee sales, resulted in strong outperformance for this part of our business in the second quarter.

Our Ecobee team continued to add to their recent strong sales momentum and drove significant margin improvement compared to the prior year, resulting in positive EBITDA contribution through 2025. Additionally, the connected homes count for Ecobee devices increased to more than 4.5 million residences during the quarter, with energy services and subscription attach rates also continuing to grow, contributing to a rapidly expanding high-margin recurring revenue stream. We view Ecobee's premium feature set and user experience as a key differentiator within our growing residential energy ecosystem, and further integration of our residential solutions with the Ecobee platform will continue with every new product we launch.

Importantly, we continue to expect Ecobee to deliver positive EBITDA contribution for the full year as the team further scales these products and solutions. Shipments of our energy storage systems also increased at a dramatic rate during the second quarter. We are very pleased with the progress we have made in Puerto Rico through 2025, as this has enabled us to build strong relationships on the island, which is the second largest storage market in the US behind California. In addition to our success in Puerto Rico, we began taking orders in the second quarter for PowerCell 2, our next-generation energy storage system, with first shipments of these products beginning earlier this month.

We are also making very good progress toward the launch of PowerMicro, our new microinverter product line, which we anticipate will begin shipping during the second half of this year. The impact of the One Big Beautiful Bill Act on residential solar and storage markets has been well documented over the last several weeks. Despite the policy-related changes that will reduce or eliminate incentive structures for these products, we continue to view these technologies as important elements in the residential energy ecosystem we are developing that is focused on providing the kind of resiliency and energy savings that homeowners are increasingly demanding.

The secular trends of rising power prices and declining component costs within the solar and storage markets provide an attractive long-term backdrop for these markets to further develop and grow as the overall economics improve, absent the incentives.

That said, we believe the residential solar market in particular will contract in the years ahead. And as a result, we are evaluating the adjustments necessary to recalibrate our level of investment in these technologies as we are laser-focused on significantly improving the adjusted EBITDA contribution of the residential energy technology portion of our business in the coming years. Now let me provide some commentary on our commercial and industrial product category. Sales to our domestic industrial distributors increased again during the quarter given resilient end-market demand and strong operational execution that drove further reduction in C&I product lead times.

We project quoting activity and win rates in this important channel also increased on a year-over-year basis during the first half of the year. We do expect, however, year-over-year shipment declines to develop in the second half of the year given continued reduction in backlog resulting from our accelerated production output in recent quarters. Shipments to our national telecom customers grew at a strong rate from the prior year during the second quarter, as this channel continues to recover and is expected to deliver robust growth for the full year 2025.

The telecom market remains a long-term growth opportunity for Generac Holdings Inc. given the secular and network hub counts and increasing reliance on wireless communications that require much higher power reliability. Replacement opportunities within the telecom channel are also becoming more relevant given our large installed base of product and our long history of serving this market. As expected, shipments to our national and independent rental equipment customers remained soft during the quarter. And we continue to anticipate weakness throughout the second half of the year. Despite the current cyclical softness with our rental customers, we believe that this end market has substantial runway for growth.

Given the critical need for future infrastructure-related projects that leverage our products sold into the rental equipment channel. Internationally, total sales increased 7% from the prior year due to higher intersegment sales and C&I product shipments in Europe, partially offset by softness in other international markets. Adjusted EBITDA in our International segment increased at a robust rate from the prior year, given the solid sales growth and favorable price-cost dynamics in certain markets. We expect the combination of recent order trends across multiple C&I product categories and the favorable impact. We also anticipate an incremental benefit beginning in the third quarter from the initial shipments of our new large megawatt generators to international data center customers.

With respect to the important development project around our new large megawatt generators, these products are expected to enable a very significant incremental opportunity for the global C&I part of our business. Particularly within the large and growing data center market. These mission-critical solutions are a necessary part of the substantial investment in data centers, which are enabling the accelerated adoption of artificial intelligence. Given the tremendous power requirements of increasingly large data center campuses, demand for backup power for these applications is expected to continue to grow at a dramatic rate for the foreseeable future. This rapidly growing demand for data center power infrastructure has resulted in market supply constraints for backup power equipment.

Highly competitive lead times and the strength of our reputation in the power generation industry contributed to the strong initial response to our formal entrance into this market during the second quarter. And we have quickly built a global backlog of more than $150 million for these applications. With momentum continuing to build around a growing and significant pipeline of new opportunities. We expect global shipments of these products to begin in the second half of the year, with the large majority of our existing backlog to be realized in 2026.

Additionally, further global market opportunities exist for these products within our traditional end markets, in particular providing backup power for large manufacturers, distribution centers, healthcare facilities, and other critical infrastructure that have higher backup power requirements. As we continue to ramp our capabilities for large megawatt generators, with our expected annual production capacity sitting well above our current backlog, we believe that we are well-positioned to take share in this market over time given our unique focus, which allows us to provide customized sales, engineering, and aftermarket support while also providing data center customers with a robust service network to ensure uptime for these critical applications.

In closing this morning, our second quarter results reflect strong execution in a dynamic operating environment. With broad-based strength across our product categories. We will continue to lean into our core corporate value of agility as we navigate the evolving market and policy conditions while maintaining focus on the significant growth opportunities that exist as we further execute on our enterprise strategy. The megatrends of lower power quality and higher power prices are being further supported by numerous underlying trends, providing incremental avenues for future growth in our business. And we firmly believe our portfolio of products and solutions is uniquely positioned to deliver value and protection to homes, businesses, and institutions around the world.

I'll now turn the call over to York to provide further details on our second quarter results and our updated outlook for 2025. York?

York Ragen: Thanks, Aaron. At second quarter 2025 results in more detail, net sales during the quarter increased 6% to $1.06 billion as compared to $998 million in the prior year second quarter. The combined effect of acquisitions and foreign currency had a slight favorable impact on revenue growth during the quarter. Briefly looking at consolidated net sales for the second quarter by product class, residential product sales increased 7% to $574 million as compared to $538 million in the prior year. This growth in residential product sales was driven by a strong increase in shipments of energy storage systems and Ecobee home energy management solutions.

Portable generator shipments also contributed to this sales growth, while home standby generator sales were flat with the prior year. Commercial and industrial product sales for the second quarter increased 5% to $362 million as compared to $344 million in the prior year. Core sales growth of approximately 4% was driven by strength in shipments to our domestic industrial distributor and telecom customers, as well as strong growth within Europe, partially offset by weakness in shipments to national rental accounts and other international markets. Net sales for the Other Products and Services category increased approximately 8% to $125 million as compared to $116 million in 2024.

Core sales increased approximately 6% due to Ecobee and remote monitoring subscription sales, and other installation and maintenance services revenue. Gross profit margin was 39.3%, compared to 37.6% in the prior year second quarter, primarily due to favorable pricing and lower input costs, partially offset by unfavorable sales mix. The favorable price-cost dynamics were partly due to the timing differences between the realization of recent price increases and the higher tariff-related input costs. In addition, gross margins exceeded expectations for the quarter, partially due to a lower tariff impact relative to our previous guidance. Operating expenses increased $33 million or 12% as compared to 2024.

This growth in operating expenses was primarily driven by higher variable costs due to higher shipment volumes, increased employee costs to support future growth across the business, and ongoing operating expenses related to recent acquisitions. Adjusted EBITDA before deducting for non-controlling interest as defined in our earnings release, exceeded expectations at $188 million or 17.7% of net sales in the second quarter as compared to $165 million or 16.5% of net sales in the prior year. I will now briefly discuss financial results for our two reporting segments.

Domestic segment total sales, including intersegment sales, increased 7% to $884 million in the quarter compared to $827 million in the prior year, which included approximately 1% sales growth contribution from recent acquisitions. Adjusted EBITDA for the segment was $158 million representing 17.9% of total sales, as compared to $140 million in the prior year or 16.9%. International segment total sales, including intersegment sales, increased approximately 7% to $197 million in the quarter as compared to $185 million in the prior year quarter, including an approximate 1% benefit from foreign currency. Adjusted EBITDA for the segment before deducting for non-controlling interests was $30 million or 15% of total sales, as compared to $25 million or 13.6% in the prior year.

Now switching back to our financial performance for the second quarter of 2025 on a consolidated basis. As disclosed in our earnings release, GAAP net income for the company in the quarter was $74 million as compared to $59 million for 2024.

Our interest expense declined from $23.3 million in 2024 to $18.2 million in the current year quarter, as a result of lower borrowings and lower interest rates relative to the prior year. GAAP income taxes during the current year second quarter were $15.4 million or an effective tax rate of 17.2%, as compared to $19.6 million or an effective tax rate of 25% for the prior year. The decrease in effective tax rate was primarily driven by a favorable discrete tax item related to an immaterial business disposition in the current year quarter. Diluted net income per share for the company on a GAAP basis was $1.25 in 2025, compared to $0.97 in the prior year.

Adjusted net income for the company, as defined in our earnings release, was $97 million in the current year quarter or $1.65 per share. This compares to adjusted net income of $82 million in the prior year or $1.35 per share. Cash flow from operations was $72 million as compared to $78 million in the prior year second quarter, and free cash flow, as defined in our earnings release, was $14 million as compared to $15 million in the same quarter last year. The change in free cash flow was primarily driven by higher working capital and capital expenditures causing a greater use of cash during the current year quarter, partially offset by higher operating earnings.

We expect working capital to be a use of cash again in the third quarter as we continue to replenish portable generator inventories for storm season, and prepare for our next-generation home standby product launch later this year. Additionally, we opportunistically repurchased approximately 393,000 shares of our common stock during the quarter for $50 million. There is approximately $200 million remaining on our current share repurchase authorization as of the end of the second quarter. On July 1, we amended and extended our existing Term Loan A and revolving credit facility, resulting in a new maturity date of 07/01/2030. This agreement updated the Term Loan A outstanding principal balance to $700 million and reduced the revolving facility borrowing capacity to $1 billion. In addition, the amendment eliminated a 10 basis point credit spread adjustment that was included in the previous agreement and also resulted in a more favorable pricing grid based on our leverage ratio. Quarterly principal payments on the Term Loan A will begin in October 2026, with a lump sum due at maturity in July 2030. Total debt outstanding at the end of the quarter was $1.4 billion, resulting in a gross debt leverage ratio of 1.7 times on an as-reported basis. With that, I will now provide further comments on our updated outlook for 2025. As disclosed in our press release this morning, we are updating our full year 2025 outlook given our first half actual results driving increased visibility to expected full year 2025 net sales. As a result of our second quarter outperformance, being mostly offset by lower pricing assumptions in the second half of the year, primarily due to lower than expected tariffs. We are narrowing our net sales growth guidance range while holding the midpoint of that range. In addition, we are increasing the low end of our adjusted EBITDA margin guidance range and raising our free cash flow conversion guidance for the full year 2025. This guidance includes the following important assumptions: We are assuming that current tariff levels that are in effect today stay in place for the remainder of the year. This includes 30% tariff levels for China, compared to 10% previously assumed. We continue to assume 10% reciprocal tariffs on all other countries, and the continued qualification of USMCA for Mexico and Canada, consistent with our prior guidance. Incremental tariffs have also been levied against steel and copper imports since our previous guidance update, and we have assumed higher market prices for these metals in the second half of the year as a result.

Finally, consistent with our historical approach, this outlook assumes a level of power outage activity for the remainder of the year in line with the longer-term baseline average and does not assume the benefit of a major power outage event in the second half of the year, such as a major landed hurricane or major winter storm. Considering all these factors, we now expect consolidated net sales for the full year to increase between 2% to 5% over the prior year, which includes an approximate 1% favorable impact from the combination of foreign currency and acquisitions. This compares to our previous guidance of 0% to 7% net sales growth over the prior year.

We now project full year 2025 residential product sales to be slightly lower compared to our previous expectation, given lower assumed tariff-related pricing in the home standby category. We also now project full year 2025 C&I product sales to be modestly higher compared to our previous expectation given second quarter outperformance and favorable foreign currency rates relative to our prior forecast. As a result, we now expect Residential Products and C&I Products net sales growth to be more level-loaded for the full year 2025 relative to our prior expectations.

From a seasonal pacing perspective, we expect third quarter overall net sales to be slightly ahead of the prior year, with fourth quarter overall net sales approximately flat versus the prior year. Recall that the prior year periods included the benefit of multiple major outage events, which results in a strong prior year comparison in particular for residential products. Looking at our updated gross margin expectations for the full year 2025, we now expect gross margin percent to increase approximately 50 to 100 basis points compared to the full year 2024, coming in at approximately 39.5% at the midpoint.

This represents an increase from our prior expectation of approximately 39% due to our second quarter outperformance and lower tariff assumptions relative to the prior guidance. Turning to our adjusted EBITDA margin expectations for the full year 2025, given the factors I outlined in our net sales and gross margin update, we are increasing the lower end of our guidance range for adjusted EBITDA percent to approximately 18% to 19% compared to our previous guidance range of 17% to 19%. In line with normal seasonality, we expect third quarter adjusted EBITDA margins to improve 150 to 200 basis points sequentially from the second quarter given the projected significant operating leverage on seasonally higher sales volumes.

Additionally, we are raising our free cash flow conversion forecast given the impact of the One Big Beautiful Bill Act on our federal income tax payments. Given the favorable tax impact of immediate expensing of research and development costs, and bonus depreciation on certain capital expenditures, we now expect free cash flow conversion from adjusted net income to be approximately 90% to 100% for the full year 2025 as compared to our previous guidance range of 70% to 90%. Importantly, this would result in over $400 million of free cash flow in fiscal 2025, which provides for further near-term optionality within our disciplined and balanced capital allocation framework.

As is our normal practice, we are also providing additional guidance details to assist with modeling adjusted earnings per share and free cash flow for the full year 2025. For full year 2025, our GAAP effective tax rate is now expected to be between 23% to 23.5%, a modest decrease from our prior guidance of 24.5% to 25%, due to the second quarter outperformance. Our GAAP effective tax rate for the remaining two quarters of the year is expected to be approximately 25%. Importantly, to arrive at appropriate estimates for adjusted net income and adjusted earnings per share, add-back items should be reflected net of tax using our expected effective tax rate of approximately 25%.

We continue to expect interest expense to be approximately $74 million to $78 million for the full year 2025, assuming no additional term loan principal prepayments during the year. This contemplates a lower interest rate due to our recent Amend and Extend transaction, mostly offset by modestly higher outstanding borrowings. This guidance is a significant decline from 2024 interest expense levels due to a decrease in outstanding borrowings and the full year impact of lower sulfur interest rates. Our capital expenditures are still projected to be approximately 3% of our forecasted net sales for the full year, in line with historical levels.

Depreciation expense, GAAP intangible amortization expense, and stock compensation expense are also expected to remain consistent with last quarter's guidance. Our full year weighted average diluted share count is expected to be approximately 59.4 million to 59.5 million shares as compared to 60.3 million shares in 2024. Finally, this 2025 outlook does not reflect potential additional acquisitions or share repurchases that could drive incremental shareholder value during the year. This concludes our prepared remarks. At this time, we would like to open up the call for questions.

Operator: Certainly. Star one on your telephone and wait for your name to be announced. In the interest of time, please limit yourself to one question. And our first question will be coming from Tommy Moll of Stephens. Your line is open.

Tommy Moll: Good morning, and thank you for taking my question.

Aaron Jagdfeld: Hey, Tommy. Good morning.

Tommy Moll: Aaron, on the recent entry into the data center market, sounds like things have gone pretty well so far, but I just wanted to ask for anything else you can give us there. When could these revenues start to be meaningful? Are the lead times for some of the incumbents there still as extended as they have been in recent years? What have you learned so far?

Aaron Jagdfeld: Yeah. Thanks, Tommy. So yeah. I mean, this has been something we have been talking about for the last few quarters. You know, the entry into this market and something, frankly, we have been working on for a couple of years. We have not been talking about it much because we wanted to get to the finish line. But it will begin to impact revenues this year in the second half. Our initial shipments in the international market will start in Q3. And then, you know, very late this year, we will start to get our first domestic shipments out to those customers. But much of an impact this year. It is really a 2026 story right now.

What we are being told, and this is just, you know, kind of to size the opportunity for us anyway. Because I think this is by far and away one of the biggest needle-moving opportunities that I have seen in my time here in my three decades with the company, just both in the size of the market opportunity that data centers in particular present, but also, obviously, the growth rate there.

And the fact that you know, this feels like something that is going to go on for a long time, combine that with the structural deficit in the availability of these backup power products, in our early conversations here over the last several months, nearly every data center developer, operator, owner, end customer has told us that there are two major components that they worry about the lead time for construction of new data centers. The first is transformers. And the second is backup generators.

So what we have learned, to answer your question, is that we believe, based on our conversations, there appears to be about a structural deficit just in 2026 of something on the order of maybe 5,000 machines. Based on current capacity in the market and based on current construction completion timelines for the projects that are underway for data centers. So obviously, 5,000 machines is a lot of machines. You know, if you look at kind of on the high side, every single copy of every machine would be about a million dollars all in. So it is a huge market just being served on an annual basis today, much greater in size than anything that we have ever approached.

And two, the structural deficit that is there, I think, will allow for a pretty rapid entry for us into the market. I am shocked at the, you know, over $150 million that we have already booked in hard orders. And the size of the pipeline that we are cultivating in this market. Been very well received with the, you know, not only just the product, but you know, I think our brand, our reputation, the quality of our distribution, the quality of our balance sheet, frankly, the ability to stand behind these products in these very critical applications I think we have been very well received initially here. We have got to deliver, we have got to execute.

So, you know, it is not we are not this is not a layup by any stretch of the imagination, but we are taking this very seriously. We do have good capacity, you know, to grow in the next year or so. But given the kind of situation that this market is facing from a structural deficit standpoint in terms of supply versus demand, we believe that, you know, based on our early learnings here and then our early success, we are going to have to make some potentially bold moves around additional capacity if we want that to be available for 2027 and beyond.

We think we are in really good shape for '26 and really probably even for parts of '27. But given the size of the deficit, that 5,000 machines just for next year, we think there is real opportunity for us if we lean into this and be aggressive. Again, like I said, I have never seen something that can move the needle like this. I think if we do things the right way, I think this part of our business, which has always been a good solid business. Right? It is over a $1.5 billion opportunity today. That is the size of the C&I products part of our business.

You know, that is something that I think can grow dramatically in the next several years. And this we could be in a situation in several years where the C&I products are larger than the rest of the company. So I think it is, you know, this is just an exciting time and something that we are, you know, we are going to lean into. And it is a global opportunity. And it is a global opportunity. I think that is the other exciting piece of that. Yeah. I am going to add.

Operator: Okay. One moment for our next question. Which will be coming from George Gianarikas of Canaccord Genuity. Your line is open, George.

George Gianarikas: Everyone, good morning, and thank you for taking my questions. I would like to concentrate on some of the comments you made around Ecobee and the solar market opportunity. There is at least to me, appears to be a little bit of a change in tone here around your willingness to continue to invest in the inverter market over the long term, over the medium term. I was just wondering if you can sort of paint a broad brush and help us understand a little bit around how you might be changing your philosophy around those markets. And maybe just update us on what the dilution was from the Cleantech business during the first half of the year. Thank you.

Aaron Jagdfeld: Yeah. Thanks, George. So, yeah, I do not know if it represents a change in tone. I perhaps. I you know, it is maybe that is the right way to characterize it. Let me say what has not changed. And I think the comments we wrote, the specific commentary was we are laser-focused on reducing the drag on earnings from this business, i.e., we want to get it to be in positive territory. We will get it to be in positive territory. Now we have to obviously recalibrate if the overall market size for solar in particular, if that is going to decrease. In the years ahead, and it is likely that it will, the question is how much? Right?

I think there are still some things that need to be vetted and understood as the One Big Beautiful Bill kind of now moves from, you know, it being passed as legislation into kind of interpretation by Treasury and what happens there. In terms of the actual impacts to the market. But clearly, the market is going to contract for solar. Just, is it going to contract 20%, or is it going to contract 50%? So but take a range. Maybe it is 20% to 50%. We believe that market, if you just step back, has been heavily impacted obviously by the incentive structures over the years. It has been distorted. The word we keep using internally here.

It is a market that has been frankly, this is one of the major problems you run into in terms of distortions that can happen in markets when you have subsidization for as long as you have had with this market. And the changing kind of timelines around those subsidizations, the changing quantums of those subsidizations, we actually believe the elimination of subsidies for solar is a good thing for the market. In the long run, it will help this market grow structurally grow in a way that normal markets grow. Right now, it does not look anything like a normal market. In fact, you can look at how a typical solar system is transacted.

That transaction almost looks like nothing else on the planet. In terms of how it is structured, the financial engineering, the craziness around it. And I think a lot of that has had a negative effect actually on the underlying structural integrity of the market in terms of, you know, it has had kind of a distorted effect on the overall ASP for a project. I think the ASPs for projects are higher. There is a reason they are considerably higher here in the US than they are in Europe.

And I think a lot of that has to do with the, you know, just the amount of subsidization, the amount of incentives that go into that and the structures that come out of those transactions with tax equity structures, and other elements. I think if we get rid of all of that, over time, what will be laid there is a market that can work. You can see what is going on in Europe. It works. Power prices are going up. You can look at your own power bill. Look at your neighbor's power bill. Look at power bills across the country. This is without a doubt a story that is underreported.

We can talk about power outages all we want, but at the end of the day, the cost of power is going up and there are lots of reasons. People can pick their reason and it differs by utility. It differs by region. It differs by type of customer, but at the end of the day, your power costs, my power costs have gone up over 30%. In the last five years, and are expected to double in the next ten or greater. You are already seeing this play out in parts of the country.

As power costs increase, and as the cost of these technologies, i.e., solar, storage, energy management, all of these technologies continue to come down rapidly in cost. They have done that over the last couple of decades, and they will continue to do so. You can get to economic outcomes there that are very beneficial. To homeowners and businesses by installing solar even without the incentive structures. And that, I think, is where this ultimately lands. Now there is going to be a couple more years of noise here. As the incentives taper off. Going to have some pull forward of demand with safe harboring maybe in the second half of this year.

And all of that has to wash through the system. But for us, we think that solar and storage are still important technologies in a residential energy ecosystem and parts of that. Now they are not the only parts. Okay? We believe EV charging is going to be an important going to play an important role. We believe that energy management with the Ecobee products are going to play an important role. We believe generators are going to play an important role. In the energy ecosystem. All of this linked together is how we are going to keep homeowners and businesses resilient and we are going to help them save money on their power bills.

We are going to give them a lot more independence going forward. It is going to take time to build that out. But we are not going to continue to lose money on this business in perpetuity. We have said that. The drag on this, I think, York, for the first half of the year, was about first half, three to four hundred points. But overall for the year, let us call it 300 to 350. That is our expectation. For the full year. For the full year. But continuing to improve. We have seen that improvement already in Ecobee, and we are going to continue to see that in the rest of the business.

Now we will adjust our spending. Right? If the market is smaller, we are going to have to adjust the level of our investment, recalibrate our investment. We have got a lot of new product coming to market this year. Won't have a lot of that new product cost, if you will, the development cost will start to taper, and we will go more into a sustaining mode on those new products. Going into 2026. So I think we are in a good place to make the recalibration that we need to make there.

But we are still committed to this being part of, you know, an energy ecosystem, we think, an important element for us to plant the flag in going forward, here at the company.

Operator: And one moment for our next question. Our next question will be coming from Mike Halloran of Baird. Your line is open, Mike.

Mike Halloran: Hey, good morning, everyone.

Aaron Jagdfeld: Good morning. Thank you, Mike.

Mike Halloran: Hey, Aaron. Can you just continue that train of thought then? What is the next call at twelve to eighteen months look like as far as the iterations go for how you get that back to kind of a neutral profitability level, the clean energy piece? What are the types of things you are thinking internally? Know, what is that timeline look like? Is this the clean energy piece specifically, or does that include Ecobee, which, correct me if I am wrong, but that is already at a profitable level. So is that the net of the two, or is that exclusive of Ecobee?

Aaron Jagdfeld: So yeah. No. So correct, Mike. You know, Ecobee is profitable year to date, and we expect to be fully profitable for the year. It is done. That team has done an outstanding job. And the growth rate there has been fantastic. It is a huge part, obviously, of our whole energy technology business when you look at it together. The big, you know, kind of drag remains in what we refer to as our clean energy products. Which are the storage products, the solar products where we have had very heavy development cycles ongoing to bring these new products to market.

As I said, kind of on the previous commentary, you know, those new product cycles of new product introduction costs in those cycles should start to taper as we get these new products in the market. So PowerCell 2, which is our new storage device, just started shipping here. Earlier in July. And our PowerMicro, our new microinverter product line, is going to hit the market later this year. So, you know, the development cycles, you know, are starting we are getting in the final innings of the development cycles, and that is where a lot of the spend has been.

Now transitioning that spend over to support right, and sustaining efforts, you know, is was kind of the next phase anyway. And so that was already kind of in the plan. And obviously, though, if the market is smaller, won't need as much support. You won't need as much, you know, in terms of sustaining in theory. And so I think there is an opportunity there to look at recalibrating, you know, that depending again on where we think the market is going to be. The answer to your question directly over the next twelve to eighteen months is difficult because we do not know where the market is going to be over the next twelve to eighteen months.

That is a piece that we are still, you know, kind of we are vetting out. We want to get a very clear understanding where it is going to go. We know it is going to contract from current levels. And by the way, current levels are depressed. I would just point out current levels are also depressed though because of two factors. One, you had the change in the net metering rules in California. From net metering 2.0 to 3.0. Which had an impact a negative impact on the market. Now that is largely started to wash through. But the second kind of effect that has been depressing the market is high interest rates.

And I think it is you could make a case that it is more likely than not that interest rates are going to go down as opposed to up in the future, which should provide a backdrop for a bit stronger market dynamics. Know, all things equal. In the clean energy types of products. So know, I do think the market is going to contract. There is no doubt. We are going to recalibrate spending. We are still targeting. We had said at our Investor Day, a couple years ago that by 2027, this was a profitable area for us. That is still our focus for the company.

We think that we have got to find a path to do that. Ecobee certainly has done their part. They are well on the way. In fact, I would say they are ahead of plan in terms of where we are coming out there, which is great. Now we have got to turn our attention to the rest of that part of the business. And, again, like I said, we are super excited about the new products we have got coming to market. And the receptivity we have had with our early discussions with the solar channel in particular. And, you know, we have got to see where the market kind of shakes out here, the overall market.

In terms of a forecast for 2026 in particular, but also know, as we think about the next three years.

Operator: Our next question will be coming from Jeff Hammond of KeyBanc Capital Markets. Jeff, your line is open.

David Tarantino: Hey, good morning, everyone. This is David Tarantino on for Jeff.

Aaron Jagdfeld: Hey, David.

David Tarantino: Hey, Dave. Maybe on home standby, could you give us more color on the underlying trends here and how we should expect the category to progress through the rest of the year? Particularly around what the dealers are telling you around the demand afterglow from outage events last year and how inventories look in the channel?

Aaron Jagdfeld: Yeah. Thanks, David. So, you know, home standby, it is pretty what is really amazing about home standby is you know, outages have been kind of light here in the first half of the year. We had a great second half of the year, obviously, in terms of outages. Very active. Not great, of course, if you experience those and some of the reasons why you experience them. But there to help our customers with our products. And, you know, we had a very active second half of last year. That as we would normally expect, right, we have always said six to twelve months of afterglow, if you will, from those big events.

And that is really kind of played out here. In the first half of the year, installations of products are up. To date, which is great. They were up in the second quarter. So they you know, we are kind of holding on to that new and higher baseline. We continue to add dealers, which I think is always one of those things that we watch very closely. Is the pace at which we can continue to add dealers has remained, you know, has remained robust. IHCs were down in the quarter, but you would expect that with lower outages. Seasonally, the second half of the year is really important. Right?

So no doubt we are watching with great attention what happens in the second half of the year. You know, we do not have just remember we do not put any major events in our guide. Which you know? So we are guiding our that business, that part of our business. We are guiding to a baseline level of outages which is generally significantly lower particularly in the back half if you do get major outages. So, you know, I would tell you that it is almost like there is a free option there on home standby if we do get some kind of event in the second half.

And we have always said those events are, you know, $50 and a $100 million impact. We saw that play out pretty much on point last year. And we would we would say that would probably be the situation again this year. I might I might say the only difference might be we have done a really nice job in portable generators. We have got a new team there that is leading that business. That part of our business, those products. And they have done a great job getting some really major wins at some incredible retailers and expanding our shelf space. So we are feeling really good about where we sit for our market share standpoint in portable gens.

So if we were to get some major outages, we might actually have a nicer tailwind there. We are going to be set from an inventory standpoint. A little bit of, you know, the cash flow in the quarter. You know, in terms of our working capital needs in Q2 were driven by kind of replanning portables, a heavy storm season from last year, but also getting ready for this year's storm season and the fact that we have got increased placement with our in the retail channel with those products. So what the market is telling us around home standby, though, is you know, it is and it is always been kind of a regional story.

So the Southeast remains pretty robust, right, coming out of last year. The activity there is great. Are other parts of the country where it is weaker because we have not had the outage activity. But, you know, I think if you were to stand back and you look at it on a whole and you look at kind of the home standby business or the products there as a segment, as a group, it has been incredible how it continues to grow. And after every one of those major events like we had last fall, it holds on to that higher baseline level. It grows from there.

Now it might be slower growth for a little bit of time here until we see another inflection point with more outages. But it is an incredible part of our business in terms of the ability to grow that business on the back of outage high-profile outage events and then to hold on to that growth. And move from there. So really pleased with kind of how that business has continued to pace.

Operator: And one moment for our next question. Our next question will be coming from Brian Drab of William Blair. Your line is open.

Brian Drab: Can you just talk about pricing and the so we have the 7% to 8% increase, I guess, in March, and you said that it had some positive impact on gross margin. But how is that received overall in the market, any effect on demand? And how are you adjusting your plan for pricing on the new product line given how tariffs have evolved?

Aaron Jagdfeld: Yeah. Thanks for the question, Brian. So pricing, you know, dynamic environment we are in. We are all kind of glued to the twenty-four-hour news cycle here on where these trade agreements are coming out, it sounds like the administration is making progress here. You know, it is slow going. Obviously, these are major deals. And it takes time to get these deals put together. But I think in the end, you know, we would put price into the market, in response to what we understood the tariff environment to be. Those were effective. I think it the April. That was roughly the seven to 8%, Brian, that you referenced there.

That is and I am talking specifically now about the home standby impact there. Did not see much material impact on demand. We did just to remind you, you know, we had updated our updated guidance at the time, did contemplate some demand destruction on higher price. For the remainder of the year. So, you know, there is some demand destruction that we built in, and, you know, I think we have largely based on our results, I think it is kind of played out the way that we saw it playing out. The second part of your question kind of where are we going from here? So we have a new product line coming out.

Second half of the year. It is our next-generation home standby product line, which is phenomenal, actually. The product itself is just so far advanced from even the existing platform and so far ahead of where the market is at today. We are super excited about that. There is a bit more cost to that product with some of the feature sets that we have added, which is good, but that will require some additional pricing adjustments. And, of course, we have got some new, you know, we have got additional knowledge on the tariff, the trade deals that have been inked so far and where we are sitting.

So there is probably as we release product into the market, we just announced the availability of our new 14-kilowatt and 18-kilowatt units. That is the first part of the new product line to be released. Those just went on order here this week. As a matter of fact, early this week, the order book opened on those, and we will begin shipping those next week.

And those contain a price increase somewhere in the depending on the SKU and the mix, five to 7%, call it, additional price that will go in kind of, you know, again, mostly because of the additional feature sets that we are including with the products, but there is a little bit of kind of rebalancing with some of the tariff information that is now known that was not known back when we did the last round of pricing in April. We still have a good chunk of the product line to be released. Here in the second half of the year, our larger nodes. Everything from the 20-kilowatt nodes all the way to the 28-kilowatt nodes that product offering.

And so we have not released pricing on those nodes yet, continue to watch the tariff environment. We may have to go back and touch pricing again. On the fourteenth and eighteenth if something changes, but probably not material at this point. It is probably small. So we feel pretty good about where we are sitting with respect to pricing. And, again, the demand destruction, if you want to call it that, that have occurred. We think that played out largely in line with our guide.

Operator: Okay. One moment for our next question. Our next question comes from Mark Strouse of JPMorgan. Mark, your line is open.

Mark Strouse: Thank you. Good morning. A couple questions. Going back to the data center opportunity, can you just kind of talk about the backlog that you have so far in the initial conversations that you are having, are those with kind of larger hyperscaler type data centers? Are they more traditional data centers? Any color there you can provide?

And then going back, Aaron, to your comments about potentially expanding capacity, can you just talk about kind of looking at your footprint, looking at your supply chain, you know, other factors that go into that, how I do not want to use the word easily, but, you know, how quickly can that be done in you talk about the CapEx requirements if you are going double capacity, triple capacity, whatever it ends up being, how we should be thinking about that? Thank you.

Aaron Jagdfeld: Yeah. Thanks, Mark. So just on the pipeline, our opportunities include both the I would call it traditional data center owner-operators as well as hyperscalers. But we are getting traction is with the hyperscalers because they are their power needs are greater. And frankly, that is where the biggest part of the deficit in the market seems to exist is around those. But it is a market-wide deficit in terms of supply versus demand. So we are seeing those opportunities manifest.

I would say some of our more interesting conversations are with we are talking about '27 and beyond at this stage because they are planning out obviously, they are trying to lock up supply, further out and they are, you know, I mean, they are out '27, '28, some cases 2029. The conversations are out. So then the second part of your question on footprint. So we have nine facilities around the world that are capable of producing commercial and industrial products. And so we have three here in the US, we have one in Mexico, one in Brazil, one in India, one in China. We have a facility in Italy and a facility in Spain.

I think that is nine if I did my math right. And so those facilities are capable of producing C&I products. Not all of them are capable of producing the large megawatt products. But what I would say is by expanding capacity in the mid-range of our products, we are able to create additional capacity opportunities for large megawatt. I will give you an example. Here in North America or here in the US, we just opened a new plant here in Wisconsin. Our biggest plant in the US, 345,000 square feet in Beaver Dam, Wisconsin. We just commissioned that plant back on April 1, cut the ribbon on it, locally here just this past, last week.

And so that plant is operational. What that plant allows us to do, it is focused on our mid-range gensets up to basically, to one megawatt. And so that is going to be more of our traditional market, end markets like telecom, you know, and some of our traditional back markets. What it allows us to do is take product that we are currently manufacturing, those higher output products that we are currently manufacturing in one of our other facilities nearby Oshkosh, Wisconsin, and free that facility up to be focused not quite 100%, but close to the opportunities that exist with these large megawatt units.

And so by the very nature of that, we have added a lot of capacity in the system by bringing this new plant on even though the new plant was not maybe aimed directly at the large megawatt product. That plant that we just brought online is about a $65 to $70 million investment. All in. So, you know, as we think about and it took us about fifteen months. Bring the plant on, twelve to fifteen months depending on it is pretty actually, to twelve months than fifteen to bring it up to speed. And, to get it constructed and get it going. So as we think about the future, and again, 2026, we are fine.

We have plenty of capacity. We are well over $150 million backlog we have got, and we are going to get, you know, orders of magnitude over that in terms of what our raw capacity is globally. For these large systems. When we think about the opportunity that exists for '27, '28, and beyond, I want to get ahead of this. And I want to get ahead of it now. And so, you know, we are going to have to take, you know, and make some big bold bets on additional capacity. You know, and that could come through organic efforts. You know, we could build some factories. We could buy some buildings, we can do some things there.

That are frankly in our wheelhouse in terms of, you know, again, I referred to this in my prepared remarks, but our core corporate agility, one of them is a Jill or core corporate value is agility. We just move fast at the company. We know how to do that. We are comfortable with that. It is a legacy of serving kind of honestly, it comes from our residential side of our business where it is a legacy of being able to react to exogenous events that happen. You know, I we think that our supply chain we have got a, you know, we have got great partnerships built in the supply chain for these large megawatt units.

And they are prepared. They have got a lot of capacity already. They are prepared to add more. What we need to do is continue to look at all elements of the value chain there end to end to make sure that there are not other constraints that exist. And if there are, how do we solve for them? So this is going to be an all-out effort by the company to figure out how we grow this segment of our business very, very quickly in the years ahead. And it is going to come we are going to need to invest. The good news is we have got a really great balance sheet generate a lot of cash flow.

We generate, you know, $400 million this year. So And we have ahead steam. And we have got ahead of steam. Yeah. In terms of our momentum going forward here. So with our backlog. So we feel like we are well-positioned to, you know, maybe you want to call it a rotation of investment, you know, somewhat out of some of the energy technology things we have been focused on and into this C&I opportunity, which we just want to we just think we can win there. With our approach. So super excited about that.

Operator: And our next question will be coming from Keith Housum of Northcoast Research.

Keith Housum: Morning, guys, and thanks for the opportunity here. Hey, you hope you guys could perhaps just dimensionalize a little bit the current industry capacity for these data centers. You mentioned deficit of about 5,000 devices. How much can the market do today? And then perhaps, what is your capacity? Is it $300 million $400 million as you guys currently have it built?

Aaron Jagdfeld: Yeah. Thanks, Keith. So the overall market size again, is there is a lot of there is a lot of moving pieces there, but, you know, it is significantly above the 5,000 deficit, obviously. But it is you know, it continues to evolve. And a lot of that is going to be it is going to be defined by how quickly the data centers can come online. You know, one of the challenges that still has to be solved by the data centers is the ability to connect to the grid. Right? So what we are seeing, and I think what you yeah.

For those of you who track some of the companies in the marketplace that provide different solutions for what we refer to as bridge power. Right? Maybe unique solutions, individual solutions that can create a somewhat independent, almost microgrid, if you will, for a data center site. And they can stand up that microgrid, that data center and bring it online more quickly. A lot of the overall size of the market is being dictated by how quickly can these data centers be put into service, either by connecting to the grid or through their self-sufficiency with some kind of bridge power solution until they can connect to the grid. So it is a moving number.

It is a moving target. Again, the 5,000 deficit that we reference is kind of based on what the individual market participants have told us that they believe and not market participants in terms of genset participants, but the customers, for data centers, what they believe that to be a deficit in the market. So they are not telling us how big the whole thing is. They are just saying they believe there are, you know, there are thousands and thousands of units short here even for 2026.

Our own capacity just kind of looking at what we think we can do in terms of capacity for next year, I think it is, you know, easily north of $500 million in terms of what we have as capacity today. Based on the nine facilities we have, based on bringing Beaver Dam online here, this year and also some expansion that we are doing investing in some areas in some of our other plants to allow them to do even more to expand their capacity of large megawatt product in particular. Either through additional test capacity, which is generally the constraint or through some of the other production capacity.

What we need to do is size that with our supply chain as well. We think right now, our supply chain could keep up with that. This is where I think real quick. Very quickly. Yeah. You think about $500 million. I mean, that is a third of our entire C&I business today. You know? So, I mean, it is a again, I keep using the term needle-moving because that is truly a needle-moving opportunity. But the good news is, you know, we have got good capacity in put in place. We have got, as York mentioned, momentum. And we are willing to commit to additional capacity as the market grows and as our participation grows alongside of it.

Operator: And one moment for our next question. Our next question will be coming from Dimple Gosai of Bank of America. Dimple, your line is open.

Dimple Gosai: Thank you. I appreciate the time today. You raised EBITDA margins to 18% to 19% from 17% to 19% previously. My question is what is driving the confidence in margin expansion, right? How much of this is due to structural improvements, say, input costs or temporary tailwinds from mix pricing? As opposed to uplifts from tariffs. Right? And how sustainable are these margins into 2026?

York Ragen: Yeah. No. I think, what we have been our gross margin performance has been quite strong, I would say, for the last four quarters. Yeah. So we have demonstrated that we can execute on strong gross margin. So that alone gives us confidence that can continue on. Now from a tariff standpoint, you know, the market has absorbed the pricing. And you can see from our Q2 performance that we were able to withstand that. We believe in the second half, we will continue that. We have got confidence that the impact of tariffs will get offset by price, and that will allow us to hold those strong margins.

And I think the increase from our prior outlook is just a function of holding those margin dollar levels on slightly lower sales, on slightly lower pricing. So that alone will drive your margins up. But what we have seen today is we believe we can offset those tariff impacts.

Aaron Jagdfeld: I would say I would add to that, Dimple, that when you think about longer-term margins, from some of the energy tech products that we talked about earlier. And then if we, you know, if as that C&I business begins to rapidly grow, the leverage that we are going to get from that growth is going to also be, I think, a positive overall for our margins. So the combination of those two factors as well gives me confidence longer term that our margins have the opportunity to continue to expand. I mean, we had laid that out also at our last IR event. You know, we were targeting higher margins even than where we are operating today.

We believe that is still very achievable. You know? And that is even kind of before we get to some of the potential opportunities within the data center market that we have been talking about this morning. Definitely in the on the EBITDA line. Definitely. On the EBITDA. Yeah. The operating leverage on the EBITDA line will be large. Absolutely.

Operator: And one moment for our next question. Our next question will be coming from Sean Milligan of Janney. Your line is open.

Sean Milligan: Thank you for taking the question, guys. In terms of the data center piece, you just kind of hit on it, but I was trying to understand how we should think about margins for that book of business. You know, are they I guess, both from a gross and the EBITDA side within the C&I piece, like, are they going to drag that margin profile higher over the next couple of years also?

Aaron Jagdfeld: I think at the gross margin line, if you just looked at those projects on their own, you know, they do not look tremendously different than our C&I product margins. You know, they are maybe a little bit softer than that on a percentage basis, but, actually, they are quite a bit stronger than our initial business case going into this market. Presented. We thought that those percentages would be more challenging, and they would be potentially dilutive at the gross margin line. I do not necessarily see it happening that way with C&I products now.

Given where because of the structural deficit in the market, pricing of those products to the market has gone up from our initial business case and is putting us in a place with gross margins on those products that look a lot more like our traditional C&I products. And as a result and even, you know, even if we were to the business case that we if we were talking about the business case we originally had, we were going to see accretion on the EBITDA margin line because of that leverage. Going to see it.

It is going to work out even better now because gross margins also will be stronger than we had initially planned for, and you will get the leverage on the operating leverage at the EBITDA margin line. So net, Sean, I think it is, you know, this is again where kind of my previous answer to Dimple's question. Why I have got confidence that our EBITDA margins can continue to expand in the future is in particular on the back of what we are looking at doing here in data centers. Even on a consolidated basis. Even on a consolidated basis.

Maybe slightly maybe dilutive about the gross margin line on a consolidated basis, but accretive to accretive on a consolidated basis EBITDA margin for sure.

Operator: Thank you. One moment for our next question. Which will come from Joseph Osha of Guggenheim Partners. Joseph, your line is open.

Joseph Osha: Hi. Thanks. I am wondering if you could talk a little bit about your diesel source strategy. I am wondering whether for starters that supply chain is showing some signs of stress as well given how busy data centers are and also how you are thinking about where you might procure, in particular, what your opportunities are outside of China?

Aaron Jagdfeld: Yeah. Thanks, Joe. It is a great question because, obviously, at the heart of every one of those machines, is a lot what we refer to as a large bore diesel engine. That produces, you know, the kind of output that is required in each of these machines. And these are engines that have been around a long time, but they have been traditional and they have been used in power generation in the traditional market sense. But, typically, you see them in rail. You see them in mining. You see them in marine, in those larger power applications. You know, when you look across the planet, there are a handful of manufacturers of these large diesel engines.

And, you know, a couple of them are very well known. Caterpillar, Cummins, you know, and they also have very well-known power generation divisions or groups. That are leading the charge forward on, you know, kind of, you know, serving the data center markets. But that is where the constraints lie. And for them, you know, they both Cat and Cummins have announced expansion plans for capacity in those diesel engine in the diesel engine production capacity that will come online in the next several years. And that is somewhat unique for them because normally those markets the primary markets of rail, marine, and mining can be cyclical. Right?

And in the past, I think the reticence to add capacity in those large bore diesel engines for manufacturing capacity, it is expensive. And so it is a capital-intensive, a bit expensive to add capacity. So typically they have kind of, you know, I think held the line on doing that and just, you know, waited for markets to roll over. In terms of cycles. But this time, they I think they all view it differently. I think which is actually a very bullish sign.

I think overall that there is a belief that this part of the market is going to run for a lot longer and is, you know, going to be relevant in a big way going forward and is worthy of making that next level of capacity investment. That said, our supply chain, Generac Holdings Inc., you know, we work very hard over the last few years to put a deal together with a supplier there that is not new to the market but maybe new to the US market. And so we have been working with that partner to get those products qualified US certification.

They were qualified last year for use in Europe, and that is why our European team is maybe a quarter or two ahead of where we are at in the US. And the products are now qualified for duty here in the US market. It is a world-class manufacturer and they have a tremendous amount of capacity they have a very large appetite for additional investment. So we feel that we are paired there with a very confident supplier and one that is going to give us a lot of room to run. In terms of, you know, with this initial foray into the market.

One of the major reasons why we have been successful is we have been able to quote, you know, considerably shorter lead times and where the markets have maybe half the lead time of the market today. And, you know, that is great. But that is not what you build a business on. You know, we have got to build a business on a reputation that states by our performance as well.

Performance of the equipment itself, but also the uptime of the equipment and our ability to serve and support those customers in a way that, you know, we think we know how given our long history in serving some areas like telecommunications, as an example, on a direct basis. So we think our supply chain is in really good shape there, Joe. We think we have got the right partner. And again, I think we are poised for some significant growth.

Operator: I would now like to turn the conference back to Kris for closing remarks.

Kris Rosemann: We want to thank everyone for joining us this morning. We look forward to discussing our third quarter 2025 earnings results with you in late October. Thank you again. And goodbye.

Operator: And this concludes today's conference call. Thank you for participating. You may now disconnect.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

This article is a transcript of this conference call produced for The Motley Fool. While we strive for our Foolish Best, there may be errors, omissions, or inaccuracies in this transcript. Parts of this article were created using Large Language Models (LLMs) based on The Motley Fool's insights and investing approach. It has been reviewed by our AI quality control systems. Since LLMs cannot (currently) own stocks, it has no positions in any of the stocks mentioned. As with all our articles, The Motley Fool does not assume any responsibility for your use of this content, and we strongly encourage you to do your own research, including listening to the call yourself and reading the company's SEC filings. Please see our Terms and Conditions for additional details, including our Obligatory Capitalized Disclaimers of Liability.

  •  

Why Peloton Interactive Stock Soared Today

Key Points

Shares of Peloton Interactive (NASDAQ: PTON), the streaming fitness and equipment company, jumped 14.6% through 11:30 a.m. ET Wednesday after UBS analyst Arpine Kocharyan upgraded the stock to buy with an $11 price target.

That's nearly twice where Peloton stock closed last night.

Where to invest $1,000 right now? Our analyst team just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks to buy right now. Continue »

A person smiling on an exercise bike.

Image source: Getty Images.

Why UBS loves Peloton

UBS sees Peloton making progress cutting costs and growing revenue, resulting in higher expectations for fiscal 2026 profits. Granted, that might not happen, but UBS sees the stock as offering a "favorable risk/reward [ratio] and undemanding valuation" at its present price -- and cash flow is already improving.

All of this leads the analyst to predict that Peloton might guide investors to higher 2026 profit than Wall Street is expecting. Kocharyan's best guess is that Peloton might guide to $400 million or even $450 million in 2026 earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization (EBITDA) -- as much as a 25% earnings surprise.

Is Peloton stock a buy?

Now mind you, we're talking about EBITDA here, a rather spongy term and not actual net profit, much less real free cash flow (FCF) that goes into the bank.

Still, Peloton has resumed generating positive free cash flow, and most analysts agree Peloton will remain FCF-positive this year and, indeed, for the foreseeable future. Valued on the $245 million in cash profit the company will probably generate this year, the stock only costs about 11.5 times current year FCF, which I agree is an "undemanding valuation," so long as Peloton can grow as UBS predicts.

Even with $1.1 billion in net debt on the books, the price looks right for this one. I agree: Peloton stock is probably a buy.

Should you invest $1,000 in Peloton Interactive right now?

Before you buy stock in Peloton Interactive, consider this:

The Motley Fool Stock Advisor analyst team just identified what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy now… and Peloton Interactive wasn’t one of them. The 10 stocks that made the cut could produce monster returns in the coming years.

Consider when Netflix made this list on December 17, 2004... if you invested $1,000 at the time of our recommendation, you’d have $630,291!* Or when Nvidia made this list on April 15, 2005... if you invested $1,000 at the time of our recommendation, you’d have $1,075,791!*

Now, it’s worth noting Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039% — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500. Don’t miss out on the latest top 10 list, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the 10 stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

Rich Smith has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has positions in and recommends Peloton Interactive. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Old Dominion (ODFL) Q2 2025 Earnings Transcript

Image source: The Motley Fool.

DATE

  • Wednesday, July 30, 2025, at 10 a.m. EDT

CALL PARTICIPANTS

  • President and Chief Executive Officer — Marty Freeman
  • Chief Financial Officer — Adam N. Satterfield

Need a quote from one of our analysts? Email [email protected]

RISKS

  • LTL tons per day declined 9.3%, directly impacting operating leverage.
  • Operating ratio deteriorated by 270 basis points to 74.6% in Q2 2025 due to deleveraging effects and increased overhead costs.
  • Employee benefit costs rose to 39.5% of salaries and wages versus 37.2% in the prior year, primarily driven by higher group health and dental plan expenses.
  • “We had some losses in the second quarter [on fleet asset sales],” Satterfield stated, with continued pressure expected, driving up miscellaneous expenses in Q3 2025.

TAKEAWAYS

  • Total Revenue: driven by volume declines, partially offset by increased yield.
  • LTL Tons per Day: LTL tons per day fell 9.3% in Q2 2025, while LTL revenue per hundredweight rose 3.4%.
  • Sequential Changes: All were below ten-year averages.
  • Monthly Sequential Trends: April declined 3.7% versus March. May rose 0.5% versus April, and June dropped 0.6% versus May, each underperforming the respective ten-year seasonal averages.
  • July Month-to-Date Performance: LTL tons per day were down 8.5% year-over-year in July 2025.
  • Operating Ratio: Worsened by 270 basis points to 74.6% in Q2 2025, reflecting deleverage from lower revenue, with overhead costs rising 160 basis points as a percent of revenue.
  • Depreciation and Miscellaneous Expenses: Depreciation increased by 80 basis points, and miscellaneous expenses increased by 40 basis points as a proportion of revenue, attributed to ongoing capital expenditures and higher asset sale losses.
  • Direct Operating Costs: Increased 110 basis points, primarily due to employee benefit plan expenses.
  • Employee Benefit Costs: Equaled 39.5% of salaries and wages, up from 37.2% in 2024.
  • Cash Flow from Operations: Capital expenditures were $187.2 million in Q2 2025 and $275.3 million for the first six months of 2025, respectively.
  • Shareholder Returns: Share repurchases and dividends totaled $59 million in Q2 2025 and $118.5 million for the first six months of 2025, respectively.
  • Effective Tax Rate: guidance for continued 24.8% in the next quarter.
  • On-Time Performance: Maintained at 99% with a cargo claims ratio of 0.1% in Q2 2025.
  • Pricing Outlook: Satterfield projected, “yield ex fuel will probably be up in the 4% to 4.5% range in Q3 2025,” with consistent sequential increases expected.
  • Overhead Expense Guidance: Overhead costs expected to “tick up even further,” following a reported $310 million in the second quarter.
  • Seasonality Context: The ten-year average sequential change from Q2 to Q3 is typically flat to up 50 basis points in operating ratio, but Satterfield expects a sequential increase in the operating ratio in the 80 to 120 basis point range from Q2 to Q3 2025, partially due to revenue softness.

SUMMARY

Management stressed a disciplined approach to pricing, even as volumes and revenue remain under sustained pressure. Strategic investment in network capacity, technology, and workforce continues despite weaker short-term profitability, positioning Old Dominion Freight Line (NASDAQ:ODFL) for long-term demand recovery, even as competitive pressures and industry overcapacity persist.

  • Satterfield described discretionary spending as tightly managed, noting that “we just got to continue to stay disciplined really throughout all areas of the operation.”
  • Freeman emphasized that “Delivering superior service at a fair price” is foundational, supporting both customer relationships and yield management.
  • Management conveyed cautious optimism about improving volume trends relative to easier future comparisons but refrained from forecasting a near-term demand inflection, highlighting ongoing economic uncertainty.
  • Continued investment in capital expenditures -- cited as approaching $2 billion over this three-year downturn -- is expected to provide leverage as demand eventually recovers.
  • Satterfield explained that much of the operating leverage remains intact, as “about 70% of our cost or so right now are variable,” and sequential incremental margins reached 60% on even modest revenue improvement.
  • Executives see no structural change in LTL’s competitive position or lasting market share loss, citing proprietary data and continued customer wins, while actively managing fleet capacity and overhead.

INDUSTRY GLOSSARY

  • LTL (Less-than-Truckload): Freight shipments that do not require a full truck; multiple shippers’ goods share trailer space for efficiency.
  • Revenue per Hundredweight: A key pricing measure in LTL, representing revenue earned for every 100 pounds shipped.
  • Operating Ratio (OR): Operating expenses as a percentage of revenue; a lower OR indicates higher operating profitability in transportation.
  • Yield ex Fuel: A yield metric adjusted to exclude fuel surcharges, offering insight into underlying pricing trends.

Full Conference Call Transcript

Marty Freeman: Good morning, and welcome to our second quarter conference call. With me on the call today is Adam Satterfield, our CFO. After some brief remarks, we would be glad to take your questions. Old Dominion's second-quarter financial results reflect continued softness in the domestic economy. Although our revenue decreased in the quarter due to a decline in our volumes, our yields improved as our in-class service continues to support our disciplined approach to pricing. I want to thank our outstanding team for their unwavering dedication to our customers and continued commitment to executing the core elements of our long-term strategic plan.

Although the challenging economic environment has persisted for longer than we anticipated, we have remained focused on what we can control as we work to ensure Old Dominion continues to deliver superior service to our customers while also operating efficiently. In addition, our ongoing investments in our network, technology, and our OD family of employees put us in an unparalleled position to respond to an inflection in demand when it materializes. Delivering superior service at a fair price to our customers is the cornerstone of our strategic plan and has been central to our success for many, many years.

Doing so consistently through the ups and downs of the economic cycle has strengthened our customer relationships over time and allowed us to keep our market share relatively consistent over the extended period of slower economic activity. As a result, we were pleased to once again provide our customers with 99% on-time performance and a cargo claims ratio of 0.1% in the second quarter. This consistency of our execution and our commitment to creating value for our customers doesn't happen by accident. It is a product of our unique culture and the result of the hard work of the OD family of employees. Across our company, our team is focused every day on adding value for our customers.

By keeping our promises to our customers, we help them create value for their own customers. Our commitment to service excellence continues to support our long-term yield management initiatives. With a focus on individual account-level profitability, our approach to pricing is designed to offset cost inflation and support our ongoing investments in our network, our fleet, and our people. Although these investments have created headwinds to our profitability in the short term, we are confident that our consistent reinvestment back into our business for growth is the right long-term approach. We know that having available capacity to grow with our customers and support them during periods of stronger demand is an important component of our value proposition.

We also believe that these investments are critical to stay ahead of what we expect to be favorable long-term demand trends for our industry. I'm very proud of our team and how they continue to find ways to reduce costs and operate efficiently. When volumes decrease, it can lead to increased operating costs due to the loss of operating density. While that was the case in the second quarter, we continue to believe that our business model contains meaningful operating leverage, and we remain confident in our ability to improve our operating ratio over the long term. We expect this to become more apparent over time.

Our customers have recognized the value of our service by giving us more of their business. Looking forward, we believe that the consistency of our execution, unique culture, and our team's daily commitment to excellence will allow us to be the biggest market share winner over the next decade as well. Our position is as strong as ever to respond to an improvement in the demand environment, revenue growth, and drive increased shareholder value over the long term. Thank you very much for joining us this morning. And now Adam will discuss our second quarter in greater detail.

Adam Satterfield: Thank you, Marty, and good morning. Old Dominion's revenue totaled $1.41 billion for 2025, which was a 6.1% decrease from the prior year. Our revenue results reflect a 9.3% decrease in LTL tons per day that was partially offset by a 3.4% increase in LTL revenue per hundredweight. On a sequential basis, our revenue per day for the second quarter increased 0.8% when compared to 2025, with LTL tons per day increasing 0.1% and LTL shipments per day increasing 0.8%. For comparison, the ten-year average sequential change for these metrics includes an increase of 8.2% in revenue per day, an increase of 5.3% in LTL tons per day, and an increase of 6% in LTL shipments per day.

The monthly sequential changes in LTL tons per day during the second quarter were as follows: April decreased 3.7% as compared to March, May increased 0.5% as compared to April, and June decreased 0.6% as compared to May. The ten-year average change for these respective months is a decrease of 0.7% in April, an increase of 2.5% in May, and an increase of 2.1% in June. For July, our current month-to-date revenue per day is down 5.1% when compared to July 2024, with a decrease of 8.5% in our LTL tons per day. As usual, we will provide the actual revenue-related details for July in our second quarter Form 10-Q.

Our operating ratio increased 270 basis points to 74.6% for 2025, as the decrease in our revenue had a deleveraging effect on many of our operating expenses. This contributed to the 160 basis point increase in our overhead cost as a percent of revenue. Within our overhead cost, depreciation as a percent of revenue increased 80 basis points while our miscellaneous expenses increased 40 basis points. The increase in depreciation cost as a percent of revenue reflects the ongoing execution of our long-term capital expenditure program, which we believe will support our ability to grow with customers in the years ahead.

Our direct operating cost also increased as a percent of revenue despite our team's best efforts to manage these variable costs. The 110 basis point increase in these costs was primarily due to higher expenses associated with our group health and dental plans. As a result, our employee benefit cost increased to 39.5% of salaries and wages during 2025, compared to 37.2% in the same period of the prior year. Overall, we continue to be pleased with how our team has remained focused on controlling what we can until the demand environment improves. The OD team has continued to deliver best-in-class service while operating very efficiently, and we've also managed our discretionary spending.

We will, however, continue to make the investments that we believe are necessary to ensure that our business remains well-positioned for the long term. Old Dominion's cash flow from operations totaled $25.9 million for the second quarter and $622.4 million for the first six months of 2025, respectively, while capital expenditures were $187.2 million and $275.3 million for those same periods. For our share repurchase program during the second quarter and first six months of 2025, respectively, while our cash dividends totaled $59 million and $118.5 million for those same periods. Our effective tax rate for 2025 was 24.8% as compared to 24.5% in 2024. We currently expect our effective tax rate will be 24.8% for the third quarter.

This concludes our prepared remarks this morning. Operator, we'll be happy to open the floor for questions at this time.

Operator: Thank you. We will now begin the question and answer session. Our first question will come from Chris Wetherbee with Wells Fargo. Please go ahead.

Chris Wetherbee: Hey, thanks. Good morning, guys. Appreciate the comments. Maybe we could just start with your thoughts around operating ratio. Obviously, it's a challenging environment from a tonnage at least year over year. Kind of how do you think about sort of the normal progression from 2Q to 3Q on the OR? And maybe kind of how you feel like you can fare, you know, given the circumstances we're in from a macro backdrop?

Adam Satterfield: Sure. Yes, the ten-year average is for us, it typically flat to up 50 basis points from the second quarter to the third. But that's typically based on sequential revenue growth of about 3%, which is what we typically see. So obviously, the demand environment, what you just said, we've not really seen that positive inflection yet, unfortunately, with our revenue this year. But so I'm kind of thinking that revenue per day, if it continues to stay flattish on a per day basis, much what we saw in the second quarter that continues into the third. But we'll probably see an increase in the operating ratio somewhere in the 80 to 120 basis point type range.

So a little worse than what our normal sequential change would be. But just a couple of things to point out for that. I'm expecting that we'll see an increase in our salary wages and benefits line. And some of that, as you know, we give a wage increase that's the first September every year. So that's always in there, but we typically have that revenue that offsets a little bit. But I'm also expecting that we'll see continued pressure with our free benefit costs. So, I'm thinking that will be part of the driver.

I also think that we'll see our operating supplies and expenses will probably tick up a little bit our overhead costs, and we talk about that a lot, but I'm expecting that our overhead cost in aggregate will be up a little bit further in the third quarter. They were about $310 million in the second quarter. We've been running about $305 million. So I'm expecting that we'll see those tick up even further in the third quarter. Probably some pressure in the miscellaneous expenses line will continue. But obviously, the overhead cost is revenue-dependent. So I'm anticipating if it's flattish revenue, then those costs will tick up a little bit further.

But if we can see some revenue start to come in a little bit better, and obviously, we'll continue to give our mid-quarter update then that's something that eventually, over time, we'll get leverage on.

Operator: Thank you. Our next question will come from Eric Morgan with Barclays. Please go ahead.

Eric Morgan: Hey, good morning. Thanks for taking my question. I wanted to ask about the market share commentary. Just if we look at the ATA's shipment index, it actually turned positive in the past couple of months, at least for April and May. So I don't know if that's kinda the best data to use, but it's what we have. And obviously, it's a bit different from what we're seeing from you as well as your publicly traded peers. So kind of less real-time insight they've been responding to this downturn, if that's changed at all in recent months.

Adam Satterfield: Yeah. The best data that we probably get from an industry is really from transport topics. And so that's the data that you'll see most typically quote in the team ks about the size of the industry and so forth. And so you really only get an annual read on some of those carriers. Without the month-to-month trend. And the ATA is good, but I think it typically has always had a much higher report of revenue for the entire industry, and it includes I believe, some ground business from some of the other parcel carriers. So that's why we typically have used Transfer Topics.

But I think when we look at that information, Transport Topics just published recently, and we saw a pretty consistent trend from market share for us. And we've got granular level detail that we get through proprietary database that's out there as well. And overall, I'd like to think that our market share, when you look through this downturn, our strategy is that we want to maintain market share in periods of economic weakness while also getting increases in our yields. And think when we go back and look at kind of where things were in '21, '22, that's effectively what's happened. And it always moves up or down a little bit here and there.

But the key will be continuing to execute our strategy like we've done in the past. And then May 2014, 2015, same thing with 'seventeen and 'eighteen. We've been able to outperform the market from a tonnage growth standpoint. Anywhere from 1,000 to 1,200 basis points. So we just need a little help from the economy to get back to where we really see that demand environment inflecting back to the positive. And obviously, macro factors are starting to settle a little bit. With respect to the tax deal. Trade. Hopefully, at some point soon, we'll get an interest rate decrease.

Think once some of those measures of certainty come back into the market, it will create opportunities for our customers. That will create opportunities for us to start growing our volumes again. Thank you.

Operator: Our next question will come from Jonathan Chappell with Evercore ISI. Please go ahead.

Jonathan Chappell: Thank you. Good morning. Adam, one of the things you mentioned in response to Chris' question was you expect pressure on operating supplies and expenses. You said the same thing in April and operating supplies and expenses actually improved by 80 basis points as a percentage of revenue in 2Q. So did something happen in 2Q that really help you on that cost line item that you expect to reverse and in 3Q? Or, you know, how do we kind of match up the pretty big sequential improvement in 2Q to, you know, ongoing pressure expected in March.

Adam Satterfield: Yeah. I would say that, we continue to see really good performance from our repairs and maintenance. Our team has done a great job I think, with managing those costs. And I had the expectation that we would see some pressures there from 1Q to 2Q. Anticipating that some of our part cost might be increasing due to the impact of tariffs and so forth. But I think what we've seen is just some continued changes with our fleet. We've continued to take some of our older equipment out that would have had really high repair cost, if you will. And so we've continued to pare back some of our fleet in that example.

And then just in general, our cost per mile, we've seen improvement this year. And if you go back the last few years, we up double digits. From a cost per mile standpoint, '22 and '23. So I think that was some of the better sequential performance that we had if you will, from 1Q to 2Q. But I'd say part of that driver is I'm thinking from 2Q to 3Q. Right now, or at least in the second quarter, our average price per gallon for fuel was like 3.56 and we're seeing that elevated right now.

So I think that's something where those costs as a percent of revenue, fuel kind of continues to hold at about the range where we are now, fuel is obviously a big driver in that operating supplies and expense line. Historically, what you see and probably the comment of why I wanted to give both those together, we always talk about, as fuel changes, usually, you'll see corresponding increase. I like to look at our direct cost in total and how we manage through those. So in the short term, if you see if fuel surcharge goes up, our fuel expenses percent of revenue might also go up.

But you would see the direct labor cost, in particular, kind of an offsetting decrease there. And typically, the second quarter to third quarter, too, that's where kind of see those costs all in. Or kind of flattish, if you will. But I'm expecting to see some continued pressure there at the salary, wages and benefits line. Somewhat like I mentioned, we've got the wage increase. We'll get one month of that for the full quarter. Typically, have a little bit of sequential revenue growth that will offset that.

And we may still have that for this coming quarter, but if we got flattish revenue growth and that puts a little pressure on that line item, but we've also seen higher fringe benefit cost for the past few quarters, and I'm expecting that trend to continue. And to probably be even a little bit higher in the third quarter than what we just saw in the second.

So those couple of factors and as well as the miscellaneous expenses some of the miscellaneous expenses back to kind of making changes on the fleet think we may see some more losses, if you will, coming through on that line item in the third quarter to put a little bit more pressure overall I would just say, in that big bucket of overhead cost.

Operator: Thank you. Our next question will come from Jordan Alliger with Goldman Sachs. Please go ahead.

Jordan Alliger: Hello, Mr. Aleker. Your line may be muted. Can you hear Go ahead, sorry. Yes. So just sort of curious, sort of you gave some color and commentary around the OR revenue per day sort of flattish. I mean given the easy comps, think that are coming up both in terms of tonnage per day and revenue per day I'm assuming as we look forward from July, those trends on a year-over-year basis I would think have the opportunity to get quite a bit better. But just curious your thoughts on the latter half of this quarter. Against those comps.

Adam Satterfield: Yes. They would, Jordan. So in the second quarter for the full quarter, we were down just call it, 6%, 6.1%. Right now, I would say July, just call it, we're down five. So it's already getting a little bit better. If we stay, the second quarter per day average was about $22 million revenue per day. So if we stay in that same ballpark, then we'd be down a little over 4%, you know, if you just sort of held revenue at that $1.4 billion that we just did in the second quarter, if you say that was exactly the same that's kind of what the trend would be.

I'll say that the July performance so far, when I look at kind of where our tons are and just the revenue per day, level, July is normally a weak month from a tons per day standpoint, we're usually down about 3% versus June. We're trending down about a little over 2% right now. So we're a little bit better what our normal sequential trend, is. Now I'm not ready to make a call to say that things will turn around and we'll get the acceleration that we typically would see in August and September. I think that gives us a little bit sense of cautious optimism to say, it's it's outperformance kind of on the downside.

Will we see some of that acceleration come through? I think that remains the question. I think it will get answered as we go through the quarter and we give our mid-quarter updates and so forth. So if we were to perform at normal seasonality, and I think that's a big if right now, not saying that, that would be the case, then that number would come back more in comparison to revenue with the third quarter last year. Think it full seasonality, we'd be down about 1.5%.

So we'll just continue to monitor it, and maybe we'll be somewhere in that 1.5% to 4%, just depending upon how things continue to materialize as we make our way through the quarter.

Operator: Thank you. Our next question will come from Tom Wadewitz with UBS. Please go ahead.

Tom Wadewitz: Yeah. I so wanted to see if you could offer a little more perspective just on pricing, kind of how you think about revenue per hundredweight ex fuel. In 3Q. And just whether the pricing I mean, your commentary pretty consistent over time that you see stability and discipline in the market. But is anything changing on that front? Is there you know, any kind of, areas where you see increased competition as the downturn expense? Thanks.

Adam Satterfield: Yes. I would say overall just really we've got to go by whatever everyone reported in the first quarter. But I think most carriers their reported yields have continued to be positive overall. And obviously, we continue to execute on our plan and I think our plan is different. We look at things from a cost base standpoint, and we want to be consistent through the cycle. And feel like getting those consistent cost-based increases are obviously important to the long-term operating ratio improvement that we've had. So right now, for the third quarter, I'm kind of looking at I think that number will probably be the yield ex fuel will probably be up in the 4% to 4.5% range.

And that's about where we are in July. So I think we'd expect to see consistent sequential increase in that reported number. But it will probably come in a little bit. And that's not a reflection on any kind of change or anything like that. It's just a function of kind of where we were last year and But we continue to expect to see increase and we're getting increases when we go through renewals. And that's one of the things that's been tough about this environment back to thinking about that market share question from earlier. But as we're going through our renewals, we're continuing to win business.

We get reporting for our national accounts the business that we've won or business that we've lost. And we're continuing to keep customers and get increases on those accounts that we're keeping. But we're also winning some new business. Overall, obviously, the volumes are down. But I think that, that lends itself to maybe a quick turnaround, if you will, when we do see that volume environment reflect back to the positive. And I think a lot of people believe that, that's coming sooner than later. And obviously, we felt like it was coming before.

We've had a few head fakes from an economic standpoint, but now that some of the bigger picture, things are being resolved from a macro standpoint. I feel like some of the optimism that we saw late last year and kind of saw it in the improvement in ISM in the early part of this year we hope to see kind of that turn back around and that optimism come back to the market and lend itself to increased freight opportunities.

But I think that's part of our value proposition is having capacity And while capacity is not at a premium right now, just given how weak demand has been for so long, We have heard commentary from customers about some competitors that aren't able to make pickups consistently in some markets. And increasingly calling us. And so I feel like when you have true demand recovery, those inbound calls will likely accelerate, and that's what we've seen in the past. And I referenced some of those periods earlier, but you go back to 2014 when we grew tons at 17%, the market is up 5%. In 'eighteen, we're up 10%. The market's up 1.5%.

You know what we did through the '21 and '22 cycle. Where we put $2 billion of cumulative revenue growth books then. So we feel like we're sitting in a great position to capitalize. We need a little bit of help from the economy right now.

Operator: And our next question will come from Daniel Imbro with Stephens Inc. Please go ahead.

Daniel Imbro: Yes. Hey, good morning. Marty, Adam, Jack. Hope you're doing well. Adam, maybe following up on that last discussion just on competition out there. I mean, you guys specifically have been a leader in a lot of the high service parts of the industry, whether SMB or grocery, of anything with the must arrive by date. A lot of your peers are talking about trying to grow here. So I guess, are you seeing the better offerings from some of your peers making any encroachment on your business as you go to market?

And I guess if not, what do you think the public markets underappreciate about why that will be harder for others to take from you guys being the leader there? Thanks.

Adam Satterfield: You know, I think that any customer that we have obviously, we've got a target on our backs, if you will, And but we're competing with every account. We're competing with the other carriers. And we have been for years. So I don't think anything has changed with that. I think there's this perception that we've got some secret segment of the market that the other carriers haven't figured out until now. And that's just not the case. Mean, we're competing with all the other national carriers in some markets with the regional carriers as well.

So our service product when you think about the fifteen years of Masstio wins, there's more to service than just being able to pick up and deliver on time and without damages. And we do those core things better than anyone else. But it's continuing to figure out ways that we can add value to our customers. And ultimately, that's the business that we're in, is how do we work with our customers create win-win scenarios, where we can help each other and add value. And so I think those are the things that we'll continue to look at and leverage.

We've got about 12% market share and there's a tremendous amount of share opportunity out there within an industry that we think continues to have tailwinds for it. So we continue to believe that e-commerce effect on supply chains will continue to shrink shipment sizes. And have truckload to LTL conversion. I think if nearshoring and reshoring opportunities continue to play out, that creates inbound and outbound opportunities. For us as well. And just supply chain sophistication with the interest rates higher, today, there's a cost of carrying inventory. And so that's that's a value add that we can have where our customers know they can rely on our own time and claims-free service.

So it's figuring out how to go into each and every customer account, figuring out the problems that they're having and delivering a solution for that customer. That's what we I think we do better than anyone else. And that's why we're so confident in what our long-term market share opportunities are.

Marty Freeman: Daniel, as you referenced, in the retail industry, including grocery, there's a penalty if the spray is not on the shelf on time and in full they're called fines. And many of our competitors, they can go out and talk about meeting those expectations with fancy marketing material and so forth. But until they can stop those fines in our customers' pocketbooks, nothing's going to change. And we figured out how to do that many, many years ago, especially in the grocery industry. So, don't see don't see anybody getting close to what we can offer from a service standpoint in retail industry.

Operator: Thank you. Our next question will come from Ken Hoexter with Bank of America. Please go ahead.

Ken Hoexter: Great. Good morning, Marty, Adam, Jack. Want to understand maybe a little bit more on the backdrop here. The stock's down about 8%. Easier comps are coming up right? Revs are down 5% in July. You expect to get that to maybe flat for the quarter. Others reported a deceleration in tons and pricing despite easier comps. Pierre mentioned this morning they're implementing an early GRI. So think you mentioned deceleration in yields at 4% to 4.5% So that's also a deceleration versus history. Are we getting a more competitive environment that just consistently is beating this market while we're in a decelerating market? Just want to understand your view of the backdrop.

And then holding share, I'm still confused by that one because every public carrier reported stronger percentage gains. Does that mean we're looking at just the private guys? I want to revisit that question earlier. Is it just the private guys that are losing relative share? Maybe if you can just expand a little more on.

Adam Satterfield: I think that, one, with respect to the yields, I think what we're looking at will be a continued increase sequentially. And so if we are kind of in the middle of that 4% to 4.5% range, that'd be up 1.5% to 2% sequentially. In the last few years, when you look at the ten-year average, the sequential increase there from 2Q to 3Q is a little bit stronger. But when you look at kind of the last five years, that really skews that average. So to speak. So if you kinda looked at a ten-year average sort of pre-COVID, are thinking about being.

So we're not seeing any change with respect to what our thinking is from an overall yield management standpoint. And I think that when you think about the industry as well, I think most carriers have kind of figured out that yields are important. Those that you get back over the last ten, fifteen years that when they taken the focus off yield, it's had pretty negative impacts on their overall profitability. And so I think that's why we've seen such consistency in the industry over this last three years where demand has been soft overall.

From a market share standpoint, I think that since really Yellow closed their doors, I think there's been a lot of choppiness in terms of figuring out where share is. And we obviously report that and report it by region. Overall in our deck that's out on our Investor Relations website. And so you can kind of see how share maybe be changing in one region versus the next. But it's something that when we look at the overall market, again, kind of factoring in what I just said, about using the data out of transport topics, it looks like our share is relatively consistent with where we've been really over the last couple of years.

And it's not to say that when we've gone through periods in the past of slow markets that were flat or could be down slightly, whatever, it's about the same. We've continued to execute a plan. We've continued to manage our cost. Our service has gotten better. And I think we're in a really strong position. It's just overall change that we sort of look at. And so we feel good about where we are, but feel better about what the opportunities looking forward will be.

Operator: And our next question will come from Scott Group with Wolfe Research. Please go ahead.

Scott Group: Hey, thanks. Good morning. This is a big picture question, and maybe it's similar with what you just sort of answered. But, you know, if you look at the numbers, you're one of the leaders on yields right now. You're the biggest laggard on tonnage, at least among the public guys. And I guess you might say, hey. That's very normal in a more in a softer market that gets a little bit more competitive. We stay more disciplined on price than anybody. But I guess what feels different is just, like, the duration of this environment like, we're three years into this, and we're now we still have, you know, tonnage down high single digits.

Does that does the duration of this change your thoughts at all in any way, or is it, hey. We'll just gonna do it. We keep doing, and we'll wait this out, and eventually, the cycle will come. Or because the cycle's lasting so much longer, do you think about it any differently?

Adam Satterfield: Yeah. I mean, obviously, it's it's been, we talk about these numbers from a quarterly perspective, annual perspective. There's a lot of day to day that's going on behind the scenes that doesn't get the discussed. I mean, every day, working with customers and figuring out ways to identify new opportunities. And it's been a tough few years going through this soft demand. Initially. And then you had the big industry event that happened. And so the flux of being down, being up short-lived and then being down again. You know, there's been a lot to try to manage through. I'd love for revenue to be higher. And I'd love for this cycle to turn.

There have been a couple of times that we felt like it was turning. And I think back to late '23, we had started reinvesting, running our truck driving schools and hiring folks to be prepared for what we thought was going to be sustained improvement there. And then kind of hit another roadblock from a demand standpoint.

But overall, when I think about our model and how important revenue is, I mean, you just look at the sequential performance through the second quarter, we don't normally talk about sequential incremental margins, but the reality is little bit of revenue that we put on the books between the first and second quarter we had about 60% incremental margins on that business. So it shows, I think, the power of the model once we start getting revenue on the books, but we don't feel like we need to go out and try to chase bad revenue that doesn't fit in our thinking for the long term. And so I think that's what we've done.

We've also continued to manage our costs very well. When I talk about splitting our operating ratio, apart, the 74.6% that we just did in the second quarter, about between 52-53% of revenue were our direct variable cost. That's pretty much the same where we were in the 2022 when we did a sub-seventy operating ratio. And so we've been able to control what we can. Our team has done a phenomenal job, think, of protecting service managing our cost in a very weak environment. That's hard to do when you don't have density in the network. So I'm really pleased with that.

Our overhead cost really are what's accelerated and we just need a bigger revenue base to get leverage on those costs again. But that part of our model and our strategy, too. We like to invest through the cycle. And we've got more capacity than we probably have ever had right now from service center network standpoint. And so yes, we're carrying a lot of excess cost. Our overhead cost as a percent of revenue were about 22% here in the second quarter. Back in 2022, they were about 17%. So therein lies the leverage for the model once we get back to a strong demand environment. So I'm pleased everything we've done.

Obviously, we'd love to be able to flip a switch and see the demand environment improve. But I think from where we sit when we look at what the other carriers are doing and kind of how revenue has trended. For some of the others, we're hanging in there. We've not seen any true variance in our volumes relative to what the entire industry has done. If I look and see the industry is down about 15% from where we were in 2022, our performance is pretty much right in alignment with what the industry has done overall on a net-net basis.

Operator: Our next question will come from Jason Seidl with TD Cowen. Please go ahead.

Jason Seidl: Thank you, operator. Marty, Adam, Jack, good morning, gentlemen. One clarification, I think you guys mentioned you expect losses on asset sales. Did I catch that correct?

Adam Satterfield: Yes, Jason. We've been trying to reduce size of our fleet a little bit just in coordination with where freight volumes are trending. And so we had some losses in the second quarter. That was part of the reason why you may have seen our miscellaneous expenses ticked up a little bit higher. Normally, costs are about 50 basis points or so. And so we saw those costs trend a little bit higher in the second quarter. They were up to 90. And I'm thinking that we'll see some continued pressure in the third quarter. On those.

Jason Seidl: I was just a little confused because I know other carriers are actually reporting gains on sale. And so, maybe you could walk us through, the difference between you and them.

Adam Satterfield: Well, in many cases, we're selling a tractor on average. We use a tractor for ten years. So there's probably not as much demand for that may be more of a truckload thing, but there's not as much demand for a ten-year-old million-mile, single axle day cab tractor.

Jason Seidl: And I guess when you mentioned the sequential move between June and July being slightly better than the historical average, is any of this due to maybe some pull forward when people were worried about the tariffs potentially resetting again in August? Clearly, we're getting through some of these or some deals, but did you get that feedback from any of your shippers that was occurring?

Adam Satterfield: Yeah. There may be, some of that. We've not heard material feedback on that. But, like, when I look at it by region, know, it's not like we saw a big change in, like, outbound business out of California, for example. Most of our regions are trending in about the same kind of range from a revenue performance standpoint. So there's don't know that there's a big outlier that may be driving that.

Operator: Thank you, Mr. Seidl. Our next question will come from Bruce Chan with Stifel. Please go ahead.

Bruce Chan: Yes. Thanks, operator, and good morning, everybody. Maybe another bigger picture question here. You know, we've been hearing pretty regularly in the past couple quarters from, you know, some of the other carriers about AI and dynamic routing. I know that, you know, the OD style has always been to kinda quietly implement those things as part of the overall, you know, playbook. In many cases, much earlier than peers. But maybe just helpful to get an update on any optimization projects that you've got going on right now you know, generally, how you're feeling about the various systems in your tech stack, anything incremental that we should be thinking about as an opportunity?

Adam Satterfield: Yeah. I think, like you said, I mean, we're always looking at technology. It's a key part of our business and I think has been to help us with our operating ratio. And just to kind of keep reminding our operating ratio is about 1,500 basis points better than the company average or industry average, I should say. So regardless of what the other carriers have got as opportunities, we're still materially outperforming there. And I think that technology has been a key part of that. And you're right. I mean, we don't normally try to announce everything and give totally our playbook away. But we're looking at ways to keep getting better.

Continuous improvement is a key component for our foundation of success. And we've always got to look at ways that we can make investments that are really going drive change from a service standpoint. Ultimately or add value through the lens of driving operational efficiencies? And you mentioned line haul optimization. That's kind of been the Holy Grail and the buzzword for the twenty-one years I've been in this industry. But that's something that we continue to look and we've got some tools that we continued to implement and try to refine to drive some optimization there. Same thing within our pickup delivery operations and on the dock.

And I think our increased use of some of those technologies is part of the reason why we've been able to keep those direct costs. And those direct costs are the primarily variable costs, but the direct costs associated with moving freight. And to think that we've been able to manage those costs basically consistent with where we were when our business was running extremely at optimal state at the time back in 2022 with a sub 70 operating ratio, I think, is pretty astounding when you think about the loss of density in our network now versus what we had in the network then.

And so it's not just one thing to point to, but think we've got a great team in the field. And I think we've got a great group in our technology team that's always looking for ways to get better, to work with their business. To work with our customers. Another key part of the technology investment is how can we do things differently. And add value and add stickiness with our customer base as well. That differentiate us from our competition. So all of those things, I think, will continue to be strategic advantages for us and will be part of the story of how we get our operating ratio back towards that 70% threshold.

But continue marching forward and drive long-term improvement there in the operating ratio. While we continue to improve density and yield.

Operator: Thank you, Mr. Chan. Our next question will come from Bascome Majors with Susquehanna. Please go ahead.

Bascome Majors: Thanks. Good morning. Just as a housekeeping item, can you remind us of typical revenue and margin seasonality for the fourth quarter? And Adam, if you look at longer term, not necessarily calling when the cycle will turn, but just thinking about what you think the business will respond like when it does. Can you update us on, you know, sort of the incremental margin or really other sort of profile you think you can deliver when we get some tonnage to flow through all the cost adjustment work that you've done over the last couple of years? Thank you.

Adam Satterfield: Yes. So typically, our revenue per day the ten-year average is a decrease of 0.3%, so 03% decrease in revenue per day. And then our operating ratio is typically up 200 to 250 basis points. And obviously, that we always have. We do an annual actuarial study. So there could be changes plus and minus on that insurance and claims line in the fourth quarter. Last year, we had a pretty big unfavorable adjustment that we had to take there. But nevertheless, we kind of exclude that from the averages, if you will. So that's what the normal performance is.

And I think from just kinda looking forward, in terms of what we can do from an incremental margin, I just mentioned that sequential incremental margin. I expect 60% to be the norm. But just thinking about our cost structure and what it is laid out from a direct cost versus overhead cost and overhead is mainly fixed. But there are some variable costs in there. Overall, about 70% of our cost or so right now are variable, and that's how we've been able to protect our margins through this downturn is continuing to manage those.

But anyways, the 53% of revenue being our direct variable cost and you kind of do the math, that's how we've been able to do sort of 35% to 40% incrementals when we're coming out of kind of on the early side of that demand inflection. And then eventually, you kind of get back to the point where you've got to add more equipment, you've got to add more people and so forth. And it starts compressing back. Our longer-term average incremental has been 35%. And so I think that still seems reasonable.

And that would continue to imply that if you run that out for several years of a recovery in revenue growth that we would get back to that sub-seventy type of threshold.

Operator: Thank you. Our next question will come from Ravi Shanker with Morgan Stanley. Please go ahead.

Ravi Shanker: Hey, guys. Thanks for the time. I know this topic has been discussed a fair bit, but if I can hit it again in a slightly different way. You guys have been masters of calling the cycle over the years and have shown your operating prowess as well. But to kind of Scott's point, it's been three years of a downturn. And even now, I think some of the deals and rails actually sounding a little bit better on volumes in the cycle, even though nobody is gonna high fiving here. How can you guys tell if there is something bigger and more structural going on with the LTL space here rather than just a cycle?

Maybe some more with the same level of volumes or higher in up cycle?

Adam Satterfield: Yeah. The what you just said there at the end is, you know, the confidence that we have in our long-term market share really is just driven by those customer conversations and how we think supply chains will continue to trend over time. We've seen some market share shift, I think, from LTL to truckload through this cycle. And when you look at some statistics in the truckload industry in terms of what they're charging revenue per mile versus cost per mile, they're willing to operate it at breakeven or worse. And I think that's what you're seeing with some of the operating ratios that have been published as well.

So but I think that's some of the trend that we've got to continue to watch is that business starts picking back up, they get busier, the rates start going back up, I think that's when you'll start seeing some of this unwinding. Effect in some of those, truckload carriers that they don't really wanna move multiple shipments on the back of their truck and make multiple stops. That's not their preference. And they don't have the network that's set up to really handle it. They only do it when times are tough and they need some payload. To make a truck payment. And so I think you'll see that business move back into LTL.

And then we'll continue to see kind of our customers that are continuing to if we go through a customer, we're seeing a lot of wins, like I mentioned, from just a customer-specific standpoint. And customers are continuing to award us the same lanes of business that they've had before. But their overall business levels might be down. And whether that's just the demand for their product some we know are taking advantage of this truckload opportunity. It's kind of going to be a multiple items that I think are driving the increase in demand. in prior cycles. So we feel like we're ahead of it though from a capacity standpoint.

I mentioned the network capacity from a service center standpoint. But I feel like we're in really good shape in regards to our fleet. We're probably heavy there. In all honesty. But I feel like from a people capacity standpoint as well, we've got a team that in position and ready. And that's the best incremental margin you can get is when we've got a driver that's already making a stop at our customer. And now instead of picking up one shipment, they're picking up three. And that's typically what we've seen in cycles past and how our volumes can accelerate so quickly on the front end of the inflecting economy.

And that's what we'd expect to see whenever this economy does eventually inflect back to the positive.

Operator: Our next question will come from Richa Harnane with Deutsche Bank. Please go ahead.

Richa Harnane: Hey, gentlemen. Thanks for the time. So I appreciated all the color around your positioning being as strong as it's ever been to respond to an improving environment. And the OD model really makes hay when the sun shining. So maybe you can talk to us. I get that, you we're a little reticent speak to some of the green shoots given all the head fakes you've had. But just customer conversations, you talked about maybe fatigue on the tariff side. Reactions to the recent bill that passed in Washington to spur growth. Interest rate cuts? Like, what are shippers telling you about their appetite to give you more business? In the future?

And then if you can maybe parse out kind of what industries you're maybe more optimistic about versus industries where you're really seeing more malaise set in or more negative trends? Thanks.

Adam Satterfield: Yeah. I think that, it's been the uncertainty that's been hanging out there over the economy that I think has resulted in just the lack of freight volumes overall. Again, I mentioned industry volumes are down about 15% from where we were back in '21, '22. So it's something that everyone's had to contend with. But I think we saw kind of going back to the fall of last year, we saw some initial optimism with respect to the industrial economy. And 55% to 60% of our revenue is industrial related, so that's important to us. And we saw that acceleration in the ISM in December. And then know, it was positive for a couple of months.

But then all the tariff conversation started, and then that just created more uncertainty that seemed to kind of throw cold water on what was developing at the time. And it's hard from a pure manufacturer, for example, to figure out what the cost structure is gonna be when you don't really know what the final tariff cost might be. And so I think that's something that we've had a lot of customers trying to figure out and solve for. And in some cases, you just try to wait things out. And so that's why we've got a little cautious optimism now that we've seen the tax deal be finalized.

And the bonus depreciation is something that I think can spur some further investment here. If we start seeing some trade deals come to fruition, that will be something that provides a little bit more confidence for customers. And I think the final piece will be do we get some relief on interest rates. And so customers that are going through all of their financials and figuring out do they invest or not and what kind of return can they expect on their investment. All those, once you get clarity on those big picture items, I think that's what it's going to take to really kind of spur the economy forward. So we feel like we're closer to that.

Now that we're getting clarity on some of these items and but we want to turn that feeling into true freight. And see it coming on board. And I mentioned that we're seeing a little bit better performance right now in July. And we'll just continue to watch and see does that really manifest into seeing some sequential improvement. Versus just what our business has been like for the last three years of kind of flattish to down month over month.

Operator: Thank you. Our next question will come from Stephanie Moore with Jefferies. Please go ahead.

Stephanie Moore: Hi, good morning. Thanks, guys. Just one real quick here. Look, any thoughts on where the LTL industry fits in, in general with this potential transcontinental railroad or potentially two? Obviously, most are talking about these deals, you know, deal impacting long haul truckload, but where does LTL sit here at all? Would love your perspective. Thanks.

Adam Satterfield: Yeah. I don't know that I would expect to see any material impact on LTL overall. Meant something that it could be ultimately downstream, something we'll continue to watch and engage with customers on. But I think that's kind of on the other end of the supply chain. And not necessarily seeing changes with respect to the rail industry kind of filter down to where we can find a correlation any changes in our business levels.

Operator: Thank you. Our next question will come from Ari Rosa with Citigroup. Please go ahead.

Ari Rosa: So I know in reference to Bascome's question, you mentioned the normal seasonal trends from third quarter to fourth quarter. Was just wondering, it's been such a weird year. We've obviously seen some abnormal seasonal trends so. And then also how the wage increases play into that and kind of how much discretion you have around that and what's kind of plan, how much pressure that puts on the OR? Thanks.

Adam Satterfield: Yes. I mean, obviously, our costs will be going up. With respect to the wage increase. And third quarter, and then you got the full quarter effect in 4Q. But that's it's usually one point, one point type of increase if you look at that two fifty change that's going to be a big driver there. And but keep sounding like a broken record, I think it's just going to be revenue dependent. You know, the fourth quarter, if we can kind of continue to maintain our revenue per shipment or not revenue per shipment, but just revenue per day rather. In the same realm of where we are. We'll continue to manage our costs like we have.

And I think by the fourth quarter, would hope to see some of this increase that we've had in overall cost overhead cost rather. Start to come in a little bit. And so those are some other things that can help. But it's just continuing to manage our costs, manage our operating efficiencies, which our team is doing a great job. I kind of mentioned before, we're controlling our variable cost. We've got to continue to do that. And typically, you see volumes a little bit softer. In 4Q. So it just presents even more of a challenge to our ops team. But we just got to continue to stay disciplined really throughout all areas of the operation.

And everybody's got to participate, and we've to continue to manage our discretionary spending. And think through. If we're spending $1 what is the purpose behind it? And is it going to improve customer service? Is going to help us over the long term? And those types of investments we're willing to make. Even though we're trying to protect the short term we really got to think and we do think bigger picture and longer term for what's going to be to the best benefit of Old Dominion. Over the long run. And that's why you've continued to see us make investments and continue to execute on our CapEx program.

I've mentioned this three-year down cycle, but the end of this year, we'll have spent probably close to $2 billion on capital expenditures and to do so in a soft environment. That's created its fair share of cost headwinds to something that we've managed through. And I think we'll be happy that we've done these when we get on the other side of this economy. And you'll see that the leverage that can come through just like what we saw in the second quarter for that short-term benefit.

Operator: Thank you, Mr. Rosa. This will conclude our question and answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to Marty Freeman for any closing remarks.

Marty Freeman: All right. Well, you all for participating today. We appreciate your questions, and feel free to call us if you have anything further. Thanks, and have a great day. The conference has now concluded.

Operator: Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

This article is a transcript of this conference call produced for The Motley Fool. While we strive for our Foolish Best, there may be errors, omissions, or inaccuracies in this transcript. Parts of this article were created using Large Language Models (LLMs) based on The Motley Fool's insights and investing approach. It has been reviewed by our AI quality control systems. Since LLMs cannot (currently) own stocks, it has no positions in any of the stocks mentioned. As with all our articles, The Motley Fool does not assume any responsibility for your use of this content, and we strongly encourage you to do your own research, including listening to the call yourself and reading the company's SEC filings. Please see our Terms and Conditions for additional details, including our Obligatory Capitalized Disclaimers of Liability.

The Motley Fool has positions in and recommends Old Dominion Freight Line. The Motley Fool recommends the following options: long January 2026 $195 calls on Old Dominion Freight Line and short January 2026 $200 calls on Old Dominion Freight Line. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Alliance Resource Posts Q2 Earnings Miss

Key Points

  • Earnings per limited partner unit (GAAP) and revenue (GAAP) for Q2 2025 missed analyst expectations, with EPS at $0.46 and revenue at $547.5 million.

  • Coal sales volumes rose 6.8% to 8.4 million tons in Q2 2025, but the average coal sales price per ton declined 11.3% in Q2 2025.

  • The quarterly distribution was reduced 14.3% to $0.60 per unit for Q2 2025, citing after-tax cash flow and increased financial flexibility.

Alliance Resource Partners (NASDAQ:ARLP), a leading coal producer with growing oil and gas royalty assets, reported its second quarter results on July 28, 2025, covering the period that ended in June. The most significant news from the release was a decline in both earnings and revenue (GAAP) for Q2 2025 compared to market expectations and the same period last year. Earnings per limited partner unit (basic and diluted, GAAP) were $0.46, missing analyst expectations of $0.61 (GAAP) by 24.6%. Revenue (GAAP) finished at $547.5 million, short of the expected $578.7 million (GAAP) and down 7.7% from the prior year. Management attributed this underperformance to lower realized coal prices and a one-time $25.0 million impairment on a non-core investment. Still, the company highlighted strong contracting activity and improvement in shipment volumes as bright spots during an otherwise mixed quarter.

MetricQ2 2025Q2 2025 EstimateQ2 2024Y/Y Change
EPS (GAAP)$0.46$0.61$0.77(40.3%)
Revenue (GAAP)$547.5 million$578.7 million$593.4 million(7.7%)
Adjusted EBITDA$161.9 millionN/A$181.4 million(10.7%)
Free Cash Flow$79.0 millionN/A$114.9 million(31.2%)
Segment Adjusted EBITDA – Coal Operations$141.9 millionN/A$160.2 million(11.4%)

Source: Analyst estimates provided by FactSet. Management expectations based on management's guidance, as provided in Q1 2025 earnings report.

Business Overview and Recent Focus

Alliance Resource Partners is the second-largest coal producer in the eastern United States, operating multiple mines in both the Illinois Basin and Appalachia. The company also owns oil and gas mineral and royalty interests across top U.S. energy regions, including the Permian, Anadarko, and Williston Basins. Its core revenue comes from supplying coal to domestic electric utilities, especially through stable, long-term contracts.

Over the past year, Alliance has sharpened its focus on high-value, long-term sales commitments and has invested in technology and infrastructure to boost efficiency and broaden its future market reach. Key success factors include securing multi-year contracts, maintaining cost discipline, navigating regulatory shifts, and managing its customer concentration risk. These activities have been paired with careful expansion into oil and gas royalties and selected technology investments targeting infrastructure and grid support.

Quarter in Review: Financial and Operational Insights

The period saw a clear divergence between operational momentum and financial performance. While total coal sales volumes climbed 6.8% to 8.4 million tons, the average realized coal price fell 11.3% year over year. Management explained, “reduced coal sales prices, which declined 11.3% compared to Q2 2024, and lower transportation revenues, partially offset by increased coal sales volumes,” were the main drivers of revenue and earnings declines. Revenue (GAAP) fell short of analyst expectations, while net income was further impacted by a $25.0 million impairment on a preferred equity investment in a battery materials company.

Certain regions stood out. The Illinois Basin mines reported strong gains, with tons sold rising 15.2% year over year. This was helped by “Hamilton and River View mines achieving monthly shipping records in June.” Illinois Basin also saw operating cost improvements, as the Segment Adjusted EBITDA Expense per ton dropped 7.1% to $34.69. In contrast, Appalachia faced persistent cost and volume obstacles. Tons sold in Appalachia dropped 16.8% and the segment’s adjusted earnings shrank 35.1%, even as operations completed a key longwall move—a major underground mining process—at Tunnel Ridge, expected to improve output efficiency in future quarters.

Contracting activity was a highlight. The company added 17.4 million new committed and priced sales tons for delivery through 2029, bringing the year-to-date total to 35.1 million tons. This deep sales backlog increases forward visibility and supports steady production. Coal inventories dropped by 1.4 million tons to 1.2 million tons year over year.

Oil and gas royalty operations continued to help offset coal price weakness, though not completely. Volumes sold increased 7.7% year over year to 880,000 barrels of oil equivalent (BOE), but lower oil and gas prices resulted in a 4.4% year over year decline in adjusted segment earnings, emphasizing “the high-quality of our acreage position and organic growth potential embedded in our existing portfolio.” Digital asset investments, mainly bitcoin holdings, increased in value by $16.6 million, providing a modest offset against other non-core investment losses.

Strategic and Product Developments in the Quarter

During the period, Alliance expanded long-term sales commitments despite falling average prices. Management stated, “This brings our total of new commitments secured this year to 35.1 million tons to be delivered over the next four and a half years, underscoring the value our customers place on quality, reliability, and counterparty strength.” This backlog offers future revenue stability but does not immediately offset the quarter’s revenue miss.

On the product side, the Illinois Basin’s thermal coal -- coal primarily used for electricity generation -- led operational success in Q2 2025, with cost improvements resulting from “lower maintenance and materials and supplies costs at several mines in the region as well as reduced longwall move days.” Meanwhile, Appalachia’s performance continued to lag in Q1 2025, hindered by operational challenges that led to higher cost per ton, even after scheduled longwall moves. The company expects costs to decrease in the second half of 2025 as these mining panels transition to better geology.

Diversification efforts in oil and gas mineral and royalty interests showed mixed results. While volumes improved, realized prices fell, undercutting the benefit of volume gains. The segment kept Segment Adjusted EBITDA Expense (non-GAAP) flat year over year and reduced it sequentially, helping to buffer earnings. Capital spending for oil and gas remained limited by management’s strict investment standards and the challenging pricing environment for new mineral rights purchases.

Non-core strategic investments, such as those in battery materials and bitcoin mining, were a double-edged sword. The $25.0 million impairment on the battery materials investment was related to the conversion of preferred equity to common equity as part of a recapitalization during the quarter. Conversely, an increase in the fair value of digital assets, mainly bitcoin, partially offset other negatives, with most major projects at the company’s main mining operations now completed or nearing completion.

Looking Ahead: Guidance and Investor Considerations

The company updated its 2025 operational guidance with little change in overall coal sales targets but a notable shift in regional mix. Illinois Basin sales volumes were increased by 625,000 tons at the midpoint, while Appalachia’s outlook for FY2025 was reduced by 1.0 million tons due to ongoing operational challenges. Coal prices are expected to remain under pressure, with management forecasting stable margins largely thanks to cost control initiatives and the benefits of recent capital investments.

Oil and gas royalty volume guidance was increased about 5% at the midpoint for FY2025, but the company acknowledged ongoing risks from weaker commodity prices. Distribution coverage ratio (non-GAAP) declined to 1.00x in Q2 2025, down from 1.13x in Q2 2024, reflecting a thinner buffer between cash generation and dividends. The most immediate change for investors was the reduction in the quarterly distribution to $0.60 per unit (annualized $2.40) for Q2 2025, down from $0.70 previously. Management framed the dividend cut as a proactive move for financial flexibility, citing changes in bonus depreciation that increased the after-tax cash available to most unitholders, but the reduction is a departure from previous years’ payouts.

Revenue and net income presented using U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) unless otherwise noted.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

JesterAI is a Foolish AI, based on a variety of Large Language Models (LLMs) and proprietary Motley Fool systems. All articles published by JesterAI are reviewed by our editorial team, and The Motley Fool takes ultimate responsibility for the content of this article. JesterAI cannot own stocks and so it has no positions in any stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Why Garmin Stock Sank After Earnings Today

Key Points

  • Garmin's fitness products drove sales growth with a 41% year-over-year jump.

  • After a 20% rise in overall revenue last year, Garmin sees another 13% coming in 2025.

  • Even with the good news, Garmin shares look a little too pricey for some investors.

Global Positioning System (GPS) technology company Garmin (NYSE: GRMN) reported strong second-quarter earnings today and raised full-year guidance. It posted double-digit revenue gains in all five of its business segments.

Yet Garmin shares plunged as much as 8% on the news. As of 11:37 a.m. ET, the stock rebounded a bit but was still lower by 5.5%. With the company's sound and growing underlying business, the stock drop today may be an opportunity for investors.

Where to invest $1,000 right now? Our analyst team just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks to buy right now. Learn More »

Garmin sign on headquarters building.

Image source: Garmin.

Garmin's fitness category wins the race

Garmin reported a remarkable 41% revenue jump in its fitness segment. Management noted "strong demand for advanced wearables" driving fitness product sales. That led to an overall 20% revenue increase, compared to the year-ago period. Growth in adventure watches led its outdoor segment, while aviation, marine, and automotive sales also grew nicely.

The results led Garmin to increase its 2025 outlook for both sales and earnings per share (EPS). The new sales guidance would represent a 13% surge in revenue in 2025 after reporting 20% annual growth last year. EPS guidance moved from $7.80 to $8 per share.

Solid balance sheet

Cash flow was strong enough for the company to maintain a pristine balance sheet, even while paying its quarterly dividend and buying back shares in the second quarter. Cash and marketable securities remained at about $3.9 billion as of the end of Q2, with no debt. That represents 9% of Garmin's market cap.

Even with all that positive news, shares dropped today, as some investors took advantage of a recent surge in Garmin stock. Shares have jumped by more than 30% since early April, including today's drop.

It's not surprising that some investors wanted to lock in those gains. However, the business is firing on all cylinders and the future looks bright. Long-term investors should consider taking advantage of today's pullback by adding Garmin to their portfolios.

Should you invest $1,000 in Garmin right now?

Before you buy stock in Garmin, consider this:

The Motley Fool Stock Advisor analyst team just identified what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy now… and Garmin wasn’t one of them. The 10 stocks that made the cut could produce monster returns in the coming years.

Consider when Netflix made this list on December 17, 2004... if you invested $1,000 at the time of our recommendation, you’d have $630,291!* Or when Nvidia made this list on April 15, 2005... if you invested $1,000 at the time of our recommendation, you’d have $1,075,791!*

Now, it’s worth noting Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039% — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500. Don’t miss out on the latest top 10 list, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the 10 stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

Howard Smith has positions in Garmin and has the following options: short September 2025 $260 calls on Garmin. The Motley Fool has positions in and recommends Garmin. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

Illinois Tool Works ITW Q2 2025 Earnings Call

Image source: The Motley Fool.

DATE

  • Wednesday, July 30, 2025, at 10 a.m. EDT

CALL PARTICIPANTS

  • Chairman & Chief Executive Officer — Christopher A. O’Herlihy
  • Senior Vice President & Chief Financial Officer — Michael M. Larsen
  • Vice President, Investor Relations — Erin Linnihan

Need a quote from one of our analysts? Email [email protected]

TAKEAWAYS

  • Total Revenue: Increased 1% in Q2 2025, including a 1% positive impact from foreign currency translation, while product line simplification (PLS) reduced revenue by 1%.
  • GAAP EPS: GAAP EPS was $2.58 for Q2 2025, representing a second-quarter record, according to management's prepared remarks.
  • Operating Income: GAAP operating income was $1.1 billion for Q2 2025, also noted as a record for any second quarter.
  • Operating Margin: Achieved GAAP operating margin of 26.3% for Q2 2025, with enterprise initiatives contributing 130 basis points to operating margin.
  • Organic Growth Rate: Organic growth rate was essentially flat for Q2 2025; indicated as a sequential improvement of more than one percentage point in organic growth rate compared to Q1 2025.
  • Geographic Performance: Asia Pacific revenue up 9% in Q2 2025, with China up 15%; North America declined 2% organically in Q2 2025 and Europe fell 3% organically in Q2 2025.
  • Sequential Revenue Growth: Revenues increased 6% from Q1 to Q2, accompanied by incremental margins above 50% on a sequential basis.
  • Free Cash Flow: $449 million in free cash flow for Q2 2025, representing a 59% conversion rate, which management described as modestly below historical averages due to timing of one-time items.
  • Automotive OEM Segment Revenue: Up 4% in Q2 2025; organic growth was 2% in the quarter, offset by a more than 1% decline from PLS; North America declined 7% in Q2 2025, China grew 22% in the segment.
  • Automotive OEM Operating Margin: Increased 190 basis points sequentially to 21.3% for Automotive OEM in Q2 2025, the highest margin since 2021 in this segment.
  • Food Equipment Segment Revenue: Grew 1% organically; North America up 5% in the quarter, international revenue was down 5%.
  • Welding Segment Organic Growth: 3%, with equipment sales rising 4% in Q2 2025 and consumables up 1% in Q2 2025; segment operating margin remained at 33.1% for Q2 2025, flat year over year.
  • Polymers & Fluids Revenue: Polymers organic revenue down 5% in Q2 2025 and fluids plus automotive aftermarket organic revenue down 3% each in Q2 2025.
  • Construction Products Revenue: Fell 6% globally, including a 1% headwind from PLS; operating margin improved 140 basis points to 30.8% for Q2 2025 despite regional declines (North America -7%, Europe -5%, Australia/New Zealand -10%) in organic revenue.
  • Specialty Products Revenue: Grew 1% with flat organic growth; equipment sales rose 8% in Q2 2025; operating margin improved 70 basis points to 32.6% in Q2 2025.
  • Full-Year 2025 GAAP EPS Guidance: Raised GAAP EPS guidance by $0.10 at the midpoint to a range of $10.35 to $10.55 for FY2025.
  • Organic Growth Guidance: 0% to 2% for the full year, with total revenue projected up 1% to 3% for the year due to favorable foreign exchange rates.
  • Segment Expectations for Second Half: All seven segments are projected to grow revenue and improve margins in the second half of 2025 relative to the first half, with test and measurement and electronics expected to see the highest margin expansion.
  • Enterprise Initiatives: Projected to contribute at least 100 basis points to operating margin in the second half of 2025, independent of volume.
  • Guidance Assumptions: Management stated, “our projection factors in current demand levels, incremental pricing related to tariffs, our updated automotive build projections, and an easier year-over-year comparison in the second half of the year.”
  • PLS Headwind: Management confirmed a continued 1% headwind to organic growth for the full year 2025 due to product line simplification activities.

SUMMARY

Illinois Tool Works (NYSE:ITW) reported record operating income, GAAP EPS, and operating margin for Q2 2025, with results bolstered by operational efficiencies from enterprise initiatives and strategic pricing actions. The company raised full-year GAAP EPS guidance and expects continued revenue and margin improvement across all segments in the second half, projecting organic growth of 0%-2% and total revenue growth of 1%-3%. Geographically, China accounted for material outperformance, contributing 15% growth in the region and 22% growth in the Automotive OEM segment. Segment results highlighted exceptional operating margin expansion in Automotive OEM, Construction Products, and Specialty Products despite volume pressures and regional market declines. Management emphasized that both price actions and enterprise initiatives are the primary margin drivers for the year, with organic demand and end market conditions showing signs of stabilization, but no significant acceleration embedded in outlook assumptions.

  • Management stated that Pricing actions, while positive for EPS, were modestly dilutive to margin, with recovery of any margin impact described as a “timing issue.”
  • Chairman O’Herlihy explained that over 90% of what the company sells is produced where it is sold, minimizing direct tariff exposure and allowing for mitigation strategies in response to tariff uncertainty.
  • Management confirmed “enterprise initiatives were particularly effective, contributing 130 basis points to the operating margin.”
  • Customer-back innovation (CBI) was cited as a driver for segment outperformance, with management asserting that the CBI yield is tracking toward the 2.3%-2.5% annual goal.

INDUSTRY GLOSSARY

  • Product Line Simplification (PLS): Strategic discontinuation or streamlining of lower-margin, lower-growth, or non-core products to optimize the company’s portfolio for higher profitability and growth potential.
  • Customer-Back Innovation (CBI): A process focused on delivering organic growth by developing and launching new products in direct response to specific customer needs, typically measured as a percentage contribution to overall revenue growth.

Full Conference Call Transcript

Christopher A. O’Herlihy: Thank you, Erin, and good morning, everyone. As you saw in our press release this morning, the Illinois Tool Works Inc. team outpaced underlying end market growth and delivered solid financial performance in the second quarter. Total revenue increased 1%, as foreign currency translation increased revenue by 1% while product line simplification, or PLS, accounted for a 1% reduction. We achieved GAAP EPS of $2.58, operating income of $1.1 billion, and an operating margin of 26.3%, which are all second-quarter records. We continue to execute well in controlling the controllables, as evidenced by enterprise initiatives contributing 130 basis points to operating margin, and pricing actions that more than offset the tariff cost impact in the quarter.

Furthermore, I am very encouraged by the meaningful strategic progress we made in the first half of the year, diligently advancing our next phase growth priorities to make above-market organic growth powered by customer-back innovation a defining characteristic. We remain firmly on track to deliver on our 2030 performance goals, including customer-back innovation yield of 3% plus. These results are a direct testament to the strength of the Illinois Tool Works Inc. business model, the quality of our diversified and resilient portfolio, and the unwavering dedication of our global Illinois Tool Works Inc. colleagues to serving our customers and executing our strategy with excellence. Looking ahead, Illinois Tool Works Inc. is inherently built to outperform in uncertain and volatile environments.

Therefore, we are raising our full-year guidance, confident in our ability to successfully navigate the current environment and deliver differentiated performance through 2025 and beyond. I will now turn the call over to Michael to discuss our second quarter performance in more detail as well as our updated full-year guidance. Michael?

Michael M. Larsen: Thank you, Chris, and good morning, everyone. The Illinois Tool Works Inc. team achieved solid operational and financial performance in Q2. Our top line saw a 1% increase in total revenue, driven in part by a 1% positive impact from foreign currency translation. The organic growth rate was essentially flat, marking an improvement of over one percentage point from Q1. Geographically, while North America posted a 2% organic revenue decline and Europe was down 3%, Asia Pacific stood out with a 9% increase with impressive growth of 15% in China.

We experienced encouraging sequential revenue growth of 6% from Q1, along with some positive signs in end markets such as semiconductors, electronics, welding, specialty products, equipment, and an improved outlook for auto builds. On the other hand, more consumer-oriented end markets, notably construction products, remained challenging. The Illinois Tool Works Inc. team continued to demonstrate strong execution on all controllable factors, positively impacting our bottom line. Our enterprise initiatives were particularly effective this quarter, contributing 130 basis points to the operating margin of 26.3%. Although our decisive pricing actions more than cover tariff costs and positively impacted EPS in Q2, the overall price-cost dynamic was modestly dilutive to our margin.

Finally, we generated $449 million in free cash flow, representing a 59% conversion rate. Although this was modestly below our historical average, primarily due to the timing of certain one-time items, we're still on track to reach 100% plus conversion for the full year as planned. To summarize the quarter, we continued to significantly outperform our underlying end markets in a tough macro environment. Our solid financial performance includes organic growth of 1%, excluding PLS, incremental margin of 49%, operating margin of 26.3%, and GAAP EPS of $2.58. Let's turn to Slide four for a closer look at our sequential performance from Q1 to Q2, which was quite encouraging. Notably, we expanded operating margin sequentially, with three segments exceeding 30%.

Let's dive into our segment results, beginning with Automotive OEM. Revenue here was up 4%, driven by 2% organic growth in the quarter. Strategic PLS reduced revenue by over 1%. Regionally, while North America was down 7%, our local team continues to innovate and gain market share in the rapidly expanding EV market, with customer-back innovation efforts driving increased content per vehicle. We anticipate this strong momentum will carry into 2025 and beyond. For the full year, we project the Automotive OEM segment will outperform relevant industry builds by 200 to 300 basis points as we continue to consistently grow our content per vehicle.

More positive auto build forecasts are as follows: Worldwide auto builds are now projected to be about flat, with North American builds down mid-single digits and Europe down low single digits, partially offset by mid-single digit growth in China builds. Overall, our relevant markets are expected to be down in the low single digits in 2025, which is an improvement from the down mid-single digit projection in our prior guide. The bottom line performance was a significant highlight for Automotive OEM, with operating margin improving 190 basis points to 21.3%. This marks our highest margin since 2021, firmly placing us on track to achieve our long-term goal of low to mid-20s operating margin by next year.

Turning to Food Equipment on Slide five, revenue increased 2% with 1% organic growth. Equipment sales were flat, while our service business grew by 3%. Regionally, North America grew a solid 5%, driven by 4% growth in equipment and 6% in service. The growth was notably strong in the institutional end markets. International, however, was down 5%. For Test and Measurement and Electronics, revenue was up 1% as organic revenue saw a 1% decline. Demand for our test and measurement capital equipment continues to be challenging. However, we noted encouraging order activity late in the second quarter. Meanwhile, our electronics business grew 4%, fueled by heightened activity in the semiconductor-related businesses that achieved double-digit growth.

Despite being impacted by one-time items this quarter, operating margin is projected to recover to the mid- to high 20s in the second half. Moving to slide six, Welding was a bright spot, delivering 3% organic growth. Equipment sales increased 4% with strong new product contributions, while consumables grew 1%. These represent the highest growth rates for both businesses in two years. Industrial sales also increased 1%, with every region contributing to growth this quarter. North America was up 1%, and international sales grew 11%, largely driven by 28% growth in China, a direct result of new product introductions targeting the energy sector. Our 33.1% operating margin remained essentially flat year over year, demonstrating sustained strong profitability.

Revenue in Polymers and Fluids declined 3%, which included a percentage point headwind from PLS. Organic revenue was down 5% in polymers and 3% in both fluids and the more consumer-oriented automotive aftermarket. Let's look at construction products on slide seven. Global demand challenges led to a revenue decline of 6% in markets we estimate are down even more significantly and were further impacted by a 1% reduction from strategic PLS. Regionally, organic revenues in North America declined 7%, Europe was down 5%, and Australia and New Zealand decreased 10%. However, despite these persistent market headwinds, the segment demonstrated remarkable resilience, improving its operating margin by 140 basis points to 30.8%, a testament to strong execution in a difficult environment.

For specialty products, revenue increased 1% with flat organic revenue this quarter due to a challenging 7% organic growth comparison with last year. Revenue also included over one percentage point from strategic PLS. On a positive note, equipment sales, which rose 8%, were fueled by sustained strength in our packaging and aerospace equipment businesses. Operating margin improved 70 basis points to 32.6%, significantly benefiting from enterprise initiatives. With that, let's move to Slide eight for an update on our full-year 2025 guidance. We've often reiterated our high confidence in successfully navigating challenging macroeconomic conditions and delivering solid financial performance.

Our decision to raise GAAP EPS guidance by $0.10 at the midpoint, narrowing the range to $10.35 to $10.55, serves as clear evidence of this capability. We're well-positioned to outperform our end markets and continue to project organic growth of 0% to 2%. Per our usual process, our projection factors in current demand levels, incremental pricing related to tariffs, our updated automotive build projections, and an easier year-over-year comparison in the second half of the year. Total revenue is now projected to be up 1% to 3%, reflecting current more favorable foreign exchange rates.

As we look at the second half, we fully expect to continue to execute at our usual high level on all the key profitability drivers within our control. This includes already implemented pricing actions, which we project will more than offset tariff costs and favorably impact EPS. Additionally, we expect our enterprise initiatives to contribute 100 basis points or more to the operating margin independent of volume. Notably, all seven of our segments are projected to grow revenue and improve margins in the second half relative to the first half. Our full-year GAAP EPS cadence remains consistent. We expect 47% in the first half and 53% in the second half.

This reflects our typical business seasonality, along with expected benefits in the second half from stronger pricing and more favorable foreign exchange rates. Implied in our guidance is solid second-half financial performance with reasonable organic growth, substantial margin improvement, and strong free cash flows. To wrap up, we're confident that the inherent strength and resilience of the Illinois Tool Works Inc. business model, coupled with our high-quality, diversified business portfolio and, crucially, our dedicated people, equip us to decisively and effectively manage the current environment, no matter how it evolves, all while steadfastly pursuing our long-term enterprise strategy. Erin, I'll turn it back to you.

Erin Linnihan: Thank you, Michael. Janine, will you please open the call for questions and answers?

Operator: Thank you. At this time, I would like to remind everyone to ask a question. Please press star and then the number one on your telephone keypad. Your first question comes from the line of Tami Zakaria from JPMorgan. Please go ahead.

Tami Zakaria: I just wanted to ask about the new operating margin outlook. I think you reduced it at the midpoint. I just wanted to get some color on it. Are price increases causing more than expected volume headwind, which is driving the reduced operating margin outlook? Or is there anything that you didn't anticipate but now are seeing and are expecting for the back half? So any color on what's driving that outlook versus the last time you spoke?

Michael M. Larsen: Yes, Tami. It's a pretty straightforward answer. Essentially, while our price actions to offset tariffs have been quite successful and we are ahead on a dollar-for-dollar basis, as you know, that can mean that it is still dilutive from a margin standpoint, which is what I mentioned in the prepared remarks. That price cost was modestly margin dilutive in Q2. And so that's really what's driving it.

And I think just taking a step back, if you look at the last time we were together, we said that we expected price cost to be neutral or better, and I think our teams have done a great job putting us in a position where these price actions are EPS positive in the updated margin guidance. Now that, to us, is just a timing issue. We will recover that margin just like we did, whether that happens by the end of the year or next year, you know, I think is a little uncertain at this point. But we will offset the cost impact and eventually recuperate the margin impact as well.

So that's what you're seeing in our updated margin guidance.

Tami Zakaria: Got it. That's very helpful color. And a follow-up on the auto segment specifically. I think margins came in at least better than what I was modeling. So as I think about the back half, should we expect sequential improvement versus Q2?

Michael M. Larsen: I think we're very pleased with the progress in our automotive segment, both on the top line in the quarter and the improved outlook for the back half. And also on the margin side. 21.3%, an improvement of 190 basis points. I think as you look forward into the balance of the year, I think we'll be solidly above 20% both for the second half and likely for the full year as well, which puts us in a great position to reach our long-term goal, kind of a low to mid-20s, you know, sometime next year.

Christopher A. O’Herlihy: I just support that, Tami. The other thing I would say on auto is that when we looked at our auto margins back at Investor Day, we forecast that we get ongoing significant contributions from enterprise initiatives and from higher margin innovation. And that's very much what's playing out here in 2025.

Tami Zakaria: Understood. Thank you.

Operator: Thank you. Our next question comes from the line of Jamie Cook from Truist Securities.

Jamie Cook: Hi. Good morning. I guess two questions. It sounds like on CBI, you guys think you're doing you're sort of gaining traction there. So can you help me understand outside of automotive where you're seeing the most success? And do we still expect CBI to contribute the 2.3% to 2.5% that you initially laid out? And then I guess my second question, just a follow-up, Michael, just what's implied in the new guide in terms of FX? I know initially it was, I think, a negative $0.30 headwind and it went neutral last quarter. Just trying to understand what's implied in the new updated guidance.

Michael M. Larsen: Let me answer the FX question. So, basically, what we've incorporated now are current foreign exchange rates. And so we've gone from anticipating a significant headwind going into the year to now expecting some modest favorability based on rates as we sit here today. Now I say modest because on a year-over-year basis, you know, the contribution to EPS in Q2, for example, was about $0.03 a share. So we're not talking about a huge tailwind from foreign exchange, but that's kind of the modeling assumption. Current foreign exchange rates and assuming that they stay where they are, which obviously can change quickly as we've seen this year. And with that up, on the CBI side, Chris?

Christopher A. O’Herlihy: Sure. So, Jamie, on CBI, we're certainly encouraged by the progress that we're making across the company. Great pipeline of new products really across all seven segments. It's one of the reasons that we would say we're outperforming our end markets at the enterprise level. Several successful product launches this year across the portfolio. You asked for some segment color. I would say welding has been a standout. You've seen that in terms of, you know, welding growth of 3%. We believe our CBI contribution in welding is above 3% right now.

But also, food equipment where we continue to have product launches across all our product categories, you know, all real tangible areas like energy and water savings, and then automotive where we see it particularly in China, we're certainly growing market share through CBI. So off to a solid start here in 2025. To your question, well on track to deliver on our CBI yield goal of 2.3% to 2.5% this year.

Operator: Okay. Thank you. Thank you. Our next question comes from the line of Andy Kaplowitz from Citigroup. Your line is open.

Andy Kaplowitz: Chris or Michael, you mentioned encouraging sequential growth of 6%. I think usually you get a couple percentage points of growth sequentially Q1 to Q2. I think you had one extra selling day, if I remember correctly, for Q2. But would you say you're seeing incremental continued improvement in short cycle businesses such as semicon that you saw last quarter? And how are your longer cycle customers? What are the conversations like? You mentioned welding a little bit better. You mentioned test and measurement getting better at the end of Q2. Maybe give a little more color on that.

Michael M. Larsen: Yes. I think, Andy, those are fair points on the sequentials. I think really the point of putting that slide in there was that this is certainly not a company that's slowing down. We were really encouraged. You know, if you look back to where we were on the last earnings call, we're talking about the slowdown and some real concerns around tariffs. I think at this point, we're talking about some really encouraging positive momentum. And you can see what happens when you get just a little bit of growth, you know, 6% growth, you equate it to 12% income growth on a sequential basis. Incremental margins sequentially are above 50%. And year over year, 49%.

So that was really the point that we were trying to make here. I think we still see some challenges, as you heard, as we went through the segment on the consumer-oriented side. Construction product is the obvious one, which I think is not gonna be a surprise to anybody at this point. A little bit of softness, maybe in automotive aftermarket, which in polymers and fluids, which also tends to be more consumer-oriented, but also some positive signs as we went through the quarter in the kind of the more general industrial CapEx space. We saw order activity really pick up in test and measurement.

Towards the end of the quarter, we saw a significant increase in the number of big orders that were taken last quarter. We saw some good progress also in welding. We talked about the growth rates there. Semi, which is a fairly small percentage of our total revenues, about 3%, I think it is last time we looked at it, growing double digits. And so that's really what we want to try to highlight, that there are some positive things going on here. The automotive build forecast improved. And I think all those things are obviously not just market tailwinds, but it's all the work that we're doing around customer-back innovation and new products to gain market share.

And if you were an optimist, you would say we're seeing the first encouraging signs that this is really working. And it gives us a lot of confidence not only going into the back half of the year but also going into next year and the commitments we've made in terms of our long-term performance goals that even when macro conditions are maybe not very supportive of the growth that we're trying to achieve, we're still delivering solid performance and in a position where halfway through the year we can raise our guidance. So that's how I would characterize it, Andy.

Andy Kaplowitz: Michael, to that point, you've always been good in China, but it seems like you're getting better, you know, particularly in China automotive. Chris talked about CBI. You know, if I look by region, China is just such a standout versus your other regions, especially versus other industrial peers. So is it really just CBI or maybe it's just China EV? You know, is there anything that you can do for the other geographies to really sort of support or improve that growth and maybe the durability? I think you just answered it, Michael. Durability in China seems there.

Christopher A. O’Herlihy: Yeah, Andy, and I would just add to that you know, we would certainly see you saw a 15% growth in China, 22% in automotive. But the growth is really sustainable for a number of reasons and not just automotive. Our business in China across all segments is highly differentiated. The proof point that I would offer here is that you know, our margins in China are at the same level as North America or Western Europe. Which really speaks to the whole kind of focus on differentiation. We have very strong customer-back innovation efforts in China. China actually generates a disproportionate percent of our patents, protecting customer solutions. We have these very strong long-lasting customer partnerships in China.

As an example, our auto business in China has been there close to thirty years. A reminder, again, produce in China for the China market. But last, and I say by no means least, you know, we have a very highly tenured, highly talented, and experienced leadership team who are Illinois Tool Works Inc. business model experts and who execute for the company every day. So we really feel well-positioned across all seven segments in China. Innovation is certainly a part of it, but I think our customer relationships, the quality of our team, and most importantly, our focus on sustainable differentiation is really what underpins future growth prospects in China.

Andy Kaplowitz: Thanks, guys.

Operator: Thank you. Our next question comes from the line of Julian Mitchell from Barclays. Your line is open.

Julian Mitchell: Oh, yes. Hi. Good morning. Maybe just my first question, trying to understand the sort of FX dynamics in the EPS guide. I think maybe sort of versus the beginning of the year, there's about a $0.03 to $0.04 tailwind to EPS from the FX change. What are sort of the offsets in that sort of blunting that because the drop through to the overall EPS guide is much smaller, and I think price cost is dollar positive.

Michael M. Larsen: I think, Julian, we're still taking a fairly cautious approach here. I think as we said in Chris' opening remarks, I mean, we remain in a really uncertain and pretty volatile environment where things can change quickly, whether it be the tariff environment or foreign exchange rates. And so, I think the reason why you're not seeing us take guidance up by $0.30 is exactly that, that, you know, we're maintaining an appropriately conservative approach here given the current macro conditions that we're dealing with. And I would say given, again, the conditions that we're dealing with, you know, we feel pretty good about the type of performance that we're putting up.

And the confidence that we're trying to convey in the second half, which, you know, based on everything I talked about, you know, we're gonna be putting up some reasonable organic growth implied in our guidance is kind of 2% to 3% organic growth, 100 basis points plus of margin improvement year over year in the back half. Really strong incremental margins, and also really strong free cash flows. So given the conditions we're dealing with, we feel like we're in a pretty good position here going into the back half of the year.

Julian Mitchell: That's helpful. Thank you, Michael. And then maybe just a second one, kind of trying to follow-up on sort of within the back half, third versus fourth quarter. I'm yeah. I know there was a little bit of conversation of that already. But any sort of shift in terms of demand patterns let's say, in recent weeks into Q3, and when you're thinking about that price cost margin headwind, how are we thinking about that in sort of the third versus the fourth quarter? Maybe just sort of flesh out anything about that, please.

Michael M. Larsen: I think, Julian, I mean, from Q3 to Q4 is kind of our typical sequentials. You know, we typically, revenues go up a little bit from Q2 to Q3 and into Q4. The kind of the traditional run rates are not as accurate as usual because of all the price that we're getting. So if you think about these price-related tariff-related price increases, those are really only starting to flow through here in Q3 and Q4. And so that's why we're effectively guiding to something that's a little above our typical run rate.

But, again, we should expect, like we talked about on the last call, good sequential improvement from Q2 into Q3, Q3 into Q4, both, you know, really on all the key elements here, the top line, margin improvement. I think we talked about every segment improving margins. And revenue. In the second half relative to the first half. And that's not assuming a pickup in demand. That's basically, like I said, current run rates, it's the price. Current FX rates, which I think you asked about. And then an updated outlook for automotive, and then a more, you know, about half a point of easier comps. In the back half of the year.

So you put all that together, that's how we end up with a pretty solid second half. Just to wrap up your question around what did you see in Q2, nothing really unusual going through the quarter other than in June, June was our strongest month. It typically is. And then some of these more positive signs that we talked about around some of the order activity, in the CapEx equipment businesses became more encouraging as we went through towards the end of the quarter.

Julian Mitchell: That's great. Thank you.

Michael M. Larsen: Sure.

Operator: Thank you. Our next question comes from the line of Stephen Volkmann from Jefferies. Your line is open.

Stephen Volkmann: Good morning, guys. Thank you. Good morning. I guess I'm trying to say I know you don't like to talk in too much detail about this, but I'm assuming in your 0% to 2% organic, your volumes must be down like low to mid-single digits or something. And the reason I'm curious about that is because, obviously, you're putting up pretty good incrementals on lower volumes, I guess. So I'm trying to think about when volumes do come back, you know, did the enterprise initiatives mean we'll have higher incremental margins, or how should I think about that? Sorry. It's a little complicated.

Michael M. Larsen: No. That's okay. Let me just start by saying that your volume assumptions are not entirely correct. Even though we don't guide volume versus price. And then your second point, we put up incremental margins of 49% year over year in Q2. And that is, you know, some of these price cost actions related to tariffs are basically coming through at a fairly low incremental. So if that's the case, you have to believe that the core incrementals are significantly higher at this point in time relative to our kind of historical 35-40%. And I think you can see in a couple of places here, you know, automotive is maybe the better example this quarter.

What happens when we get just a little bit of growth? I mean, with 2% organic, margins are up 190 basis points. And so you look at the sequential growth and incrementals from Q1 to Q2. So to answer your question, it's reasonable to assume that incrementals are above historical and you'll see some of that in the second half. But we expect, you know, reasonable kind of two to 3% organic growth with some very strong incrementals.

Christopher A. O’Herlihy: And, Steve, over the past two the long term, the incremental is strong incremental is predominantly driven by the quality of the portfolio and continuous improvement in the quality of the portfolio and execution of the business model against that portfolio. Is ultimately what drives the incremental hire.

Stephen Volkmann: Got it. Okay. Thank you. And then maybe specifically on construction, sort of amazing to see a 140 bps of growth on 6% decline in revenue. And doesn't look like there was a geographic mix issue there. Was that all just kind of enterprise or CBI or there some sort of mix there? Is it any detail there would be great.

Michael M. Larsen: Yeah. I mean, the biggest driver is as usual are the enterprise initiatives. We're well above company average. At about 150 basis points. So that's really the key driver. I think that, yeah, we agree with you that the fact that have a construction business that, you know, for over a year has been putting up margins in that 29, 30% range in some of the most challenging end markets that we've seen in a long time is pretty remarkable. And I think the team, frankly, gets a lot of credit for trying to find a way to make the best of a tough macro. So yeah.

And all underpinned with great brands and technology, very focused on the most attractive parts of the construction market.

Stephen Volkmann: Got it. Alright. Thank you, guys.

Michael M. Larsen: Thank you.

Operator: Thank you. Our next question comes from the line of Mig Dobre from Baird. Sir, please go ahead.

Mig Dobre: Yes. Thank you for taking the question, and good morning. Good morning. Q2 was just such a strange quarter, not so much in your reporting, but just the broader backdrop. Right? I mean, we started in April with Liberation Day and a lot of volatility, I guess, in the financial markets, and then we exited feeling very different. And I'm kind of curious how your business experienced all of this. Have you at any point in time through the quarter, maybe actually felt an economic effect from this tariff uncertainty? And, obviously, the quarter of all in on a surface looked fine.

So I'm wondering about the cadence and the reason why I'm asking the question is because if we end up with another wave of disruption related to these tariffs, based on your learnings from Q2, how disruptive do you think that could end up being?

Christopher A. O’Herlihy: Yeah. So, Mig, I would say that just, I suppose, as a reminder, and you characterized Q2 very accurately in terms of how it played out. But from our standpoint, and particularly relating to the tariffs, we go back to the point that we're over 90% produced what we sell. So the direct impact of tariffs is largely mitigated. And to the extent that we need to get price, you know, both in 2018 and in this past round, you know, tariffs were manageable for us. And based on what we know today and even if tariffs were increased, we'd expect the tariff cost to be manageable going forward.

Certainly, we would hold to our EPS neutral or better, I'd say, no matter what happens in here on.

Mig Dobre: Okay. But you didn't experience that whole customer freezing up or anything of the sort as they were seeking for more clarity. That was just not a factor in your business, you're saying?

Christopher A. O’Herlihy: Yeah. There was a little bit of that in one segment. We have one segment where we have some shipments to China from the US, particularly relating to customer requests for us to do it that way. And certainly, you know, with the enormous China tariffs at the beginning of the quarter, there certainly was a freeze. And that has now freed up since then. And also, we've had several, you know, through our read and react capabilities in our businesses, we've been able to read and react very successfully to that. If it was to happen again, we'd have mitigation plans in place where it wouldn't be as much of an issue.

Mig Dobre: Got it. And my follow-up, if I may, just kind of a bigger picture capital allocation. Question. I'd love to hear as to how you're thinking about your M&A pipeline and in terms of returning capital to shareholders if M&A is not available for whatever reason, is there an argument to be made for taking a more aggressive approach at this point in a cycle where maybe you're dealing with lower growth, knowing that obviously, as growth reaccelerates, eventually, you'll be able to hopefully create some value with more aggressive buybacks in this lower part of the cycle. Thank you.

Christopher A. O’Herlihy: Yeah. So with respect to M&A, Mig, what I would say is that, first and foremost, we're very confident in our the ability of our current portfolio to grow at four plus over time. And so we feel comfortable in really sticking to our disciplined portfolio management around M&A. We've got a very clear well-defined view of what we think fits our strategy. So it's just a matter of us finding the right opportunities, you know, focused on those high-quality acquisitions that could extend our long-term growth potential to grow at a minimum at 4% plus at high quality while being able to leverage the business model to improve margins. That's typically how we think about these things.

Now we do review opportunities on an ongoing basis, but we continue to be very selective. And very selective being mindful of the fact that we've got all this organic growth potential that we're working on. We're very active in terms of reviewing M&A opportunities to the extent that we find the right opportunities, then will certainly be appropriately aggressive in pursuing them. I would say. And, you know, obviously, MTS was one that we did. That's the criteria we use to evaluate and to acquire MTS, and it's proved to be a really great acquisition for us on that basis.

And that's the lens by which we look at acquisitions, remaining selective, but appropriately aggressive when we see the right ones.

Michael M. Larsen: And I would just add on to the other elements of our capital allocation strategy, Mig, we obviously constantly review, debate, discuss our strategy and we are still coming to the conclusion that it's pretty optimal. And pretty well aligned with our enterprise strategy with the number one priority being the internal investments to support all the organic growth initiatives that are going on inside the company and maintain core profitability in these highly differentiated core businesses. We have an attractive dividend. You look at our payout ratio, we're probably and rightfully so, towards the higher end of the peer group just given our margins and our best-in-class balance sheet and highest credit rating in the peer group.

We'll continue to grow that dividend in line with long-term earnings. And then we allocate surplus cash to the buybacks, which is about $1.5 billion this year, about 2% of our outstanding shares. And so as we sit here today, we feel like we've optimized this. And as Chris said, we'd love to do M&A, you know, given the criteria that Chris outlined. And as you know, this is it's not an easy market, you know, given often the valuations are what's making this pretty challenging.

Mig Dobre: Understood. Thank you.

Operator: Thank you. Our next question comes from the line of Sabrina Abrams from Bank of America.

Sabrina Abrams: Hey, good morning. I think my understanding was that there would be some more restructuring in the first half. So I think there were comments about 80% of the full year 15% to 20% zero $15 to zero $20 headwind in the first half. So I guess just looking at the components of the margin bridge, it doesn't seem like we had I think restructuring year over year was a tailwind. This quarter, and there wasn't a ton in 1Q. So just any color you could provide on restructuring this year how it's changed? Is that still the right full year number? And how is the cadence evolved relative to your expectations? Thank you.

Michael M. Larsen: Yeah. Hey, Sabrina. So I think restructuring with everything going on in the quarter, a couple of things did move around. At the end of the day, we ended up spending $20 million in the first half of this year, which is the same as what we spent in the first half of last year. These are all projects tied to kind of our 80-20 front-to-back process, all projects with less than a one-year payback. We had a few projects that just from a timing standpoint moved into July. Those have been approved and are well underway. We expect that we'll spend about, you know, another $20 million here or 5¢ a share.

So it's pretty small relative to our overall earnings. We'll spend about $20 million here in the second half and on a year-over-year basis, that will be about flat year over year.

Sabrina Abrams: Okay. Thank you so much.

Michael M. Larsen: Sure.

Sabrina Abrams: And then just how much PLS is in the guide this year? I think there was a 100 bps this quarter. I think there was 50 bps in 1Q. I think you started the year with a 100 bps of PLS in the guide. Just how are we thinking about that now?

Michael M. Larsen: Yeah. That's unchanged. We still have a fair bit of activity in as you saw this quarter in automotive, specialty, as well as construction. And so we're still at about a percentage point of headwind to the organic growth rate from strategic PLS. But, obviously, huge tailwind in terms of positioning the portfolio for future growth as well as if you look at the margin improvement in the segment that I just talked about, you can see kind of the benefits associated with these PLS efforts.

Operator: Thank you. Thank you. Our next question comes from the line of Joe O'Dea from Wells Fargo. Your line is open.

Joe O'Dea: Hi. Good morning. First one, on margins and second half of the year. And when we look at sort of the walk from Q2 into the back half, about a 100 bps improvement. Can you just outline the cadence of that? Is that sort of 50 bps sequentially over the back half of the year in each quarter is kind of reasonable? And then be driving that, presumably test and measurements are the ones where we should see the biggest contribution.

Michael M. Larsen: That's exactly right. Test and measurement is the biggest step up sequentially from the first half into the second half. I'd rather the segments that are above 30% already, you know, kind of in the you know, we got three you know, at 33, 31, 33%. You know, you may not see the same type of step up in those. But other than that, pretty broad-based. And we expect some sequential improvement from, like I said, from Q2 into Q3 with also some improvement on a year-over-year basis. And then, frankly, a slightly bigger step up in Q4 on the margin front on a year-over-year basis.

So you take all of that this is implied in our guidance, so I'm not telling you something you couldn't figure out yourself as, you know, that's external operating margins of about 27% in the back half of the year. And that's with some reasonable improvement year over year. These are improvements on already best-in-class operating margins with not a whole lot of help from macro conditions. And that's why we talk about these being such differentiated results. There are without bragging, there are not many companies that could put up this type of margin performance given the top line and the macro that we're dealing with.

And just look at the incremental margins this quarter and implied for the full year.

Joe O'Dea: Got it. That's helpful. And then wanted to come back to some of the more kind of CapEx order activity that you're talking about and maybe specifically on welding and just trying to parse kind of CBI and share versus underlying end market. I think a lot of what we hear out there is MRO trends are stable. Bigger spend projects, elongation, between quote to order, it doesn't really sound like in broad strokes we're hearing much of a sequential acceleration. Sounds like you're seeing it a little bit more. You know, early days.

But the degree to which, you know, you can talk through some of the end markets within welding, what you're hearing from those customers, versus kind of CBI, and that's really the answer to the better growth.

Christopher A. O’Herlihy: Yes. In short, Joe, I would say CBI is the better to the growth. And we see some pickup in activity on the industrial side, but in general, the big driver of our growth and building right now is CBI.

Michael M. Larsen: Yeah. And I'd just go back to what we talked about earlier. I think the more consumer-oriented businesses certainly are dealing with some more challenging end market conditions. The general industrial, more CapEx, you know, set aside some of the delays that Chris talked about early in the quarter when those kind of peak tariffs angst. I think we're seeing some positive signs in general industrial, in the semi space, as well as in automotive. But, you know, these are short cycle businesses. Things can change very quickly. We're dealing with a pretty challenging underlying market demand. You know, we estimate our end markets on average are down three to four. And we're holding organic flat.

We improved the organic growth rate sequentially from Q1 to Q2. So that's kind of the environment that we're dealing with. And so that's why it's so important that we continue to do what we said we were gonna do from an execution standpoint and continue to make progress on the enterprise initiatives and the things we can control, including CBI, price cost, and so forth.

Joe O'Dea: Okay. Great color there. One last quick one. Just China really strong growth in auto. Just talk a little bit about other parts of China exposure?

Michael M. Larsen: Yeah. I think China was up 15%, as I said in the prepared remarks. I mean, the biggest driver by far is the automotive business, but there's also some solid double-digit growth in test and measurements, polymers of fluids, and welding. And where we're seeing this is in the businesses that have the highest contribution from new products. So there's a real correlation here in terms of being able to outperform end markets is really a result of great progress on CBI. And I think maybe that explains there was a question earlier in terms of our performance in China and not seeing the same results in other with some of our peers, and maybe that's part of the explanation.

Joe O'Dea: Thank you.

Operator: Thank you. Our last question comes from the line of Steven Fisher from UBS. Your line is open.

Steven Fisher: Just to follow-up on one of those last questions there. I mean, in terms of the pickup maybe at the end of the quarter and some of the capital, I guess just to achieve the 2% to 3% organic growth that you have in the second half, are you guys assuming that there will be a continuation of some of that strong order levels that you saw at the end of the quarter? Or is it really just sort of that was kind of a one-time thing? Or I'm guessing if it's really CBI, as you said, you would think it would be maybe a continuation, but just curious how you'd frame that.

Michael M. Larsen: Yeah. I'd go back, Steve, to kind of our usual process for giving guidance, is based on current levels of demand in our businesses. We have more price than usual coming through in the back half associated with these tariffs. Have some easier comps in the second half than we did in the first half by about half a point. But we're not factoring in any further acceleration from current levels of demand. And so if that were to happen, that'd be great news. That would suggest that our guidance is conservative. If we have another round of tariffs, as somebody suggested, and things slow down, then that would be bad news.

But overall, I think as we sit here today, we are confidently raising our guidance, and we're well-positioned for a solid second half, as I think we said earlier.

Steven Fisher: Okay. Terrific. And then just to follow-up on the CBI and I think maybe Chris mentioned three plus percent in the long term, 2030. Do you still think of CBI and net market penetration as two separate growth buckets? And if so, can you sort of help us differentiate between these two things? I think you had a 1% to 2% target on net market penetration and 2% to 3% on CBI in the longer-term targets?

Christopher A. O’Herlihy: Yeah. Steve, we bucket them differently, CBI and net market. And the way we think about it is that, you know, CBI is revenue new product revenue in the next three years. After that, it's market penetration. And so the way to think about it is that the CBI revenues of today into the market penetration revenues of the future. It's kind of how we think about it.

Steven Fisher: Okay. Terrific. Thank you very much.

Michael M. Larsen: Thank you.

Operator: Thank you for participating in today's conference call. All lines may disconnect at this time.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

This article is a transcript of this conference call produced for The Motley Fool. While we strive for our Foolish Best, there may be errors, omissions, or inaccuracies in this transcript. Parts of this article were created using Large Language Models (LLMs) based on The Motley Fool's insights and investing approach. It has been reviewed by our AI quality control systems. Since LLMs cannot (currently) own stocks, it has no positions in any of the stocks mentioned. As with all our articles, The Motley Fool does not assume any responsibility for your use of this content, and we strongly encourage you to do your own research, including listening to the call yourself and reading the company's SEC filings. Please see our Terms and Conditions for additional details, including our Obligatory Capitalized Disclaimers of Liability.

The Motley Fool recommends Illinois Tool Works. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

First Hawaiian Posts Q2 Profit Beat

Key Points

  • GAAP earnings per share of $0.58 in Q2 2025 exceeded analyst expectations by $0.09.

  • Revenue (GAAP) rose to $217.5 million, beating estimates.

  • Non-performing assets rose to $28.6 million, while the company maintained strong capital ratios and continued share buybacks and stable dividends.

First Hawaiian (NASDAQ:FHB), the largest full-service bank headquartered in Hawaii, released its Q2 2025 results on July 25, 2025. The company reported GAAP earnings per share of $0.58, outpacing analyst estimates of $0.49 (GAAP). Revenue (GAAP) reached $217.5 million, also topping expectations, with both GAAP EPS and revenue exceeding analyst estimates. The quarter was marked by notable improvements across key profitability measures, tight expense control, and a continued strong capital position. However, there are signs of rising non-performing assets, a trend the bank and analysts are watching closely. Overall, the results were better than expected and reflect continued operational execution from the bank.

MetricQ2 2025Q2 2025 EstimateQ2 2024Y/Y Change
Diluted EPS$0.58$0.49$0.4820.8%
Net Interest Income$163.6 millionN/A$152.9 million7.0%
Revenue$217.5 million$213.96 million$204.6 million6.3%
Efficiency Ratio57.2%N/A59.2%(2.0) pp
Return on Average Tangible Assets (Non-GAAP)1.28%N/A1.08%0.20 pp

Source: Analyst estimates for the quarter provided by FactSet.

Understanding First Hawaiian’s Core Business and Strategy

First Hawaiian operates as the leading full-service regional bank in Hawaii. Its offerings span traditional retail and commercial banking, wealth management, and payment services. With $23.8 billion in total assets, the bank serves both consumers and businesses mainly across Hawaii, Guam, and Saipan.

The bank’s success relies on its deep local presence and relationship-based approach, combined with a focus on maintaining financial strength and meeting regulatory capital requirements. Recent efforts have concentrated on defending its market position, growing deposits and loans, and managing costs while investing in staff and technology. As well as adaptation to local economic conditions, these remain vital to its ongoing performance.

Key Events and Performance Drivers in the Quarter

The quarter saw First Hawaiian earn more on its assets relative to the interest paid on deposits and borrowings. Revenue also benefited from a $3.5 million sequential increase in noninterest income, reflecting contributions from services such as wealth management and card fees.

Expense control was a standout, as the efficiency ratio improved to 57.23%, down from 59.22% a year ago. Return on average tangible stockholders’ equity (non-GAAP), a key profitability metric, climbed to 17.61%. A notable one-time event was a $5.1 million benefit to income taxes from a change in the California tax code, lowering the effective tax rate to 16.9%. Capital ratios stayed well above regulatory minimums, with common equity Tier 1 at 13.03 % and total capital at 14.28 %.

Across business segments, loan growth was modest but positive, with total loans and leases at $14.4 billion as of June 30, 2025, up 0.4% from the prior quarter. Deposit balances remained stable at $20.2 billion. While residential lending and construction loans saw slight declines, the bank maintained a diversified loan book, including real estate, construction, consumer, and lease financing.

Credit quality remains sound, but with early caution signals. Non-performing assets -- or loans displaying signs of credit distress -- rose to $28.6 million, up from $18.0 million a year ago. Allowance for credit losses, measures set aside for potential loan defaults, stood firm at 1.17% of loans as of June 30, 2025, higher than 1.11% at year-end 2024. Net charge-offs, or loans that the bank does not expect to collect, totaled $3.3 million. On the shareholder front, First Hawaiian repurchased 1.04 million shares for $25.0 million and First Hawaiian continued to pay a $0.26 per-share quarterly dividend, with a payout ratio of 44.83%.

Looking Ahead: Guidance and Factors to Watch

Management did not provide explicit forward guidance for the coming quarters or full fiscal year. The company did, however, express a cautiously positive view, noting stable loan demand, steady deposits, and manageable risks.

Investors should continue to monitor asset quality trends, especially as non-performing assets have increased, and pay attention to the bank’s performance in its core Hawaii, Guam, and Saipan markets. Capital and liquidity remain strong, but management noted ongoing uncertainty in the macroeconomic and regulatory environment. The quarterly dividend was held flat at $0.26 per share.

Revenue and net income presented using U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) unless otherwise noted.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

JesterAI is a Foolish AI, based on a variety of Large Language Models (LLMs) and proprietary Motley Fool systems. All articles published by JesterAI are reviewed by our editorial team, and The Motley Fool takes ultimate responsibility for the content of this article. JesterAI cannot own stocks and so it has no positions in any stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •  

First Interstate (FIBK) Q2 2025 Earnings Call

Logo of jester cap with thought bubble.

Image source: The Motley Fool.

DATE

Tuesday, July 29, 2025 at 12:00 a.m. ET

CALL PARTICIPANTS

Chief Executive Officer — Jim Reuter

Chief Financial Officer — David Della Camera

Investor Relations — Nancy Vermeulen

Need a quote from one of our analysts? Email [email protected]

TAKEAWAYS

Net Income: $71.7 million, or $0.69 per diluted share, for Q2 2025.

Net Interest Margin: 3.32% on a fully tax-equivalent basis for the second quarter. 3.26% excluding purchase accounting accretion, up 12 basis points sequentially.

Loan-to-Deposit Ratio: 72% loan-to-deposit ratio at quarter end, indicating significant on-balance sheet liquidity.

Other Borrowed Funds: $250 million outstanding as of Q2 2025, down $710 million sequentially and $2.2 billion year-over-year.

Yield on Average Loans: 5.65%, representing a sequential six basis point increase due to continued repricing and payoffs of lower-yielding loans.

Noninterest Income: $41.1 million in noninterest income for Q2 2025, down $900,000 from the prior quarter, includes a $7.3 million valuation allowance on Arizona and Kansas loans moved to held for sale, and a $4.3 million gain from outsourcing the consumer credit card product.

Noninterest Expense: $155.1 million, down $5.5 million sequentially, driven by lower payroll taxes and incentive-based compensation, includes $1.5 million in property valuation adjustments and lease termination fees.

Net Charge-Offs: $5.8 million, equal to 14 basis points of average loans on an annualized basis. provision expense reduced by $300,000.

Classified Loans: Declined $24.4 million, or 5.1% sequentially. criticized loans increased $176.9 million, or 17.2%, mainly due to multifamily projects with slower lease-up.

Common Equity Tier 1 Capital Ratio: 13.43% at the end of the second quarter, up 90 basis points from the prior quarter. expected to increase by an additional 40 basis points upon closing the Arizona and Kansas branch transaction, anticipated in Q4 2025.

Loan Balances: Declined by $1 billion, impacted by $338 million in loans moved to held for sale for the branch transaction, $74 million in credit card loans sold, $73 million indirect loan amortization, and large intentional payoffs.

Deposits: Declined $102.2 million and remain approximately flat versus the prior year, after adjusting for temporary 2024 deposits.

Dividend: Declared $0.47 per share, representing a 7% annualized yield.

Net Interest Income Guidance: Management expects a high single-digit increase in net interest income in 2026 compared to 2025, assuming generally flat total loan balances and ongoing net interest margin expansion from asset repricing.

Expense Guidance: Full-year 2025 noninterest expense growth guidance was revised down to 0%-1% from the previous 2%-4% range, compared to the reported 2024 number, due to continued operating discipline and reduced staffing costs.

Branch and Product Optimization: Consumer credit card portfolio outsourced; Arizona and Kansas branch transaction expected to close in Q4 2025, with anticipated tangible book value accretion of approximately 2%, and increase CET1 by 30-40 basis points.

Deposit Market Share: 93% of deposits are in regions where the bank has a top-ten market share. 70% of deposits are in markets growing faster than the national average.

Earning Asset Levels: Earning asset levels are expected to bottom in Q3 2025, with loan declines moderating and a near-term increase in investment securities allocation.

SUMMARY

First Interstate BancSystem, Inc. (NASDAQ:FIBK) posted higher net interest margin and an improved capital position, with management attributing margin gains to disciplined asset repricing and proactive liability management. Executives reaffirmed a flat-to-lower loan outlook in the near term, citing large, intentional payoffs and continued strategic repositioning, while projecting a modest step-down in earning assets tied to the Arizona and Kansas branch transaction closure. Classified loans declined sequentially, but criticized loan balances increased, primarily linked to multifamily loans facing slower lease-ups, with management emphasizing comfort in underlying collateral and guarantor strength. Guidance signals confidence in net interest income expansion for 2026 compared to 2025, supported by further asset repricing and margin improvement. The company also reduced its 2025 expense growth expectations to 0% to 1% following operational discipline and timing-related benefits. Management highlighted that capital levels are set to rise further after the branch transaction, providing strategic flexibility for deployment options not yet determined.

Reuter said, "we're now on offense, have some specific promotions, and we're seeing some good activity in the pipeline," suggesting a shift in lending focus following portfolio clean-up.

Della Camera clarified that the valuation allowance on Arizona and Kansas loans was "purely reflective of rate," not credit risk.

Executives stated that the high single-digit 2026 net interest income growth guidance "does not include the divestiture impact" and that they "don't believe that materially alters that figure."

Della Camera indicated incremental securities purchases will have "Lower risk-weighted density, and no credit risk," with new loan production yields "somewhere in that 7% range."

There is no material deliberate loan runoff remaining except for multifamily construction expected to be sold into the secondary market after stabilization, as Reuter affirmed, "Most of that has already happened."

Della Camera confirmed Management expects earning asset levels to trough in Q3 2025, with minimal further step-down linked to the branch deal.

Capital deployment options remain open, as management referenced share buybacks and balance sheet restructuring as potential actions if organic growth opportunities are insufficient.

Management's proactive credit review and "new credit committee process" were noted as key drivers for the observed changes in portfolio metrics and future credit discipline.

INDUSTRY GLOSSARY

Classified Loans: Loans designated as substandard or doubtful due to elevated credit risk, typically tracked closely for potential losses.

Criticized Loans: Loans deemed to have weaknesses which, if unaddressed, may jeopardize repayment, including special mention, substandard, and doubtful loan categories.

Net Charge-Offs: The dollar amount of loans written off as uncollectible, net of recoveries, for a given period, typically annualized as a percentage of average loans.

Net Interest Margin (NIM): The difference between interest income generated and interest paid out, expressed as a percentage of average earning assets.

Held for Sale (HFS): Loans or assets the bank intends to sell rather than hold to maturity, reflected separately on the balance sheet.

Purchase Accounting Accretion: Incremental interest income recognized due to fair value adjustments from previously acquired portfolios.

Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) Capital Ratio: A regulatory measure of a bank’s core equity capital compared with its total risk-weighted assets, indicating financial strength.

Full Conference Call Transcript

Nancy Vermeulen: Thanks very much. Good morning. Thank you for joining us for our second quarter earnings conference call. As we begin, please note that the information provided during this call will contain forward-looking statements. Actual results or outcomes might differ materially from those expressed by those statements. I'd like to direct all listeners to read the cautionary note regarding forward-looking statements contained in our most recent annual report on Form 10-K filed with the SEC and in our earnings release, as well as the risk factors identified in the annual report and our more recent periodic reports filed with the SEC.

Relevant factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from any forward-looking statements are included in the earnings release and in our SEC filings. The company does not undertake to update any of the forward-looking statements made today. A copy of our earnings release, which contains non-GAAP financial measures, is available on our website at fibk.com. Information regarding our use of the non-GAAP financial measures may be found in the body of the earnings release, and a reconciliation to their most directly comparable GAAP financial measures is included at the end of the earnings release for your reference.

Again, this quarter, along with our earnings release, we've published an updated investor presentation that has additional disclosures that we believe will be useful. If you have not downloaded a copy yet, we encourage you to do so. Unless otherwise noted, all of the prior period comparisons will be with 2025. Jim?

Jim Reuter: This remains an exciting and busy time at First Interstate. This quarter, we continued our efforts to refocus our capital investment, optimize our balance sheet, and improve core profitability. In addition to our decision in the first quarter to stop new originations and indirect lending, followed by our April announcement of the Arizona and Kansas branch transaction, we signed an agreement this quarter to outsource our consumer credit card product and the underlying loans moved off of our balance sheet. We continue to take steps to refocus the franchise in our core markets where we enjoy strong market share and believe there is high growth potential.

First Interstate has a strong brand and branch network located in growth markets, a market-leading low-cost granular deposit base, and a team of strong community bankers. We believe these attributes, when combined with recent strategic actions, branch optimization, future organic growth through relationship banking, and the continued repricing of our assets, will lead to higher profitability. We continue to take a proactive approach to credit risk management. This quarter, we were pleased to see stability in nonperforming asset levels, modestly lower classified asset levels, and 14 basis points of annualized net charge-off. Criticized loans did increase, generally reflective of slower lease-up in our multifamily book, and we will discuss that in more detail later in the call.

Our recent strategic decisions have led to strong levels of capital and liquidity, providing us with a solid and flexible foundation. We ended the quarter with a 72% loan-to-deposit ratio, minimal short-term borrowings on the balance sheet, and no brokered deposits. Capital has also continued to meaningfully accrete with our common equity tier one capital ratio ending the quarter at 13.43% with an expectation for continued accretion through 2025. Later in the call, David will address new commentary we have added to our guidance regarding our expectation for a high single-digit increase in net interest income in 2026, supported by our expectation for continued margin improvement assuming generally flat total loan balances in 2026.

We are sharing this color to highlight what we believe is the impact of our disciplined approach to repricing maturing assets, as we continue to focus the organization on organically growing loan balances over the long term. We have also added a slide to our investor presentation this quarter highlighting the strength of our deposit profile, which we believe is the key driver of the long-term value of the franchise. 93% of the deposit base is located in areas where we have top 10 market share, and about 70% of our deposits are in markets that are growing faster than the national average, supporting long-term organic growth.

We opened one additional branch this quarter in Columbia Falls, Montana, which is a small example of our future efforts to drive organic growth. We did not announce any branch consolidations in the second quarter, but we anticipate sequential action moving forward as we progress through 2025 and into 2026. With that, I will hand the call off to David to give more details on our quarterly results and to discuss our guidance. David?

David Della Camera: Thank you, Jim. I will start with our second quarter results. For the second quarter of the year, the company reported net income of $71.7 million or $0.69 per diluted share. Interest income was $207.2 million in the second quarter. This increase is primarily driven by a reduction in interest expense from reduced other borrowed funds balances, partially offset by lower interest income on earning assets resulting from a decrease in average loan balances. Our net interest margin was 3.32% on a fully tax-equivalent basis, and excluding purchase accounting accretion, our net interest margin was 3.26%, an increase of 12 basis points from the prior quarter.

Other borrowed funds ended the second quarter at $250 million, a decline of $2.2 billion from a year ago and $710 million from the end of the prior quarter. Yield on average loans increased six basis points from the previous quarter to 5.65% in the second quarter, driven by continued repricing and payoffs of lower-yielding loans. Interest-bearing deposit costs declined one basis point in the second quarter compared to the first quarter, and total funding costs declined nine basis points due to improving mix shift, driven by the reduction in other borrowed funds. Noninterest income was $41.1 million, a decrease of $900,000 from the prior quarter.

Results this quarter include a $7.3 million valuation allowance related to the movement of Arizona and Kansas loans that are included in the branch transaction to held for sale. This was partially offset by a $4.3 million gain on sale related to the outsourcing of our consumer credit card product. Results were generally in line with our expectations, excluding these items. Noninterest expense declined in the second quarter by $5.5 million to $155.1 million. This decline compared to the prior quarter was due to lower seasonal payroll taxes and reductions in incentive-based compensation estimates. Results include roughly $1.5 million in property valuation adjustments and lease termination fees associated with properties in Arizona and Kansas.

We continue to exhibit expense discipline related to our staffing levels, driving results favorable to our prior expectations. As part of that discipline, we are thoughtfully developing efficiencies as we move forward, which includes our ongoing analysis related to the branch network and our carefully controlling staffing levels and other marginal spend. Turning to credit, net charge-offs totaled $5.8 million, representing 14 basis points of average loans on an annualized basis. We recorded a reduction to provision expense for the current quarter of $300,000 driven by lower loans held for investment. Our total funded provision increased to 1.28% of loans held for investment, from 1.24% at the end of the first quarter.

Classified loans declined $24.4 million or 5.1%, and nonperforming loans also declined modestly. Criticized loans increased $176.9 million or 17.2% from 2025, driven mostly by some of our larger multifamily loans, generally reflective of slower lease-up. Broadly, we are comfortable with the underlying value of the properties and guarantor's ability to support in these circumstances, but lease-up timelines are slower than initially anticipated at underwriting, driving movement into the criticized bucket. Turning to the balance sheet, loans held for investment declined $1 billion, which included the impact from the strategic moves we've discussed.

The decline was influenced by $338 million in loans related to the Arizona and Kansas transaction that moved to held for sale, $74 million of loans sold with the consumer credit card outsourcing, and $73 million from the continued amortization of the indirect lending portfolio. The remaining reduction was influenced by higher larger loan payoffs, including loans we strategically exited. We are remaining diligent in adhering to our pricing and credit discipline. While competition is always strong for great clients, we are seeing initial indications of increasing pipeline activity. We do believe that loans will decline in the near term, but remain optimistic that we will stabilize and return balances to growth in the medium term.

Deposits declined $102.2 million in the second quarter and are approximately flat compared to the prior year, adjusted for a larger temporary deposit on our balance sheet at the end of 2024. Finally, in the second quarter, we declared a dividend of $0.47 per share or a yield of 7%. Our common equity tier one capital ratio improved 90 basis points. Moving to our guidance, our guidance as displayed includes the impact of the consumer credit card outsourcing and excludes the impact of the branch transaction, which we anticipate closing in the fourth quarter. Broadly, the consumer credit card outsourcing reduces the major lines of the income statement and is mostly neutral to forward net income.

We have updated our guidance to reflect our current assumption of one 25 basis point rate cut for the remainder of 2025. As of the end of the second quarter, our balance sheet has shifted from slightly liability sensitive to mostly neutral. We do not believe the rate cut included in our guidance is meaningful to the net interest income forecast we have presented for 2025. Our net interest income guidance reflects an anticipation of continued margin improvement, with an expectation of fourth quarter net interest margin, excluding purchase accounting accretion, approximately 3.4% compared to the 3.26% figure reported in the second quarter.

Compared to the prior quarter's forecast, in addition to the impact from the outsourcing of consumer credit card, the net interest income forecast was modestly impacted by lower risk-weighted density. Our guidance now assumes a more meaningful near-term asset allocation into the investment portfolio versus loan balances, as loans have declined more than previously anticipated. We anticipate beginning to reinvest into the investment portfolio in this quarter. We have added commentary in our guidance noting that we anticipate net interest income to increase in the high single digits in 2026 compared to 2025, supported by our expectation for continued margin improvement, assuming generally flat loan balances in 2026.

We're sharing this to highlight what we believe is the impact of our disciplined approach to repricing maturing assets, and continue to believe we will grow loan balances over the long term. To provide additional detail, we've included a slide in our presentation detailing near-term fixed asset maturity and adjustable rate loan repricing expectations. Note that loan balances represent maturities in the case of fixed rate loans, and maturities or repricing events in the case of adjustable rate loans. These figures displayed do not include contractual cash flow or any prepayment expectations.

We expect loan yields to continue to benefit from the tailwinds of fixed rate repricing, a key component of our expectation for continued net interest margin and net interest income improvement. The investment security figures displayed represent current market expectations for total principal cash flows during each period, which provides another source of anticipated net interest income expansion. Noninterest income guidance is modestly lower than the prior quarter, impacted by the outsourcing of our consumer credit card. Finally, we reduced our noninterest expense guidance from an expectation in the prior quarter for a 2% to 4% full-year increase to 0% to 1% for the full year of 2025 compared to the reported 2024 number.

In addition to favorability in the second quarter expense levels to prior expectations, we are carefully controlling staffing levels and other expense levers, while continuing to invest in production-driven areas as we look to drive our balance sheet growth. These areas of continued focus have reduced our forward expectation of expenses in the near term. While near-term loan levels are lower than previously anticipated, leading to some modest pressure in net interest income in the near term, we are carefully controlling the expense base as we look to drive an efficient return profile for our shareholders.

Turning to the Arizona and Kansas branch transaction, we stated in our previous earnings call that we anticipate tangible book value accretion of roughly 2% at the close of the branch transaction, an improvement in our common equity Tier one ratio of approximately 30 to 40 basis points. As noted, we modestly increased the loans associated with the transaction since the prior quarter, together with the anticipated recognition of the deposit premium in the fourth quarter, which would occur concurrent with close, we continue to anticipate total tangible book value accretion of approximately 2% from the transaction, which would include the impact of the held for sale valuation allowance recognized this quarter.

We now anticipate our CET1 ratio to increase at the high end of the noted range given the additional loans included. With that, I will hand the call back to Jim. Jim?

Jim Reuter: Thanks, David. We are diligently focused on continuing to make sequential progress on our strategic plan and added a slide in our presentation to outline our focus areas, which include refocusing capital investment and optimizing the balance sheet. We believe earnings will continue to improve through 2026 and into 2027, and the ongoing remix of our balance sheet is providing us with liquidity and capital flexibility. We are actively working through our asset quality levels and are optimistic that we are beginning to see positive underlying credit developments, evidence of our disciplined proactive work on asset quality.

We will continue to work diligently to improve the earnings profile of our institution, and we look forward to sharing our progress with you. Now I will open the call up for questions.

Operator: Thank you. Ladies and gentlemen, we will now begin the question and answer session. If you wish to decline from the polling process, please press star followed by the two. And if you are using a speakerphone, please lift the handset before pressing any keys. The first question comes from Jeff Rulis at DA Davidson. Please go ahead.

Jeff Rulis: Thanks. Good morning. Appreciate the color in the deck and the commentary that's helpful. I have a tough question, but I want to try to get the timing on the loan portfolio stabilization. It seems like it's a lot of heavy lifting up front here with the runoff, but maybe some further drift. But thinking about when the portfolio runoff kind of by year-end, or are you thinking that's a first half of next year event in terms of the loan portfolio stabilizes?

David Della Camera: Hi, Jeff. So a couple of things here. Good question. I think to start, there was, as we think about the balances in the quarter, of course, we had the held for sale. We had the indirect and the credit card. We also mentioned large loan payoffs. The other thing you'll note in one of our slides is we did see some line utilization that was a little bit lower this quarter. Adjusted for all of that, the change in loans quarter over quarter, we think was more of a mid 1% number versus the reported on HFI. So as we think about going forward, we do anticipate modestly lower loans in the third quarter.

That's what's incorporated in our guidance. We're hopeful for more stability in the fourth quarter from a reported held for investment level. And then, of course, we're optimistic we can grow.

Jim Reuter: And, Jeff, this is Jim. Good morning. To add on to that, when I look at the payoffs in the quarter, there were four larger loans. A few of those were frankly intentional in that it's the type of lending we don't want to do on a go-forward basis. And one was also a multifamily that went to the secondary market. So, as I've discussed the past two quarters, we completed a deep dive on credit, set up a new credit committee process, to get everybody on the same page. And I can confidently say we're now on offense, have some specific promotions, and we're seeing some good activity in the pipeline.

Jeff Rulis: That's great. Maybe a related question and trying to back into some of the NII guidance sounds like a pretty good commitment on the security side. Any effort to try to peg where earning asset levels could be at year-end? My guess is it sounds out from here.

David Della Camera: Yeah. Good question. So our borrowings ended the quarter about $250 million short-term borrowings. So we think the third quarter is where we bottom in earning asset levels, you know, to your point, a higher level of investment securities than previously near term given the balance sheet trends. Long term, we'd, of course, like to mix shift that into more loans. But third quarter view is the bottom of earning assets. That's Arizona Kansas, so you might get a little bit of a step down into the fourth quarter, but modest. And we think we're around the bottom there.

Jeff Rulis: Okay. And just a last one on the capital side. I think you mentioned the high end of the range of guidance. Maybe CET1 possibly by year-end given the branch deal should be behind you. But I guess, that's part one is maybe a CET1 at year-end. And then part two is just if you wouldn't mind kind of going through the capital priorities from there as you've got a pretty high level building here.

David Della Camera: So I think at year-end, to your point, so 13.4% was the June 30 number. We think we are around the 40 basis point number of additional accretion from the branch transaction. And then modestly lower loans in the near term. So that does get you to a higher number from here, all else equal. As we think about capital, we certainly acknowledge we have strong capital levels, and it creates significant optionality for us. We're very pleased with that. We're looking at a variety of options. So we're looking at all the different capital deployment options from here and considering how we can utilize that to enhance return.

So, you know, more to come there, but we're looking at our different options.

Jeff Rulis: Okay. Thanks. I'll step back.

Operator: Thank you. The next question comes from Andrew Terrell at Stephens Inc. Please go ahead.

Andrew Terrell: Hey, good morning.

Jim Reuter: Morning.

Andrew Terrell: Hey. I wanted to start off just, I mean, it was good to see the classified loans down sequentially, but, you know, I think it was a bit surprising to see special mention step up so much this quarter, I think, particularly given the work you guys have done over the past, you know, six, nine months or so regarding kind of the credit review process. I was hoping you could just talk maybe a little bit more about what drove that special mention migration that they kind of lost content you would or would not expect? And then does it feel like we should continue to anticipate continued migration into criticized classified?

Jim Reuter: Yeah. Good morning, Andrew. I'll take that. You know, we saw, as you mentioned, the step up in the criticized. A lot of that was driven with new information on some multifamily projects. That, you know, as we've mentioned, primary source of repayment is what we focus on. And the builder's original plans for absorption and how that project would go are not being met. I've actually looked at two of the three larger ones that are in the group that moved up, been by and seen them personally. Still feel good about the collateral. Really like the guarantors. So it's really that primary source of repayment.

Otherwise, it was fairly flat, and I can tell you that I see the fruits of our proactive management of credit.

Andrew Terrell: Okay. Great. I appreciate the color, Jim. And I could also just ask on kind of the expense guidance. It feels like lots of kind of moving pieces here, but David, you just maybe talk a little more about kind of near-term expectations? It seems like the guidance implies there should be kind of a core lift on expenses in 3Q. And then can you remind us just the maybe expense saves from the branch divestiture that's scheduled in the fourth quarter? And I think I would assume that there are no branch consolidation efforts reflected in kind of the expense guidance. So should we think about those as potentially a positive to the current kind of stated guidance?

David Della Camera: Sure. So first on the I'll kind of take that backwards to forward. So there are no branch divestitures outside, included in the guidance. You're correct there. So anything that occurs there. Again, just given timing, we think that's more of a 26 impact than a 25 impact actually on the expense figure. But you're correct. No expectation is included in that. Related to Arizona, Kansas to remind on the commentary from the prior quarter, about a mid twos number as a percentage of the deposit base is how we view that annualized cost impact. After close there.

Quarter to quarter, as we think about our expenses, you're correct that we do anticipate third and fourth quarter to be a higher reported number than second quarter for expenses. A couple drivers there includes things such as our medical insurance. We generally see a little bit higher in the back half than the front half. That'll be included in there. There was some timing in the second quarter on some of the salary and wage items that will be modestly higher in the third quarter. And then we had some benefits in our tech spend in the second quarter that we'll see a little bit higher in the third quarter.

Nothing generally unusual, but some timing items as well that will cause that increase.

Andrew Terrell: Got it. That's really helpful. I appreciate it, David. And then if I could ask also just on the guidance. One, I appreciate you guys putting, you know, some of the repricing detail into the presentation this quarter. That's really helpful. On the comment for the net interest income, high single-digit growth in 2026. Does that factor in the, I would presume, kind of NII headwind from the branch divestiture in 4Q and would that, you know, materially alter the high single-digit 2026 expectation?

David Della Camera: So it does not include the divestiture impact. We don't believe that materially alters that figure. Broadly, loans and deposits associated with the transaction don't look dissimilar than the bank's loans and deposits as a whole. So we wouldn't view that change as materially different. And, again, the capital raised with the transaction, there's different options related to that, of course. So at this time, that high single-digit would be excluding any decision there related to the loans, deposits, and capital.

Andrew Terrell: Got it. Okay. I appreciate the color, and thanks for the questions.

Operator: Thank you. The next question comes from Kelly Motta at KBW. Please go ahead.

Kelly Motta: Hey, good morning. Thanks for the question. In terms of the expense base, circling back to that, I appreciate the color on the expense saves regarding the branch divestitures. Wondering how you're thinking about the reinvestment of the savings versus flowing to the bottom line. And, specifically, with regards to frontline hires, if you have the right talent to, you know, start to drive the inflection in growth as we look to next year.

Jim Reuter: Yes. Good morning, Kelly. You know, David walked through some of the color around the expense saves, but, you know, there's a couple things here. When we look at growth, and NII and different things, obviously, another lever we manage is our expenses. And so we're going to pay attention to that closely as we drive for stronger NII. But we will not sacrifice having the right people on the team and being able to do the things we need to grow. We do have the right people on the team, so the cost saves are not, you know, coming at the expense of talent.

So, anything we need to do to invest to grow, it's going to be a priority.

Kelly Motta: Got it. That's helpful. And then in terms of I appreciate the color that the NII outlook includes more securities purchases given the slowdown in loans. Maybe for David, if you could provide color as to what your the new yields you're getting on the loans you are booking now.

David Della Camera: Sure. So on the security side, the incremental purchases won't look holistically dissimilar than what we currently have in the book. The way we broadly think about that is just given the structural rate sensitivity position of the company, shorter duration similar to what we have today, broadly. Lower risk-weighted density, and no credit risk. So that's kind of limited to no credit risk. That's broadly how we think about that. From a yield perspective, you know, if you kind of think something like a mid-duration MBS as an example, and there's, of course, a variety of different things we would be purchasing. That's five year plus 80 to 90 today. That'll move, of course, but something in that range.

New loan production, somewhere in that 7% range. It's going to be to that five to seven year point on the curve, but that's broadly where we are today.

Kelly Motta: Got it. That's helpful. Last question for me, and then I'll step back into the queue. On the loan side, I appreciate the color on some of the larger payoffs you had, some of which was intentional. Looking at the line for commercial that was down pretty, and I know you noted some drop down in the utilization there. Can you provide additional color as to what you're seeing on the commercial side? And if there was any sort of just like end of quarter flows that we should be keeping in mind in terms of thinking about the average balance sheet? Thank you.

David Della Camera: Yes. Thanks for the question. So I'd note a few things there. First, would note the, to your point, the utilization, that did have an impact there. Second, would note there was one of the larger payoffs we referenced was in that segment. So that was an impact as well. The other impact is the loans that moved to held for sale. There were some commercial real estate, some C&I. So there was some impact there as well quarter over quarter related to that. So we don't believe that's reflective, of course, of our anticipation going forward and changing that category. Certainly a focus as we think about small business. But some one-time movement in the quarter.

Kelly Motta: Great. Thanks for the color. I'll step back.

Operator: Thank you. The next question comes from Jared Shaw at Barclays. Please go ahead.

Jared Shaw: Hey, good morning. It's just as we're looking just to confirm as we're looking at year-end '25, loan levels as an exit. That, including everything, is, like, down 10 to 12% when include the loan sales, include the indirect, include some of that payoff activity? Is that the right way to think about it?

David Della Camera: Yeah. So how we're thinking about that is the guide of six to eight is the excluding the other items and an additional one to one and a half on indirect and then the held for sale balances, we anticipate, of course, leaving in the fourth quarter. When we anticipate that transaction to close. So that would be a marginal about 2% impact. That's correct.

Jared Shaw: Okay. Alright. And then you look at the valuation allowance, that you took on those loans, can you give any color on what the rate versus credit impact of that could have been?

David Della Camera: So that valuation allowance was a rate mark on the loans. It was purely reflective of rate. And yeah. So that's just a rate mark there.

Jared Shaw: Okay. Thank you.

Operator: Thank you. The next question comes from Matthew Clark at Piper Sandler. Please go ahead.

Matthew Clark: Hey, good morning. I appreciate the questions. First one for me on the loans transferred to held for sale. $338 million. I think you called it out as being related to the branch sale, but I think when you announced the branch sale, it was only $200 million of loans. So are those all tied to those branches, or did you guys also move some additional loans into HFS?

David Della Camera: They were all tied to the branches. There were some additional loans during the quarter that were identified related to the transaction, some relationship-related loans, so all related to the branch transaction.

Matthew Clark: Okay. Great. And then in terms of the loan portfolio, can you quantify what's left in the book that you would argue is not relationship-based and would prefer to write off? We, you know, obviously see the consumer credit portfolio being the latest piece of it. But trying to get a sense for any way to ring-fence some kind of deliberate runoff from here?

Jim Reuter: Yeah, Matthew. I don't see a lot of deliberate runoff left in the book. I do think the one challenge we have is multifamily that are construction that once they're leased up and fully stabilized, some of those have an intention to go to the secondary market. So we'll see some of that. But, you know, our message to our team is, because something leaves doesn't give us a bogey to not find a replacement and grow the bank. So I would say the bigger loans that, when I arrived at, I had a preference would leave the balance sheet. Most of that has already happened.

Matthew Clark: Okay. And then on the slide deck, the deposit market share slide, does that imply that you'd like to exit some additional markets where you're not in the top five? It's about 30% of the total. Not to say you'd exit all 30%. But or is it more to illustrate an opportunity to grow market share? It just looks like Colorado kind of stands out in some of those markets as not being the top one.

Jim Reuter: Matthew, it's not to illustrate where we want to exit. It's to illustrate where we have existing density, which gives us an advantage. And if you look at a lot of those states, and MSAs and areas, they're growth areas. So we think it's a positive that we have that type of market share. And we hope to gain it in other areas as well. So where you see less of it, it's not an indication we're going to retreat. It's an indication of where we need to make progress.

Matthew Clark: Got it. Okay. Thank you.

Operator: Thank you. The next question comes from Timur Braziler from Wells Fargo. Please go ahead.

Timur Braziler: Hi, good morning. Looking at the capital priorities and examining the options here on a go-forward basis, I guess, Jim, you made it pretty clear that M&A is off the table. Looking at the dividend, you guys already have one of the highest dividends out there. I guess that would leave share buybacks or some sort of balance sheet restructure. One would be a slower use of capital, one would be a more kind of acute use of capital. I'm just wondering kind of where the thought is between those two, the mix of, and then to the extent that some balance sheet restructure is in the cards, how much of that might be included in the 2026 NII guidance?

Jim Reuter: Yeah, Timur. That's a good question. You know, as you've already pointed out, we have strong capital levels, and it's going to increase, as we've already talked about, which gives us a lot of flexibility. And so obviously, dividend is important to us. We've demonstrated that historically and currently today. Organic growth will be our focus. If we can grow the bank and make use of the capital. But all that said, if we're not able to utilize the capital in that fashion, we will look at all on the table, including all the things you mentioned. So, you know, we have a focus on creating shareholder value, and so that will be an active conversation for us.

David Della Camera: And, Timur, the 26 guide, that does not include or looking at the loans specifically that are maturing and or resetting through 26, I calculate that to be about 12% of the outstanding loan book. Do you guys view that as an opportunity, or is there a potential threat that maybe some of those either get refi-ed away into the secondary market or still some composition of, quote, unquote, the type of lending that you don't really want to do?

I'm just trying to get a sense of this elevated portion of resets that are coming due in the next eighteen months and what effect that might have on balance sheet composition and your expectations for average earning assets here to stabilize in the not too distant future?

Jim Reuter: Yeah, Timur. That's a good question. And, as I mentioned earlier, I don't see a lot of loans that don't fit our profile in that mix. There is some multifamily that, as I mentioned, that when stabilized, the borrower's intent was to go to the secondary market. Obviously, we're not going to compete with the secondary market from a rate and structure perspective. And so that's why we show loan growth fairly flat. But our intent is to replace that with production and growth. And as I mentioned, we're seeing good activity in the pipeline, and, you know, C&I owner-occupied and different things. So that's where we're headed there. And optimistic that we can replace a lot of that.

Timur Braziler: Okay. And then just last for me around credit. Just looking at the recent trends in criticized loans coupled with your unchanged net charge-off guidance. I guess, what's giving you comfort to the fact that the increase in criticized that are now over 7% of the loan book isn't going to drive some volatility around charge-off activity, either in the back end of '25 or into '26?

Jim Reuter: Yeah, Timur. What continues to give us confidence in that area is that a lot of the movement into criticized has been that primary source of repayment. We still like the collateral and the guarantors that are backing those credits, and they're well located, which is part of why we like the collateral. So that's why we continue to be confident, and, I think, you know, again, I've mentioned this before, proactive credit management, I think, is one of the tenets of running a good bank in all economic cycles, and that's what you're seeing in play here.

Timur Braziler: Great. Thank you for the questions.

Operator: Thank you. We have no further questions. I will turn the call back over to Jim Reuter for closing comments.

Jim Reuter: All right. Thank you, and thank you, everybody, for your questions. And as always, we welcome calls from our investors and analysts. So please reach out to us if you have any follow-up questions, and thank you for tuning into the call today.

Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, this concludes your conference call for today. We thank you for participating, and we ask that you please disconnect your lines.

Where to invest $1,000 right now

When our analyst team has a stock tip, it can pay to listen. After all, Stock Advisor’s total average return is 1,039%* — a market-crushing outperformance compared to 182% for the S&P 500.

They just revealed what they believe are the 10 best stocks for investors to buy right now, available when you join Stock Advisor.

See the stocks »

*Stock Advisor returns as of July 29, 2025

This article is a transcript of this conference call produced for The Motley Fool. While we strive for our Foolish Best, there may be errors, omissions, or inaccuracies in this transcript. Parts of this article were created using Large Language Models (LLMs) based on The Motley Fool's insights and investing approach. It has been reviewed by our AI quality control systems. Since LLMs cannot (currently) own stocks, it has no positions in any of the stocks mentioned. As with all our articles, The Motley Fool does not assume any responsibility for your use of this content, and we strongly encourage you to do your own research, including listening to the call yourself and reading the company's SEC filings. Please see our Terms and Conditions for additional details, including our Obligatory Capitalized Disclaimers of Liability.

The Motley Fool has no position in any of the stocks mentioned. The Motley Fool has a disclosure policy.

  •